TEMS™ INVESTIGATION 14.

1 USER'S MANUAL

This manual is provided by Ascom Network Testing AB without any kind of warranty. Improvements and changes in this description due to typographical errors or inaccuracies in current information, or improvements to programs and/or equipment may be made by Ascom Network Testing AB at any time without notice. These changes will, however, be incorporated into new editions of this manual. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, nor translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the copyrighted owner, Ascom Network Testing AB. TEMS is a trademark of Ascom. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. © Ascom 2012. All rights reserved. Document number: NT12-7002 ver 1.0

Contents

Contents

1. Introduction

1

1.1. Fundamentals of TEMS Investigation 14.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.1.1. Package Options – Licensing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.1.2. Connectable Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.2. What’s in This Manual (and What’s Not) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.3. Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2. Recently Introduced Features in TEMS Investigation

8

2.1. What’s New in TEMS Investigation 14.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2.1.1. LTE Cell Frame Timing IEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2.1.2. Extended Control Functionality and Logging for Sony Ericsson Xperia arc S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.1.3. POLQA for CS Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.1.4. Cell Whitelists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.1.5. Scripted Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2.1.6. Manual Pinpointing Mode in Pinpoint Window . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2.1.7. Hisilicon LTE Chipset Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2.1.8. Via CDMA/EV-DO Chipset Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2.1.9. New Connectable User Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2.1.10. New Connectable Scanners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.1.11. LTE RRC Redirection Events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.1.12. New LTE Information Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.2. What Was New in TEMS Investigation 14.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.2.1. Control Functions for Smartphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.2.2. New Logfile Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.2.3. Speech Quality Measurement with POLQA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.2.4. Searching, Filtering, and Highlighting in Message Windows. .13 2.2.5. Expansion of Scanning Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.2.6. Improved Service Testing Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.2.7. Logfile Export Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

NT12-7002 ver 1.0

i

TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual

2.2.8. Improved HASP Soft License Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.2.9. New Connectable User Terminals in TEMS Investigation 14.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 2.3. What Was New in TEMS Investigation 13.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 2.3.1. Alternative Mobile-to-mobile AQM Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 2.3.2. CS Fallback Events and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 2.3.3. Extended Set of LTE RACH Information Elements . . . . . . . 16 2.3.4. Improved Handling of Qualcomm-based LTE Devices . . . . 17 2.3.5. CDMA/EV-DO Rev. B Measurement and Analysis . . . . . . . 17 2.3.6. New Connectable User Terminals in TEMS Investigation 13.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 2.3.7. WCDMA Scanning with Rohde & Schwarz . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 2.3.8. CDMA Scanning with PCTel SeeGull MX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 2.3.9. New Connectable Scanners in TEMS Investigation 13.1 . . 19 2.3.10. Software Update Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 2.3.11. Enhancements in TEMS Investigation 13.1.1 . . . . . . . . . . 19 2.3.12. Enhancements in TEMS Investigation 13.1.2 . . . . . . . . . . 20 2.4. What Was New in TEMS Investigation 13.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 2.4.1. TD-LTE Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 2.4.2. Data Service Performance Verification with Generic Device. 21 2.4.3. Selection of Preferred Workspace at Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . 22 2.4.4. New Utility for Sharing Script Configuration Settings . . . . . . 22 2.4.5. New LTE Information Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 2.4.6. New Connectable Equipment in TEMS Investigation 13.0 . 22 2.4.6.1. UMTS Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 2.4.6.2. LTE Scanner: Rohde & Schwarz TSMW . . . . . . . . . 23 2.4.7. Support for SSH2 Protocol in Iperf Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 2.4.8. Support for 64-bit Windows 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 2.4.9. Performance Improvements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 2.4.10. Additional New Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 2.4.11. New Features in TEMS Investigation 13.0.1 . . . . . . . . . . . 24

3. Basics of TEMS Investigation

26
26 26 26 26

3.1. Recommended Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2. Installing TEMS Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3. Starting TEMS Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4. Quick Guide to the User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ii

Contents

4. User Interface

29

4.1. User Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 4.2. Workspaces and Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 4.2.1. Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 4.2.1.1. Opening Workspaces from a Command Prompt. . . . 31 4.2.1.2. Predefined Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 4.2.2. Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 4.3. The Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 4.3.1. Record Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 4.3.2. Replay Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 4.3.3. Report Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 4.3.4. File and View Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 4.4. The Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 4.4.1. Help Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 4.4.2. “Play” Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 4.4.3. “Record” Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 4.5. The Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 4.6. Keyboard Shortcuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

5. The Navigator

36

5.1. Equipment Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 5.2. Menu Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 5.3. Info Element Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 5.3.1. Presentation Attributes of Information Elements . . . . . . . . . 37 5.3.2. Editing the Color Ranges of Information Elements . . . . . . . 37 5.3.2.1. Automatic Setup of Color Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 5.3.2.2. Manual Setup of Color Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 5.3.3. Editing the Marker Sizes and Symbols of Information Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 5.4. Logfile Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 5.5. Worksheets Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

6. Cell Data

41

6.1. Creating a Cell File in XML Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 6.2. Creating a Cell File in CEL Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 6.3. Loading Cell Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 6.4. Loading Cell Data from Mentum CellPlanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

NT12-7002 ver 1.0

iii

TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual

6.5. Use of Cell Data in Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

7. Managing External Equipment: General

44

7.1. Connectable Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 7.2. Overview of User Interface Components Dealing with External Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

8. Activating External Equipment

46
46 47 47 47 48 48 48 48 48 48 49 50 50 50 51 51 51 51 51 52 52 53 55 56 57 58 58 58 59

8.1. Plugging In External Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.1. Plugging In Phones and Data Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.2. Plugging In Ericsson Fixed Wireless Terminals . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.3. Plugging In Scanners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.4. Plugging In GPS Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.5. Plugging In Equipment Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.6. Plugging In Stand-alone AQM Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2. Starting TEMS Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3. The Navigator Equipment Tab: Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.1. Top Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.1.1. Device Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.2. Bottom Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.2.1. “Activities” Subtab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.2.2. “Information” Subtab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.3. Detection of Equipment: Special Cases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.3.1. Detection of PCTel SeeGull EX Scanner . . . . . . . . . 8.3.3.2. Detection of PCTel SeeGull MX Scanner . . . . . . . . . 8.3.3.3. Detection of DRT Scanners and Rohde & Schwarz TSMW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.3.4. Detection of HTC Touch Pro2 Phones . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.3.5. Detection of Equipment Not Covered by License . . . 8.3.3.6. Detection of Network Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.4. User-assisted Detection of Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.4.1. Mapping Device Ports to Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.4.2. Qualcomm Devices with LTE/TD-LTE Capability . . . 8.3.4.3. LG and Samsung Devices with LTE Capability. . . . . 8.3.4.4. Data Service Testing with Arbitrary Devices . . . . . . . 8.4. Activating and Deactivating External Equipment in TEMS Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.1. Activating External Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.2. Deactivating External Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

iv

Contents

8.5. Managing GPS Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 8.6. Further Features of the Navigator’s Equipment Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 8.6.1. The Refresh Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 8.6.2. Re-pairing Phones with AQM Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 8.6.2.1. Details and Limitations of the Re-pairing Function . . 62 8.6.3. Device Detection Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 8.7. Saving of the Equipment Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

9. Operating and Controlling External Equipment Manually

64

9.1. Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 9.1.1. Control Function Support by Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 9.1.2. Functions of Dialog Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 9.1.3. Access Class Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 9.1.4. AT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 9.1.5. Band Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 9.1.6. BLER Target (WCDMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 9.1.7. Cell Barred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 9.1.8. Cell Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 9.1.8.1. Cell Lock in GSM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 9.1.8.2. Cell Lock in WCDMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 9.1.9. Nonvolatile Item Read/Write. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 9.1.10. PESQ Device Pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 9.1.11. PLMN Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 9.1.12. Radio Access Technology Lock (Lock on RAT) . . . . . . . . . 74 9.1.12.1. RAT Lock vs. Technology-specific Control Functions: Sony Ericsson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 9.1.12.2. RAT Lock vs. Technology-specific Control Functions: Nokia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 9.1.13. RRC WCDMA Capability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 9.1.14. Speech Codec Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 9.2. Voice/Video Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 9.3. Data Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 9.3.1. Presentation of Data Service Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 9.4. Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

10. The Status Control Monitor

80

10.1. Equipment Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 10.2. Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

NT12-7002 ver 1.0

v

TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual

10.3. Service Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4. Computer Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5. Logfile Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6. Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

81 82 82 82

11. Logfiles

83

11.1. Recording Logfiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 11.1.1. Inserting Filemarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 11.1.2. Further Recording Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 11.1.3. Positioning Logfiles by Pinpointing in the Map Window . . . 86 11.1.3.1. Basic Pinpointing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 11.1.3.2. Advice on Pinpointing and Recording . . . . . . . . . . . 88 11.1.4. Buffering in Connection with Logfile Recording . . . . . . . . . 88 11.2. Loading Logfiles for Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 11.2.1. Opening a Logfile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 11.2.2. Logfile Metadata and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 11.2.2.1. “General” Subtab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 11.2.2.2. “Equipment” Subtab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 11.2.2.3. “Activities” Subtab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 11.2.2.4. “Statistics” Subtab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 11.2.3. Loading Logfile Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 11.2.3.1. Play Section of Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 11.3. Loading Logfiles from Other Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 11.4. Viewing Logfile Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 11.5. Logfile Transfer via FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 11.5.1. Setting Up Logfile Transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 11.5.1.1. FTP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 11.5.1.2. Logfile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 11.5.1.3. Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 11.5.1.4. Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 11.5.2. Starting Logfile Transfers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 11.6. Exporting Logfiles in Other Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 11.6.1. Preparing an Export Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 11.6.2. Specifying the Contents of Export Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 11.6.2.1. Selecting Information Elements to Export . . . . . . . 100 11.6.2.2. Text File Specific Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 11.6.2.3. MapInfo Specific Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 11.6.2.4. ArcView Specific Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 11.6.2.5. Marconi Planet Specific Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 11.6.2.6. Ethereal (Wireshark) Specific Settings . . . . . . . . . 106

vi

Contents

11.6.2.7. MDM Specific Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 11.6.2.8. Saving and Loading Export Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 11.6.3. Executing Export Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 11.6.4. Command Line Controlled Logfile Export. . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 11.6.4.1. Mandatory Command Line Switches. . . . . . . . . . . 107 11.6.4.2. Optional Command Line Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 11.6.4.3. Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 11.7. Merging Uplink AQM Data into Logfiles (UMTS). . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 11.7.1. Retrieving Uplink AQM Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 11.7.2. Preparing and Performing a Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 11.8. Generating Logfile Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 11.8.1. IE Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 11.8.2. Events Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 11.8.3. Mobiles Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 11.8.4. Scanned Channels Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 11.8.5. User Details Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 11.8.6. Saving and Loading Report Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 11.8.7. Generating the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 11.8.8. Report Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

12. The Pinpoint Window

120

12.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 12.2. Creating Planned Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 12.2.1. Opening a Map Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 12.2.1.1. Supported File Formats Holding Map Sets . . . . . . 120 12.2.1.2. Map Set Metadata Shown in Pop-out Pane . . . . . 121 12.2.2. Map Handling and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 12.2.3. Creating a New Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 12.2.4. Editing a Route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 12.2.5. Deleting a Route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 12.2.6. Unloading a Map Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 12.3. Walking Planned Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 12.3.1. Loading and Walking a Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 12.3.2. Repeating Parts of a Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 12.3.3. Skipping Waypoints of a Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 12.4. Pinpointing Without a Planned Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 12.5. Relation to Other TEMS Investigation Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 12.5.1. Data Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 12.5.2. Coexistence Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

NT12-7002 ver 1.0

vii

. . . . . . . . . . Spectrum Analysis . 14. . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . .2. . . . 13.2. . . . . . Presentation: Synch Channel Data Window . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . Manual Scanning . . 15. . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes on GPS Units in Scanners .3. . 14. . . . . . . Setup of Pilot Scan: Anritsu . . . .2. .TEMS Investigation 14. . 13. . . 13. . . . . . SRU . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . .5. . . .2. . . . . . . . . . GSM Scanning 139 139 140 140 140 141 142 143 143 14.5. . . . . . . . 13. . . . Setup of Pilot Scan: General . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Scan Manually.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . .10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . 14. . . . . . 14. . . Pilot Scanning (with SCH Scanning). . . .5. . . . . . . . . .2. . . Scanning Methods and Capabilities . . . . . .2. . . . . WCDMA Scanning 144 144 146 146 146 148 150 151 152 153 153 154 157 15. . . Presentation of RSSI Scanning . . . .7. 13.4. RSSI Scanning . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . . .4. . 13. . . . Presentation: “CPICH Scan” Bar Charts . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . 15.2. . . . . . . .2. . . . . . 15. 13. . . . . 14. .3.2. . . . . . . 15. . . . Setup of RSSI Scan: PCTel SeeGull . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . 14. . . . viii . . Setup of RSSI Scan: Rohde & Schwarz TSMW . . . . . 13. . . . . . SRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. 15. . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . Setup of Pilot Scan: PCTel . . Rohde & Schwarz TSMW . Setup of RSSI Scan: General Settings . . . . . . . . DRT Scanners . . . . . .3. . . . . . . Scanning: General 134 134 135 135 135 136 136 136 137 137 137 137 138 138 13. . . . .1. 14. . . . . . . . . . . . .2. Performing a Scan Manually . . . . . .1. . . . . . Setup of Pilot Scan: Sony Ericsson. . . . Sony Ericsson Phones and SRUs . . . Recording Scan Data Manually . . . . . . PCTel Scanners. . . . . Presentation: General . . . . . . 15. . . . . Setup of RSSI Scan: Sony Ericsson. Scripted Scanning. . . . . . . . . Presentation: “CPICH Scan” Line Charts. .2. . . .4. . 15. . . . . . . . . Presenting Scan Data . . . . .8. . . . . . Setup of Pilot Scan: Rohde & Schwarz TSMW .2. .3. . . . . . . . . . . .5. . .1 User’s Manual 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14. Notes on Scanner Multitasking . . . . . Presentation: “CPICH Data” Status Windows . . . . . .2.9. . . . . . . . . .5. . . Scanning Methods and Capabilities . .2. . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data on Scanning Devices . . . . . . 13. . .2.3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . 13. . .

. 165 15. .5. . . . . 162 15. . . .6. . .0 ix . . . .1. . .1. General Settings . . . Scanning Methods and Capabilities .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup of LTE Signal Scan: Transcom . . . . LTE Scanning 167 16. . . . . . . . . . . . .1. .3. . .2. . . . . .2. RSSI Scanning . .1. . . .1. . . . Customizing the Presentation . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 15. . 175 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 15. . . .5. Sorting of Scrambling Codes. .2. . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . .13. . . . . . . .1. . . . Presentation: Network Search Window . Setup of LTE Signal Scan: General . . . . . . 159 15. . . . . . Context Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1. . . . . 163 15. . LTE Signal Scanning. . . . . . . . . .7. . . . 177 16. . . . Spectrum Analysis. . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . .2. Presentation: Spectrum Analysis Bar Charts . .2. . . . . .13. .2. . . . 165 15. 176 16. . 158 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 15. . Setup of Network Scan.2. . . . . . . . 163 15. . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Presentation: RSSI Scan Bar Chart . . Setup of LTE Signal Scan: Andrew . . . . . 169 16. . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . .6. . .1.6. . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup of LTE Signal Scan: PCTel . . . . 163 15. .4. . . . . . . . Presentation: BCH Scanning . . . . 168 16. . . . .2. .13. . . . . .5. . . . .1. . .1. . . . . 160 15. . 161 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 15. Context Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . Setup of SCH Timeslot Scan . . Setup of RSSI Scan . . . . . . . .2. . . .1. .1. 169 16. . . . . . . . . SCH Timeslot Scanning . . . . . . . . Context Settings . . .2.1. . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . Presentation: SCH Timeslot Scan Bar Chart . . . . . General Settings . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . 165 15. .1.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Settings . . . . .1. . Customizing the Presentation . . . . . . . 172 16. . . . . . .5. . . . . . Setup of LTE Signal Scan: Rohde & Schwarz TSMW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . Presentation of LTE Signal Scan . . . . 3”) . . . . . . . . . . .3. 158 15. . 161 15. .1. . .Contents 15. . . . . 158 15. . . . . . . . . . . .4. 177 NT12-7002 ver 1. . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . .4. .5. . . Presenting Scrambling Codes from Multiple UARFCNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . . . .12. . . . . . . .8. . . 159 15. . . . 166 16. . . . .5. .4.6. . . General Settings . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . 168 16. . . . . . . Network Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 15. . . . . . . . . . 165 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 15. . Presentation: “Finger Info” Status Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. .6. . .11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. 160 15. . . . . . .2. . . .2. . . . . . . . . 164 15. . . 174 16. .2.4. UARFCN Ranges (“Interval 1. . . 167 16. . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup of LTE Signal Scan: DRT. . 161 15. . . . . . .6. . . Sorting of Cells . . . . .2. . . . . . . .2. Setup of Spectrum Analysis Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . .3. Context Settings . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. Setup of Spectrum Scan: Transcom . . . . . . . . . Spectrum Scanning. . . 16. . . .3.1 User’s Manual 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . .5. .1. . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . .3. . . . . x . . . . . . . . . 18. . . . . 16. . . . . . . . . . 17. . . . . . . 16. . Setup of Spectrum Scan: Andrew . . . . TD-SCDMA Scanning 182 182 182 183 183 184 184 185 185 185 17. . .3. .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . 16. . . . 18. . Pilot Scanning . . . . . . . . 16. . Scanning Methods . . . . . . . . . Customizing the Presentation . . . . 17. . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . 16. . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . 16. . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . Setup of Enhanced Power Scan: General . . . . . . . Setup of RSSI Scan: PCTel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spectrum Scan Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup of Spectrum Scan: General . .4. . 17. . . . . . . . . Setup of Spectrum Scan: PCTel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup of Pilot Scan: PCTel . . . . 17. 16. . . . . . . 18. CDMA Scanning 186 186 187 187 187 188 192 192 192 192 18. . . . . . 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 177 178 178 178 178 178 178 179 179 179 179 180 180 180 180 181 17. . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . 18. . . 16. . . General Scan Settings . . . . .4. . . . . . . .6. . . RSSI Scanning . . . . . .3. . . . . . .3. . . . . . . 18.1. Setup of RSSI Scan: Transcom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . .4. . Presentation: Strongest Scanned PN Bar Chart . . . . . 16. . .2. Presentation of Pilot Scan .1.5. . . Setup of RSSI Scan: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . Enhanced Power Scanning. . . . . . . . Sorting of Pilots .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . 17. . 18. Presentation of Enhanced Power Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16. . . . . . Setup of RSSI Scan: DRT . . . . . . . . . 16. . . . . . . . . 18. 16. . Presentation of RSSI Scan . . . . .1. . . . . . . . Setup of Spectrum Scan: DRT. . . . .4. . . . Setup of RSSI Scan . Setup of Pilot Scan: Andrew . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . General Scan Settings .3. . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . 16. . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . 16. . . . Setup of Enhanced Power Scan . . . .2. . . . .3. . . . .3.4.3. . .3. . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . RSSI Scanning . Presentation: “PN Scan” Bar Charts . . .4. . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. .1. . . . . . . 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanning Methods . . . . Pilot Scanning . . . . . .4.3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . Setup of Pilot Scan . . Sorting of Cells .1.4.TEMS Investigation 14. . . . . . . .5. . . . Presentation of RSSI Scan . . . . . 17. . . . .4. .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17. . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16. . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . .5.

. . . . . 214 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capabilities of Devices . . . . . Presentation: Narrowband Interference Scan Bar Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . 201 19. . . . . . . . . .4. . . . 194 18. . . 212 20. Spectrum Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . 194 18.1. . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 18. . . . . Snippets . . . . . . .1. . . . . .5. . . . . .Contents 18. . Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . .6. . . . . .1. . Setup of RSSI Scan . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . 210 20.6. . .1. . . . . . . WiMAX Scanning 197 19. 213 20. .1. . . 196 19. .4. . . . . Scanning Methods. . . . . . . . . Preamble Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . 198 19. . Spectrum Analysis. . . . . . . General Settings . . .5. . . . . Interference Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 18. . . . . Introduction to Service Control . . 204 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . The Service Control Designer . . . . . . .5. . . 196 18. .2. 203 20. . .8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Settings . . . . . . . . .9. . . 197 19. Setup of Spectrum Analysis Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 18. Setting Up a Data Service Activity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 18. . 201 19. . . . . . . . . . . .6. 209 20. . . . . Context Settings . . . . . . . . 195 18. . . . . Supported Services by Cellular Technology . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Presentation: RSSI Scan Bar Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequences . .5. . . . Setup of Preamble Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 18. . . . . .1. .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 20. . . . . . .2.5. . . . . Stand-alone PS Attach and Detach. . . . .1.6.3. . .2. . . .5. . . . 201 20. . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . 206 20. . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup of Narrowband Interference Scan . . . . . . . . . 194 18. . . . . . . .6.2. . . . .3. . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. Narrowband Interference Scanning. . . . .10.3. 204 20. . . . . . . 214 NT12-7002 ver 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Scan Settings . . . RSSI Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Network Connection . . . 201 19.5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . Context Settings . . .5.1. . Setup of Spectrum Analysis Scan . . . . . Setup of RSSI Scan . .0 xi . 198 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . Presentation of Spectrum Analysis Scan . . .7. .1. . . . . . . . . 197 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 19. . . . . . . . .10. . . .3. . . . . . 194 18. . . . . . . RSSI Scanning . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basics of Creating Scripts (with Voice) . . . Workflow Control Structures . . . . . Service Control 203 20.1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 18.

. . . . 20. . .10. . . . . . Presentation of Data Service Testing . . . . . .1. . . .2. .16. . . . . .13. . . . Wait For with Periodic Events . . . . .10. .11. . . . . . 20. . . . 20. . . 20. . . .5. . . . . . . . . . .6. .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15. . . . 20. . . UE Control Functionality . . . If–Else Constructs .6. . . . . .10. . . . . . . . .15. . 20. Start Recording . . Activities (Reference Section). . 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparations. . . . . . . . . . AT . 20. . . . . . . . . . . . General Aspects of Script Execution . . . . .7. . . . . Monitoring Equipment Status . . . Filemark . . . . . .9. . . . . .15. . . . . . . . . . . .3.6. . .16. . . . . 20. . . . . . . . . . . Validating Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. Wait . . . . .4.10.16. . . .10. . . . . . . . .15. . . 20.10.1. . . . . . . . Example 3: Concurrent Activities on the Same Device . . . . . . . . . 20. .10. . . . . . . . . . .6.4. . . .14. . . . . . . . Viewing Statistics on Script Execution . . . . . . . Activate . . . . . Windows 7/Windows Vista and IPv6. 20. . . . .4. 20. . . . . 20. . Example 2: Concurrent Activities on Different Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example 1: CS Voice/Video – Caller and Receiver . .1. . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . .TEMS Investigation 14. . . . . . . . Wait For . . . . . . . . . . Terminate. . . . . . . . . 20. . . . . . . . . . . . 20. .2. .3. . . 20. . .1. . . . Run Script . Deactivate . . . . . . . . While Loops . .5. . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . .15. . . Parallel Activities . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . 20. . . . . Notes on Script-controlled Logfile Recording . . . . 20. . . 20. . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12. . . . . . . .10. . Running Scripts from the Service Control Monitor . . . Waiting For a Given Outcome of an Activity . Running Scripts from the Service Control Designer . .1. . . .15. . . . .16. . 215 216 218 218 219 224 225 226 226 227 228 229 230 230 231 231 232 232 232 233 233 233 233 234 234 235 236 236 236 236 236 236 237 237 237 237 237 238 xii . .2. . . . 20. . . . . . . . . . 20. . . . . . . . . 20.10. . . . .15. . . .16. . . . . . . . Waiting For a Scheduled Point in Time.16. .1 User’s Manual 20. . .1. . . . . . . . 20. . . . . . . 20. 20. . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20. . . . . . . . . . Suppressing Parts of a Script . . . . . .16.10. . . . 20. 20. .5. . Running Scripts. . 20. . . . . . . .4. . . Band Lock . . . .8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . 20. . . . Activity Properties That Control Execution . . .1. .10. . .16. . 20. . .1. . . . . . . . . Editing Workflows and Script Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . .16. . . . . .1. . .8. . . . . . .3. . . Radio Access Technology Lock . . .10. .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.15. . . . . . . . . . . . . .16. . . 20. .4. . . . . .10. .1. . . . . . . .15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . Control Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . .16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15. . . . . . . . 20. . . . . . 20. . .3. . . . . . . . . .3.2. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .3. . 243 20. . . . . 252 20.16.16. . . . . .16.16.6. . . . . . . . . . . . 240 20. . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-mail Send. . . 240 20. . .2. . . .3. . . .7. . . . . . . .3. . . . . .2.16.4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . Predefined Snippets for Messaging . . . . Predefined Snippets for IP . . . . . . . . Messaging Activities. . . . . . 261 20. . . . . . . . 264 20. . . . . . . 264 20. . . .3. . . . . . Parallel . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . .16. .16. . 258 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 20. . . . . .16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . 243 20.6. . . . . . 238 20. . . . . . . . .3. .16. . . . .6. . . . . . . . .16. PS Attach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16. . . . . . 250 20. . . .16. . . . Start IP Sniffing . . . . . . . . . . . .14. . . Control Flow Activities . .16. . . . . . .16. . . MMS Receive . . . . . . . .6. 249 20. .16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UDP.4. . . .6. . . 240 20.3. . Terminate . . . . . . . . . FTP Upload . .2. . Network Bandwidth (Iperf Testing) . . . . . . . . 238 20. .1. .16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 20.5. .16. . . . .4. . . . . . .16. . . . . . . . 260 20. . . . . . . . . .16. . . . . . . . . Run Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Answer . . . SMS Receive. . . . .Contents 20. . . 262 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16. . . . . . . . . . . . SMS Send . Wait For. .16. . . . . . . . . . .16. .16. 240 20. . . .2. . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 xiii . . . . . . . . . Ping . . . . . . . . .4.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIP Unregister . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4. . While . . . . . . . . . . . 259 20.6. . . . . . .3. . 258 20. . . . . Video Dial . . . . . . . 248 20. . . . . . . . . . .13. . . . .3. . .2. . .9. . . . . . .16. . . 258 20. . . . . . . . . . 262 20. . . . . . . 248 20. . 247 20. . . . . . . .10. . . . . . . . WAP Streaming. . . . . .16. . . . . . . . . . . . SIP Register . . 248 20. .7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 20. .16. . . . . . . . . . . . Streaming . . . Wait .6. . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 20. . . .3. . .8. . . . . 247 20. . . . . . . . . . HTTP Get . . . 265 NT12-7002 ver 1. . . . . 264 20. . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . .3. .2. . .12. . . .4.4. . 264 20. . . . . . . MMS Send. . . . . . . . . .16. . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . FTP Download. . . . 259 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . .3.16. . .16.5. . PS Detach . . . .16. . . 264 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16. 264 20.1. . . . . . . . Predefined Snippets for Scanning.1. .16.2. . . . . . . . .16. . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . .2. Video Activities . . . 239 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop IP Sniffing . . . . .16. . . .1. . . . . . . . . .16. . . Network Disconnect . .4. . . . . . . . . IP Activities.16. . . . . . . 254 20. . . . . Network Connect. . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . WAP Get . . . . . . . . . . Hang Up . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . 240 20. . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . .16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . .15. . . Scan Activities . . . . . . . .11.16. . . Sequence . . .2. . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . 254 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5. .5. . . . . . . . . If–Else . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . .6. . . . . . . 247 20. . . . . . . .16. .4. . E-mail Receive . . . . . . . . . .16. . . 253 20. . . . . .2. . . .16. .16. . . . . . . . . . . .

.2. . . . . . . . .16. . . 273 20. xiv . GSM Barred Cells . . . . . 273 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . 21. . . . . . . . 266 20. . . .7. . . How to Set Up VoIP Testing . .7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Properties by Device. .17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VoIP Hang Up . .2.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VoIP Answer .18. . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . GSM EDGE Capability . Failure Handling Section . . .7. . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . Extended Reports . .7. Predefined Snippets for Video . . . . 21. . . . .10. . . . 267 20. . . . . . . . . Predefined Snippets for Voice. . Exporting Configuration Sets . . .16. . . . . .2.16. . 21. . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 20. . 268 20. . . . .5. . 272 20. 274 20. . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21. .19. .7. . . . . GSM Cell Selection . . 275 20. . .7. . . . . . Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . 270 20. .19. . . . . . . . AQM Measurement . . . . .17. . 21. . . . . . . . . . .2. .2. . .5. . . . .2.7. .1. . . . . 271 20. Managing Configuration Sets. . . . . . .2. . 21. . .4. . . . . . . . . . Voice Activities. CAS Lock on PLMN . . Saving and Loading Scripts . . . .8. .2. . . . . . . . . . . . .16. . . Deleting Configuration Sets . . . Answer . . .1. . . .1. . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . VoIP Dial . . . . . Importing Configuration Sets. . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . . 275 20. . . GSM Adjacent Scan . . . . . . . . . . Hang Up .2. . Tutorial on Porting Scripts between PCs . . . . . . . . . . Common Controls . . . . . . . . .20. . . . . . . . . . . .16. . 269 20. . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . .2. . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.18. . . .16. . . . . . . . . .2. . .2. . . . .2. . .17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity Section. . . . . Saving Workflow as Image . . . . 266 20. . CAS Access Class . . . . . .3. . Zooming the Workflow Pane . . . . . . 269 20. . . . 21. . . . Descriptions of Configuration Sets. . . . . .18. 267 20. . . . . . 268 20. . . . . . . . . . . . .1 User’s Manual 20. . . . . . . .6. 271 20. 274 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . 275 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 20. . . . . . Configuration Sets . . . . . . . . Context Menu in Workflow Pane . . . . . .20.4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.1. . . . . . . . 266 20. . . . . . . .3.20.16. . . .7. . . . . .7.20. Activity Filter. . . . . VoIP Voice Quality . . . . . . . .1. .1. . . . . . . . . . . . .2.16.2. . . .2. . . . .18.18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19. . Further Functionality in the Service Control Designer Window . . . . . . . . . . . .TEMS Investigation 14.16. . . 266 20.2.2. 21. . 270 20.16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . 21. . . . . .18. . . . . . . . . . Device Properties 277 277 279 279 279 280 280 280 281 282 282 283 21. .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7. CAS Speech Codec .2. . . . . . . . 268 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16. . . . . . . . . 275 21.16. . . .2. 271 20. Properties of ST-Ericsson Chipset Based Phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . General Activity Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 20.

. 294 22. Adding an Event to the Event Expression . . .5. . . . . . . . . . WCDMA RRC Radio Capability . . . . . .2. . . .2. . . . . . . .6. . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . .5. . . . GSM Cell Barring Control. . 285 21. Audio Indications for Events . . . . .7. . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Audio Indications . . . . . . . . .11. . 284 21. . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . 283 21. . . . . .5. 297 22. . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . Adding a Layer 3 Message to the Event Expression . . Channel Lock Control (GSM) .5. . . . . . . . . .3.14. . . 290 22. 287 21.3. . . Layer 3 Messages . . . . . . . . . .6.3. . . . . . .3. . . . . . . .3. . . . WCDMA Barred Cells . . . . . . . . . . . 293 22. . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . .3. . . Deleting Audio Indications . . . 287 21. . . . . .2. . . . . . 287 21. . . . . . . . . .1. . 299 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 22. . . . . . . . Properties of GPS Units . .3. . . . . Activating Audio Indications . . . . Sector Lock Control (WCDMA) . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . .8. . . .9. Adding an Information Element Criterion to the Event Expression. .5. . . . .4. . . . .0 xv . .Contents 21. . . Predefined and User-defined Events . . .5. Properties of Qualcomm Chipset Based Devices . . . 288 21. . . . . . WCDMA Cell Selection . . .5. . . . . . Muting All Audio Indications . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . 284 21. . . . . Properties of Nokia Phones (NTM3) . . Properties of Samsung LTE Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . .13. .12.3. . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . .2. . . . 287 21. Deactivating Audio Indications . . Setting Up a User-defined Event. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . .7. 286 21. . . . 290 22. . . . . . . . . . . Properties Specific to Sony Ericsson Xperia arc S. . . . . . . . . . . 289 22. Editing Audio Indications . 288 21. 293 22. . . . . . . . . 295 22. . . . . .5. . . . . 300 NT12-7002 ver 1. . . . . . .2. . . . . . 293 22. Adding an Operator/Delimiter to the Event Expression . . . . .5. . . . . . . 299 22. . . . . . . . . . . . GSM Tx Power . . . . . . . . . . 299 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3. . . . .1.2.3. Presentation of Events . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . GSM Handover . . . . . Adding Audio Indications . 292 22. . . 299 22. . .4. . . . . . . . . . . .1. .4. . . . . . . . . . . . 290 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 21. . . . . . . . . . . 289 21. . WCDMA BLER Target. . .4. . . . Editing User-defined Events. . .2. . . . .2.3. . . . . . Events 290 22. .1. . . . 297 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating Cell Whitelist Events. . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . 285 21. . 293 22. . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . .2.10. . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of User-defined Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 22. . . . . . . Deleting User-defined Events. . .2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 User’s Manual 23. . . . . . . . . . .4.2. .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . 24. . . . . Import. . . . . . Presented Data . . . . . 24. . . . . 24.1. . . Export/Import of Presentation Windows . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.3. . . . . . . . . . . Messages Tab . 23. Color Ranges . . . .3. . . 26. . . . . .1. . .4. . . . .2. . . . . 23. . . 25. . . 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24. . . . . . . . . . .TEMS Investigation 14. . . . .1. . . Types of Presentation Window . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . .2. . . . . . . . . General Tab . . . . . . .1.1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . Window Updating and Synchronization . . . . . . . . . 23. Export. . . . . . .5. Other Window Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Channels: MS/DC/PS . . . . . . . . 23. . . . . . . Changing the Status Window Font Size . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . Presentation: Basics 301 301 301 302 302 303 303 304 304 304 304 23. . . 24. .6. . . . . . . . . . 26. Changing Message Window Contents and Properties . 25. . . . . 24. . . 26. . .6. . . . Setting Up Status Window Contents. General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi . . . . . . . . . . Events Tab. . . .1. . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event Counter Windows 315 315 315 316 316 316 316 25. . . . . . . Repeating Columns in Multiple Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Set Equipment Number” Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Window Tabs . . . Changing Status Window Properties . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23. 26. . . . . Window Properties . . . . . . . . Copying Window Contents . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . 23. . . . . . . 25. . . . . . . Events Tab. . . . 24. . . . . . .7.6.4. . . . . . . . . 25. . . . . . . . . . 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1.4. .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-SCDMA Physical Channel Monitor . . . . . . 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.1. . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . Non-standard Status Windows . . . . . . . Status Windows 305 305 305 309 312 312 313 313 314 314 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . Resetting Event Counter Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25. . . . . . Message Windows 317 317 317 318 318 26. . . . General . . . . .7. . . . CDMA Finger Info . . . . . . . . . 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Event Counter Window Contents and Properties . . . .

. . . . . . . . . Columns Tab . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Charts 329 29. . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . 336 29. Changing GPS Window Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . . .2. . .1. . . . . .4. .4. . . . .3. . . Window-specific Features . Plain-text Message Decoding . The Video Monitor . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . and Highlighting in Message Windows. . 319 26.4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 29. .0 xvii . . . . Freezing a Message Window . . Changing Line Chart Contents and Properties . . . 322 26. . . . . . . . 326 27. . . . . . . . 323 27. . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . .4.7. . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 27. .2. . 321 26. . Editing General Properties of a Chart . . . . . . . Video Streaming and the Video Monitor 324 27. . . Highlighting Functions . . . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . 320 26. . . . . . . .1. How to Test Video Streaming . . . . . . Presenting Data from a Different Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mode Reports Window . . . Contents of the Line Chart Panes . .4. . 320 26. . .Contents 26. . . Editing the Contents of a Chart . . . Presentation of Discarded Messages . . . . Deleting a Chart . . . . . Troubleshooting Video Streaming . . . . . . . . . . . 326 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Window Synchronization . . . Adding Charts. . . .4. . . 329 29.1. . Searching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 26. . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 26. . . . . . . . . . . Filtering Functions . . . . . . . . . . 323 26. . . . . . . 324 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 29. . . . . 330 29. . . . . . . . . 327 29. . . . . . . . . . . . Evaluating Video Streaming Performance . . . . . . . . . 332 29. .1. . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Properties of the Video Monitor . Organization of the Line Chart Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Line Chart Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . 332 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . 336 NT12-7002 ver 1. . . . . . .4. Message Window Catch-up . . . .7. . . The GPS Window 327 28. . . . . . . .8.5. . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . 319 26. . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search Functions . . . . . .2. . . . 318 26. . . . .5. . . . . . Filtering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 26. . . .1. . . . . .3. . . . . . .4. . . . . . 332 29. . . . . . . . 325 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 30. . . . . 31. . .1. . . . . . . . .3. . . . .5. . . 30. 30. . . . . . . . . . . Presenting Cell Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . .4. . . . .4. . 31. . . . . Deleting a Chart . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . Adding Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. .1. Additional Information . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . Map Concepts. . . .4. . . . .3.1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . The Cell Line Theme. . . Contents of the Bar Chart Panes . . 30. . . . . . . .3. . . 30. . . . .3. . . . .1. . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . 31. . Setting Up General Bar Chart Properties . . . . .5. 31. . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up Bar Chart Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . 30.1. . . . . . . . . . . . . 30. . .4. . . . . . . . . . .3. . Presentation Mode. . . . . . Specifying the Map Scale . . . . . . .1. . xviii . . . . . . . . . . 31. . . . . 30. . . . .5. . . . .2.3. . Presenting Data from a Different Device . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . Themes and Theme Types . . . . Organization of the Bar Chart Window . . 31. . . . . . . . . 30. . 31.1. . . .4. . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . 30. . .1. . . . . The Cell ARFCN Theme (GSM) . . . 30. . . . . .2. . 31. .4. . . . . . . Parallel Coordinates/Stacked Bar Chart Presentation Mode . . . . . . . . . Setting the Map’s North Direction . . . . Presenting Data: Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . Constructing a GeoSet from Map Files. . . . . . 31. . . . . . The Cell Theme. . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . .5. . . Exporting the Bar Chart Window.5. . . . Colors . . . Highlights of This Chapter. . . .4. . Presenting Events . . . . . . . . . Single IE Presentation Mode. . . . The Cell Color Theme . . . . . 30. . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . .5.3.1. 30. .1 User’s Manual 30. . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . Examples of Bar Chart Presentations. . . . .5. . . . . Presentation Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes on Route Plotting and Updating . . . .1. . . . . . Positioning Bitmap and TIF Maps . . . 31. . .3. . .TEMS Investigation 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . 31. .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . 31. . 31. . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . Editing General Properties of a Chart . . . . . . . . Bar Charts 337 338 339 340 340 340 341 341 342 343 344 347 351 352 352 353 355 30. . . .2. . . . . . . . .4. . . .3. . . . Specifying the Map Position. . . . . . .5. . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . Data. . . . . . . . . . 31. . . . 31. . .5. . 30.3. .5. Presenting Pinpointing . . . . . . . . . . Map Windows 356 356 356 357 359 359 359 360 360 360 361 362 364 365 366 367 370 373 375 377 31. . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . 31. 31. . . . . . Presenting Information Elements . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . Multiple IE Components Presentation Mode. . . . . . . 30. . .4. . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31. . . Interval and Labeling . .

. . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7. . . . .1. .8.2. . . . Editing Themes . . The Scale Bar. .2. . . . . Background . . Purpose of KPIs .5. . . 386 32. . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Right-hand Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retainability . . . . . . . SQI for UMTS. . . . . . . 384 31. . 381 31. . 378 31. . . . . . . . . . . . 391 34. . 388 33. . “Events of KPI Type” . . . Obtaining Significant KPI Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . 383 31. . . . . . . . . . . . 382 31. .3. . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessibility . . . . Key Performance Indicators – KPIs (UMTS) 387 388 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . .2. .2. . The General Window 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GeoSet Manager . .6. . .9. . . . . . . . . . 378 31. . . . . . . . . General Procedure . . . . . . . . Deleting Themes . 389 33. . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . .7.8. Speech Quality Index – SQI 391 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reordering Themes . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . Theme Legend (Legend Tab). . . . Information on Single Theme Markers (Info Tab). . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . 377 31. . .2. Obtaining KPIs with TEMS Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . .Contents 31. . . . . . . . .8. . . Map Context Menu . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. 381 31. . . . . . . 389 33. .1.2. . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . 377 31. . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . Integrity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 33. . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . 384 31. . . . . . . . . . . 386 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. Previous View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Map Window Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.10. SQI for CDMA . . 378 31. . . . . 391 NT12-7002 ver 1. .2. . . . . . . 380 31. . . . 389 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 xix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . 383 31. . Layer Control . . . . . . . . .6. 391 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . View Entire Layer . . . . . . . . Theme Statistics (Info and Graph Tabs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Map Projection . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . .10. . . . . . . . . . . Adding Presentation Layers . . .9. . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . 384 31. . . 383 31. . . . . Layer Control . . . . . .3.3. . . . . .10. . Visibility of Themes . . . . . . . . .10. 390 34. . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . Projections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . Layers . . . . . . . . .6. . 378 31. . . . . .6. . . . . .

Obtaining AQM Data. . . . .1. . . . . The PESQ Algorithm. . . . . . 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 User’s Manual 34. . . . . . .1. . . . . . . 408 37. 392 392 393 393 394 394 394 395 396 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SQI-MOS vs. 34. . . Wideband SQI-MOS (UMTS) . . . Recording AQM Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . .5.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Presentation of AQM Data . . . 402 36. 398 36. . . . . . . Recording AQM Data. .1. . . . . . . .3. 34. Old SQI (UMTS) . UMTS. . . . . .2. . . .4. .3. Information Elements . . . .4. . . . .1. . . . . . . . Narrowband vs. . . . . . . . Comparison with Other Radio Parameters . . . . . . 401 36. . . 403 36. . . . . . . . . . . . .1. 397 35. . . . . . 403 36. Recommended Structure of AQM Scripts . . . . . . .3. . 397 35. . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . Preparations. The POLQA Algorithm . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . .2. . 34. . . 34. . . . . . . . . .2.1. .TEMS Investigation 14. .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 37. . . . . . . AQM with Call Generator/MRU 399 36. . . Information Elements . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. .1. . . . . . . . .2. . . Notes on PESQ for Wideband (UMTS) . . . . . . .3. . . . . . .399 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . Practical Considerations .1. . . . .5. . . . . . . . 401 36. . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . 34. . . Obtaining AQM Data. . . . . . . . 407 37. . . . . Notes on AQM Scores Obtained with Individual Phone Models. . . . . . . . . . . . 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . .2. . Alignment of SQI-MOS and PESQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2. . 409 xx .1. . . . . 402 36. . . . .2. . . Presentation of AQM Data . . . . . . . . Merging Uplink AQM Data into Logfiles . . . . Measurement Setups in TEMS Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 37. . . . . SQI-MOS Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . Mobile-to-mobile Audio Quality Measurement with MRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 37. . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . AQM with Audio Capturing Unit (ACU) 405 37. . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . 405 37. 34. Input to the SQI-MOS Algorithm . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. CDMA . . . . . . . . . . 406 37. . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . .3. . .1. . 406 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . PESQ Key Performance Indicator . . . . 402 36. . . . . Mobile-to-fixed Audio Quality Measurement with Call Generator.2. . . . . . . . . Audio Quality Measurement (AQM): General 397 35. . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . 420 42. . . . . Video Telephony Quality Index – VTQI 412 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Properties of VSQI. . . . . . . . . . . . C/I Measurement (GSM) 418 419 42. . 415 40. . . . . . . . .0 xxi . . . . . . . . .2. Activating Phones . . . . . . . . . Why Measure C/I?. . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic (Realtime) VSQI . . . .3.2. . . . . . . . . 415 40. . . . . 420 42. . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What VTQI Is Based On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. Manual Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . An Example . . . 413 40. . . .1. . . . . . . . . Requirements on a Robust C/I Measure . . . Presentation of AQM Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM Channel Verification 422 43. . . . . . . . . . . 411 38. . . . . . 411 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Test Case. . . 419 42. .3. . . Static and Dynamic VSQI . . . . . . . . . 415 40. . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . Mobile TV Quality Index – MTQI 42. . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . 416 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 42. . . . . . . .1. . . . Static VSQI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 39. . 422 43. . AQM for VoIP 410 38. . . . . . . . Editing and Removing Test Cases . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . 414 40. . . . . . . . . . . . Accuracy .5. .2. . 413 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The GSM Channel Verification Window . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 NT12-7002 ver 1. . . . . . Automatic vs. . . . General Properties of VTQI. 414 40. 423 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents 38. . . . . . . . . . . .4. Obtaining AQM Data . . . . . . 424 43. 424 43. . . What VSQI Does Not Consider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video Streaming Quality Index – VSQI 414 40. . . . . Update Rate . . . . . . . . . . . .4. .2. . . . . .4. . . . . . . . What VTQI Does Not Consider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . 420 43. . . . . . . . .4. . 412 39. . . . . . . . . .3. . Details on C/I Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What VSQI Is Based On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. .

. . .6. . . . . . . . Command Sequences. .13. . . . . . . . . .1. . . . Notes on Performance . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B. . .6. . . . . . . .8. .6. . . .9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Shortcuts. . .11.3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . 427 427 427 428 428 429 429 429 430 431 431 431 Appendix A. 441 Index 443 xxii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving and Opening Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . “Data” Category Information Elements. . Running the Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shortcuts for Active Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . A. . . . 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Verification . . Creating Test Reports. . .12. . . 43. . . . .2. . . . .1 User’s Manual 43. . .4. . . .3. . Getting Started. . 43. . . . . . . .10. 43. Drive Testing Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43. . . 43. . . . . . . . Keyboard Shortcuts 433 433 433 434 434 A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 User Interface 437 439 C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43. . . . . . Summary of Test Case Status Values . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comparison with Pre-12. . . . . . . . .TEMS Investigation 14. . . Logfile Load Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . 43. . . . . Resetting a Test Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 C. . Error Conditions . . . . . . . . File Types in TEMS Investigation Appendix C. . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Control vs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. Equipment Handling . . . Automatic Verification . . . . . Example . . . . . . . A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1. real-time analysis. Note: Please note that the TEMS Investigation product exists in various editions. and post-processing all in one. Introduction Thank you for choosing TEMS Investigation – the industry-leading tool for troubleshooting. reducing costs and saving time and effort for operations staff. To get the most out of TEMS Investigation. This means that descriptions of functionality and external device compatibility are not necessarily applicable in every single respect to the TEMS Investigation edition you have purchased.0 1 . Offering data collection. optimization. Introduction 1. please take the time to read this user manual in order to gain an in-depth understanding of the product features. This complete solution eliminates the need for multiple tools. NT12-7002 ver 1. TEMS Investigation is a complete solution for all of a network operator’s daily network optimization tasks. verification. Any restrictions that apply to your edition are indicated in the Release Note included in the delivery. all of which are covered by the product documentation but are not differentiated there. and maintenance of wireless networks.

The application also boasts a vast array of windows for presentation of logfile data.1 User’s Manual 1. Customers who dispense with TEMS Investigation data collection are still able to use the non-realtime functions of the application (analysis of a single logfile. A/EV-DO Rev.1 is an air interface test tool for cellular networks. and other measurement devices. 2 . Still more powerful post-processing facilities are provided by the product TEMS Discovery. it collects data and records it in logfiles. data cards.1. 1. in the case of Qualcomm. B WiMAX (scanning only) TEMS Investigation enables monitoring of voice and video telephony as well as a variety of data services over packet-switched and circuit-switched connections.1. Fundamentals of TEMS Investigation 14. Supported cellular technologies can be freely selected and combined.1. Other phones are licensed separately for each supplier or. except that WCDMA always comes with GSM support included.TEMS Investigation 14. 0/EV-DO Rev. supporting all of the following technologies: • • • • • • GSM/GPRS/EGPRS WCDMA/HSPA/HSPA+ LTE (FDD and TDD) TD-SCDMA (including interaction with GSM) cdmaOne/cdma2000/EV-DO Rel. TEMS Investigation is primarily a tool for data collection and real-time analysis.1 TEMS Investigation 14. logfile reports. Package Options – Licensing TEMS Investigation can be purchased with or without data collection capability (“Base Software Package” and “Replay Package” respectively). It interfaces with phones. separately for chipsets with different capabilities. The Base Software Package provides the ability to collect data with Sony Ericsson phones in UMTS networks and with Qualcomm chipset based terminals in CDMA networks. scanners. logfile export).

is likewise sold as a separate option. Audio quality measurement is supported for GSM. Sequans. HTC. TD-SCDMA. It also lists and describes all preconfigured presentation windows. Connectable Equipment TEMS Investigation 14. The Information Elements and Events volume provides full details on all IEs and events found in the application. 1. These terminals are built on chipsets from Altair. Option. Rohde & Schwarz. GCT. including ones from Ascom. GPS units can be connected for geographical positioning. Pantech. section 10. Qualcomm. NT12-7002 ver 1. DRT. A separate license option is available for collecting data with multiple phones concurrently. What’s in This Manual (and What’s Not) This book describes the user interface of TEMS Investigation 14. Hisilicon. and Transcom. Sequans. Nokia. This option includes all required hardware as well as the ability to connect that hardware to TEMS Investigation. positioning by pinpointing (either manual or according to planned routes) is supported. Huawei. WCDMA. LTE. Samsung. Audio quality measurement (AQM).0 3 . Introduction The Base Software Package permits data collection with one phone at a time. such as whether a data service is being run. 1. LTE. CDMA. and Via. WCDMA. The manual gives a comprehensive account of all functions in the application.1 for further details on the range of connectable equipment. and ZTE. For indoor environments.1. Together they allow comprehensive monitoring of UMTS. and CDMA. ST-Ericsson. including ones from Sony Ericsson. GERAN–UTRAN–E-UTRAN inter-RAT handover). Anritsu. It concentrates on how to use that application once it has been installed and all external devices are connected and ready for use.Chapter 1.2.1 supports a wide variety of user terminals. Novatel Wireless. LG. TD-SCDMA. Leadcore. including PESQ/POLQA. See the Getting Started Manual. and CDMA networks and of interaction among them (for example. Sierra Wireless. and WiMAX scanning. A variety of devices are supported for GSM.1. PCTel. See the Release Note for further information. The number of external devices that can be connected simultaneously in the application is dependent on many factors.2.

designed to accommodate phones and other equipment during drive tests.1 User’s Manual The Technical Reference volume contains file and report format descriptions.pdf which is found in the TEMS Investigation installation folder.htm. For exhaustive information. and other information of a technical nature. please refer to the documentation accompanying the phones. In the remainder of this book.com/en/index/support/supporttems/technical-support/tems-investigation. These. Equipment Cases The TEMS equipment cases. a Getting Started Manual is provided which covers all preliminaries.ascom. however. external devices are discussed further whenever certain capabilities are required in order for a function in TEMS Investigation to be supported. FAQ Many questions regarding TEMS Investigation are answered in the FAQ sections found on the Web at www. External Equipment The basics on external devices are covered in the Getting Started Manual. 4 . chapter 10. The manual does not describe the full range of functions and capabilities of the connectable phones. Release Note Some technical issues not addressed in this manual are dealt with in the file ReleaseNote. operate. and control external equipment is described in the present document.TEMS Investigation 14. are not covered here but have their own manuals. The same applies to all other third-party products mentioned in the manuals. Besides the above reference manuals. crucially the following: • • • • Configuring the PC for TEMS Investigation Installing the TEMS Investigation software Licensing issues Configuring the PC and phones for data services How to activate. sometimes refer to TEMS Investigation documentation.

Along with this material you will also receive our customer magazine. You can also obtain up-to-date details on patch releases. Layer 3 messages.0 5 . User-defined events are specified by logical expressions which trigger the event when they evaluate to true.ascom. TEMS Bulletins TEMS Bulletins contain updates on new TEMS product releases. click the link “Register for TEMS Bulletins”. Contact information is given on the Web at www. please contact technical support. TEMS News. and conditions involving information elements. Event An event is generated by the TEMS Investigation software in order to indicate that something worthy of note has occurred. you can define events of your own. chapter 7. All information NT12-7002 ver 1. Besides these. Definitions This section explains a number of central concepts in TEMS Investigation which are frequently referred to in this user manual.3.com/networktesting under the link “TEMS Support”. go to www. To sign up for this free service. All predefined events are found in Information Elements and Events. Data Services This term refers to services requiring a data connection (either circuitswitched or packet-switched).ascom.com/networktesting and. These expressions can contain predefined events.Chapter 1. Information Element Information elements are pieces of numeric or text-format data that are presentable in the TEMS Investigation user interface. under the heading “TEMS Bulletins”. and general information about the TEMS portfolio. either in the cellular network or in connected equipment. as opposed to voice calls. events. Introduction Technical Support If you have a question about TEMS Investigation which is not answered in any of the manuals nor in any of the other sources mentioned above. 1. A number of events are predefined.

“LG UE”. Mode Report A mode report is a status or measurement report generated by a phone. “Sierra Wireless CDMA data card”.TEMS Investigation 14. a suitable qualifier is prefixed. the GSM information element Neighbor RxLev contains the signal strengths of all neighboring channels (there may be up to 32). or messages from various protocols. most often a Layer 3 message. the term “route” refers to a planned route created in that window. etc. Outside of that context. Message The term “message” in this user manual generally denotes an air interface message described in the wireless technology specifications. an argument is used. 6 . rather than phones. Argument of Many information elements contain an array of values rather than a single value. The word “terminal” is therefore sometimes used instead of “phone”. etc. or mode or error reports produced by phones. When a subset is meant. “Sony Ericsson GSM phone”. USB modems. or events.1 User’s Manual elements handled by TEMS Investigation are found in Information Elements and Events. For instance. chapter 3. Complete details on the arguments of information elements are given in Information Elements and Events. without any difference in meaning from the point of view of TEMS Investigation. the word is used more loosely. Phone The term “phone” covers user terminals from all supported technologies. you must specify an argument in the form of a neighbor index between 1 and 32. Some user terminals supported by TEMS Investigation are in fact data cards. To pick one item from the array. “Samsung LTE modem”.). A “message window”. chapter 3. however (chapter 26). To present the signal strength of a particular neighbor channel. and/or a more precise term is used (“GSM phone”. may list either air interface messages. Information Element. Route In connection with the Pinpoint Window.

0 7 . for example a PCTel scanner. Phones with scanning capabilities are not referred to as scanners. Introduction Scanner The term “scanner” denotes a device dedicated to scanning. Track A track is a walk along a planned route in the Pinpoint Window.Chapter 1. NT12-7002 ver 1.

even for FDD. since this enables the use of techniques such as CoMP (coordinated multipoint). it is also highly beneficial between sites.1. Estimate distance to a site and determine its position by triangulation. What’s New in TEMS Investigation 14. Compared to FDD there is also a more complex range of interference issues to handle. adjust timing in a pico cell to a surrounding macro cell. Optimize heterogeneous cell deployment: for example. Recently Introduced Features in TEMS Investigation 2.1 LTE Cell Frame Timing IEs Inter-cell synchronization is a central concept in LTE networks. the same frequency being used on both uplink and downlink. taking into account the propagation delay from the macro cell eNodeB. accurate synchronization between cells is crucial. For TD-LTE in particular with its unpaired spectrum. TEMS Investigation 14. Compare and evaluate synchronization techniques. Still. 2. synchronization is necessary within a site owing to the overlap between its cells. including interference between UEs in adjacent cells and between eNodeBs. scheduling traffic in an efficient way among multiple cells.1 presents cell frame timing data in newly constructed information elements for the current LTE serving cell and neighbors. This information can for example be used to: • • • Verify and troubleshoot synchronization in the network.TEMS Investigation 14.1. • • 8 . Identify co-sited cells (having identical or nearly identical timing offsets) in an unknown network.1 User’s Manual 2.1.

1. taking smart measurements with this device several steps further: • • • • Access class control – modify access class settings PLMN control – lock on MCC + MNC combination BLER target control – modify BLER target assigned by network Speech codec control – redefine set of speech codecs enabled in phone The data collection and presentation have also been augmented in various respects.Chapter 2.1. The following additional control functions have been implemented for the Xperia arc S phone. In this version of TEMS Investigation it is possible to enter a list of allowed cells (“whitelist”) and have it converted into a user-defined event. POLQA is obtained in the ACU (TerraTec) audio quality measurement configuration. Recently Introduced Features in TEMS Investigation 2.4. including PESQ and POLQA. This event can then be used in a script to trigger some action whenever the tester is in NT12-7002 ver 1. POLQA can be computed for both narrowband and super-wideband speech. to verify a new or reconfigured cell cluster. See also section 2.3. Cell Whitelists A common constraint in cellular network testing is to restrict tests to a predefined set of cells: for example. previously introduced for VoIP.0 9 . or to perform some procedure that would disturb regular network operation unless it is limited to cells that have been specially configured for the purpose. POLQA for CS Voice The state-of-the-art POLQA algorithm for speech quality assessment. is now available also for circuit-switched voice.3.2.1. notably: • • • UARFCN and SC indicated for each SIB C/I per TCH computed for GSM circuit-switched services SIR target presented 2. Extended Control Functionality and Logging for Sony Ericsson Xperia arc S Sony Ericsson Xperia arc S now supports audio quality measurement. 2.1.

EV-DO Rev.1 introduces support for devices equipped with a Via CDMA/EV-DO chipset. 2. Net1. 2.TEMS Investigation 14. so that a cell whitelist event can be generated repeatedly and continuously listened for by a script. Manual Pinpointing Mode in Pinpoint Window In the Pinpoint Window.1. as opposed to being planned in advance and followed during the walk.1. 2.1.1 adds support for Hisilicon chipset based LTE devices. Offering both modes in the Pinpoint Window tool adds further to its flexibility and usefulness.1 User’s Manual an allowed cell.9.6. 2. Scripted Scanning Scanning tasks can be scripted instead of being run manually from the Navigator pane. Controlling scanning from a script brings the same benefits of convenience and automation as for other testing activities. routes can now alternatively be traced manually while walking. Hisilicon LTE Chipset Support The accessibility of LTE network testing is further broadened as TEMS Investigation 14. The manual mode is similar to the pinpointing function in the Map window. • • New Connectable User Terminals Axesstel MV610VR (Gateway R90.5.8.1. A “periodic” flag has been added as a new property of userdefined events. 2. Making use of these features lets the user conduct rigorously selective network testing in a minimum of time and without any extra effort in the field.7.1. Via CDMA/EV-DO Chipset Support TEMS Investigation 14. B) Huawei E398S (Hisilicon chipset based) 10 .

2.12. 2. • • • New LTE Information Elements PDSCH BLER and ack/nack counters for Transport Blocks 0 and 1 separately.11. Recently Introduced Features in TEMS Investigation 2. Rank Indication counters showing incidence of values RI = 1 and RI = 2. giving a more fine-grained view of retransmission statistics.0 11 . 2. Supported LTE bands are: • • • TDD 1900 MHz (Band 39) TDD 2300 MHz (Band 40) TDD 2600 MHz (Band 38) 2. This is a Qualcomm chipset based device running under Android. TEMS Investigation 14. New Connectable Scanners A TD-LTE scanner from Transcom Instruments is offered as a cost-efficient solution for scanning of TD-LTE networks.1. useful for studies of MIMO channel properties.10.0 continued and reinforced this tradition by adding the Sony Ericsson Xperia arc S smartphone as a connectable device. PUSCH ack/nack counters.1. LTE RRC Redirection Events The LTE RRC connection redirection events have been extended to cover redirection to EV-DO (HRPD/eHRPD).Chapter 2. What Was New in TEMS Investigation 14.1.0 Control Functions for Smartphones TEMS products have a long tradition of offering unique device control capabilities that rely on advanced measurement capabilities in the device hardware.2. and it obeys the following control commands: • • • • • Lock to RAT Lock to band (WCDMA and GSM) Control cell selection and handover (WCDMA and GSM) Set cell barred behavior (WCDMA and GSM) Enable/Disable HS capability NT12-7002 ver 1.1.2.

TEMS Investigation 14. Some of this metadata is also visible in Windows Explorer. In logfile recording controlled by a script. you can opt to record only a subset of the activated devices. The chronology can be grouped by device or activity type. Here you can view not only general information (time and space coordinates. The new format embodies a more flexible and versatile framework for recording of measurement data: • Multiple logfiles can be recorded in parallel. likewise new as a connectable device in TEMS Investigation 14. • • • When loading a completed logfile into TEMS Investigation later on for analysis. 12 .2. supports all of the above commands as well as the following: • • • • Control access class Control PLMN Control speech codec usage Enable/Disable EDGE capability 2. Activity statistics: Total/succeeded/failed/aborted. presented in the same way as in live mode. each recording being wholly independent of the others. At creation time. hardware identifiers. A complete chronology of the activities performed by all devices. New Logfile Format The old logfile format (*. you can hide data from selected devices in the logfile presentation. The logfile size is significantly reduced compared to the LOG format.trp. you can tag logfiles with metadata which can serve as an aid to locating. • • Full compatibility with the old logfile format (*. and categorizing the files later on.1 User’s Manual The Samsung Infuse 4G smartphone (ST-Ericsson chipset based).log) was replaced in TEMS Investigation 14.0 by a new format with extension . and more) but also: • A list of the participating devices with accompanying key properties (capabilities. extensive information about the file appears on a new Navigator tab called the Logfile tab.log) is of course maintained. sorting. descriptive metadata added at recording time. and more).2. If you wish. or filtered to show only one device or one type of activity. and their outcomes.0. The activities of one device can be recorded in any number of logfiles simultaneously.

• Expansion of Scanning Capabilities GSM scanning capabilities of Rohde & Schwarz TSMW were made available for use with TEMS Investigation: – – – RSSI scanning. See chapter 35.2. The POLQA (Perceptual Objective Listening Quality Analysis) algorithm is designed along similar lines as PESQ. Highlight selected types of messages in unique colors.2. Searching. the full message contents can be searched.0 as a speech quality measurement algorithm for VoIP. Recently Introduced Features in TEMS Investigation 2. The search functions essentially correspond to the Find in Logfile feature in pre14. A “find next/find previous” feature is included for easy stepping back and forth between hits (can be done with the keyboard arrow keys). 3G and 4G/LTE.Chapter 2. static ARFCN set RSSI scanning: BSIC decoding RSSI scanning: C/I measurement.0 product versions.5. • • • 2.0 13 . • • LTE: TDD and FDD pilot scans can be run in parallel on Rohde & Schwarz TSMW. allowing multiple devices to scan concurrently using different configuration sets.2.3. which was removed in TEMS Investigation 14.863 standard. NT12-7002 ver 1. You can: • Find arbitrary text in message headers. filtering.4. being specially developed for HD voice. and Highlighting in Message Windows New functions for searching. Show only messages of a selected type. and VoIP. Filtering. 2. Speech Quality Measurement with POLQA POLQA.2.0. defined in the ITU P. The handling of scanning configuration sets was relaxed. Case and whole-word matching is available. Hide messages of a selected type. Optionally. POLQA was introduced in TEMS Investigation 14. and visual highlighting were implemented in message windows in order to accelerate analysis. is the successor of PESQ.

7.0 introduced the option of using Internet Explorer 9 for HTTP download testing instead of TEMS Investigation’s built-in Web browser. 2.2. which can be installed under Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008/2003.6. In this Web-based portal. This means that you can set up.2. the license server administrator assigns to each TEMS Investigation user the products 14 .1 User’s Manual 2. etc. You can use this activity to halt execution: • • • until a given time of day (with optional subsequent repetition of activities that are placed in a loop with the Wait For activity) until a given event (or one event from a defined set) occurs until an activity in another workflow branch concludes with a stipulated outcome. facilitating management of network licenses and adding traceability.). Cell files can be included when exporting logfiles. for example. Logfile Export Enhancements The logfile export tool was repackaged into a separate executable which can alternatively be run from a Windows command prompt. Command-line controlled export can be scheduled with the generic scheduling functionality in Windows. Flow control in scripting was rendered more powerful with the new Wait For activity. 2. multiple concurrent FTP download sessions with one device simply by putting the sessions in parallel branches in your script. Command line switches are provided for all aspects of the export setup that are configurable from within TEMS Investigation. All of these features help you manage logfile export more smoothly and save time. Two new HTTP information elements were provided (regardless of browser used): total document size and download time. The Parallel (workflow branching) structure was amplified in one important respect: Within such a structure you can assign multiple activities of the same type to the same device. This affects exported information elements and events in precisely the same way as cell files loaded in TEMS Investigation enrich the presentation in the application user interface (populating information elements that require cell file data. There is no need to pass special session concurrency parameters with the FTP testing activity. Improved Service Testing Capabilities TEMS Investigation 14.8.2.TEMS Investigation 14. Improved HASP Soft License Handling A license manager portal was introduced.

HSUPA Category 6 (5. The client works over a VPN.1 regarding control functions – – – – – – • • WCDMA/HSPA 900/2100 MHz (LT18i) WCDMA/HSPA 800/850/1900/2100 MHz (LT18a) GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 MHz Google Android 2.0 LTE Devices • • • • • • • Huawei M920 LG LS840 (LG Viper) LG MS840 (LG Connect 4G) LG P936 (LG Optimus) Samsung SCH-R920 Samsung SCH-R940 ZTE N910 UMTS Devices • Sony Ericsson Xperia arc S: See also section 2. From this utility.0 15 .2. 2. users detach licenses to their local machines. Recently Introduced Features in TEMS Investigation they are allowed to detach and sets a maximum detach duration.9.2. New Connectable User Terminals in TEMS Investigation 14. Further constraints such as license expiry dates can be defined.Chapter 2. “Category” fields are provided for convenient grouping of users.4 Mbit/s). Reports on license usage can be generated and also exported in comma-separated (CSV) format.4 GHz) HSDPA Category 10 (14.3 Qualcomm Snapdragon MSM8255 (1. and the main benefit it brings is that it greatly reduces the risk of detaching the wrong license by mistake. Side by side with the license manager portal.76 Mbit/s) Huawei E353 LG P505 NT12-7002 ver 1. a client license manager with a graphical user interface is provided.

The PESQ calculation is done by the PC itself. some expanded in scope – report on the resulting interaction between the terminal and networks.3. What Was New in TEMS Investigation 13. RACH Reason.2.3. Nokia C7-00 (GSM/WCDMA). Sony Ericsson W995. Since the voice calls are made between the mobiles. Event categories: • • • Call setup events Inter-RAT events Attach events 2. Two or four mobile devices. just as in the existing TEMS Investigation AQM setup. RACH Result. there is also no Call Generator or similar component in this AQM configuration.1 Alternative Mobile-to-mobile AQM Solution This is a cost-efficient solution for mobile-to-mobile audio quality measurement. 2. 2. In TEMS Investigation 13. so that no separate processing power is required in the Audio Capturing Unit. A number of events – some new. The mobile-to-mobile AQM solution is in principle RAT-independent.3.3. Extended Set of LTE RACH Information Elements A collection of new information elements deals with the RACH procedure in LTE: RACH Type. RACH 16 .TEMS Investigation 14. which call each other in pairs. CS Fallback Events and Information The “circuit-switched fallback” mechanism allows a user terminal connected to EUTRAN to access the CS domain via GERAN or UTRAN. The activities of the devices are completely controlled from TEMS Investigation by means of a Service Control script. Preamble Step Size. are connected to an Audio Capturing Unit (ACU) which relays the audio to the PC. Huawei C8600 (CDMA).1.1 User’s Manual • • LG P509 Sharp 006SH 2.1 it was implemented for the following phones: Sony Ericsson Xperia arc.3.

3. HSDPA Category 14 (21 Mbit/s) Advanced control functionality • NT12-7002 ver 1.1 Sequans TD-LTE USB modem SQN3010A-USB-M1. MME Group Id.Chapter 2. TEMS Investigation also permits connection of multiple Qualcomm-based LTE devices. CDMA/EV-DO Rev.4. without using an external connection manager. Improved Handling of Qualcomm-based LTE Devices Network connect can be performed for Qualcomm chipset-based LTE devices from within TEMS Investigation.6. Recently Introduced Features in TEMS Investigation Preamble Responses with PUSCH Resource. B of the EV-DO (TIA-856) standard introduces multicarrier data transfer in EV-DO.3. The implementation was verified with the Huawei EC367-2 device. TEMS Investigation 13.0 17 . 2. and MME Code. B Measurement and Analysis Rev. that is. B chipsets.76 Mbit/s).3. operating on LTE Band 40 (2300–2400 MHz) and based on TD-LTE-capable chipset SQN3010 Samsung Galaxy S 4G – – – – – Android-based WCDMA/HSPA 1700/2100 and 2100 (Bands IV. • New Connectable User Terminals in TEMS Investigation 13. Presented information elements subdivide into three categories: • • • Basic radio parameters Multicarrier serving channel information Forward link multicarrier RLP throughput 2. 2.1 allows connection of devices built on a range of Qualcomm CDMA/EV-DO Rev.5. I) GSM/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 HSUPA Category 6 (5.

I) GSM/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 HSUPA Category 6 (5. There are no restrictions on supported frequency bands (30 MHz to 6 GHz). HSDPA Category 24 (42 Mbit/s) BandLuxe C501 Huawei E392 Sierra Wireless AirCard 313U Huawei E367 Huawei E372 Novatel Option MC996D Huawei C8600 Huawei EC367-2 Huawei M860 Kyocera S1350 LG KV600 LG KV755 Samsung SCH-R720 ZTE AC8710 • Other new LTE devices: – – – • Other new UMTS devices: – – – • New CDMA devices: – – – – – – – – 2. VIII. 18 . WCDMA Scanning with Rohde & Schwarz WCDMA pilot (Top N) scanning can be undertaken with Rohde & Schwarz TSMW scanners.76 Mbit/s).1 User’s Manual • Sierra Wireless AirCard 319U – – – – Dual-Carrier HSPA+ USB modem from Sierra Wireless WCDMA/HSPA+ 850/900/1900/2100 (Bands V.7.TEMS Investigation 14. II.3.

3.11. Min/max/median versions of HS transport block size IEs introduced: – HS Transport Block Size (Min).1.3. HS MIMO Transport Block Size (Max). CDMA Scanning with PCTel SeeGull MX Support was added for CDMA scanning (PN scan. HS Transport Block Size (Max). 2. Support added for Anydata ADU-895A (CDMA/EV-DO Rev.9. NT12-7002 ver 1. RSSI scan) with PCTel SeeGull MX. HS Transport Block Size (Median).3. 2. all with arguments for stream 0 and stream 1. Software Update Service A TEMS Investigation software update service was introduced. HS MIMO Transport Block Size (Min). Recently Introduced Features in TEMS Investigation 2. The new feature streamlines administration processes and minimizes waiting time. 450 MHz). • • • New Connectable Scanners in TEMS Investigation 13.0 19 . one PN scan on a cdma2000 frequency and one on an EV-DO frequency. all with arguments for primary carrier and secondary carrier. • Enhancements in TEMS Investigation 13.8. This service checks for new patch releases on a regular basis.1 Multiple concurrent PN scans can be performed with PCTel MX and EX scanners: for example. Support added for Novatel Ovation MC551 4G LTE USB modem (Band 13).10.3. • – • • • Support added for Samsung Galaxy S II LTE.1 PCTel SeeGull MX LTE 800/900/1800/2600 + WCDMA 900/2100 + GSM 900/1800 PCTel SeeGull MX WCDMA 850/1900/2100 AWS + GSM 850/1900 + CDMA/EV-DO 850/1900/2100 AWS Anritsu ML8780A 2.Chapter 2. This feature is a time-saver that reduces the hours you have to spend on drive testing. B. HS MIMO Transport Block Size (Median).

To the HTTP Get script activity have been added two new options: terminate session after a specified duration. Support added for GSM scanning with Rohde & Schwarz TSMW.ibwc). 2. inter-frequency. step forward to the next waypoint. Indoor testing with the Pinpoint Window is fully aligned and compatible with TEMS Pocket (which likewise supports pre-planned routes) as well as with post-processing in TEMS Discovery.2). Logfiles recorded when walking planned routes are saved in regular TEMS Investigation logfiles. and step backward to the previous waypoint in case you want to repeat a part of the route. These relate mainly to: cell reselection parameter settings and measurements (intra-frequency.12. • A large number of new LTE information elements have been introduced.1 User’s Manual • Support added for Huawei U6100 (HSPA). which incorporate building and floor plan information as well as the planned routes you create. where you create and walk pre-planned indoor test routes.3.2 The existing indoor measurement solution was complemented with a new Pinpoint Window. promoting an efficient work process and saving time and money. Indoor map sets. discontinuous reception (DRX). and inter-RAT). and sounding reference signals (SRS).TEMS Investigation 14. • Enhancements in TEMS Investigation 13. User actions are reduced to the clicking of three buttons: commit to a waypoint on reaching it. The point of pre-planning routes is to render route walks as simple as possible.1. or after downloading a specified amount of data.1. Support added for the following devices: – – – – Datang/Leadcore LC8143 HTC Vivid (PH39100) LG MS695 Quanta LU220 • • • • 20 . are saved in the iBwave Design container format (*. Support added for Altair DC-E3100 chipset (no devices commercially available at the time of releasing TEMS Investigation 13. DCI format usage on PDCCH. The buttons are generously sized to permit easy and accurate tapping on a touch screen while walking around.

and SCH CINR. Any LTE frequency band can be scanned. TEMS Investigation 13.0 TD-LTE Support The LTE standard allows both frequency division duplex (FDD) and time division duplex (TDD) operation.4. 2. LTE support in TEMS Investigation was restricted to FDD. data service testing can be undertaken with any off-the-shelf device as long as it comes with Windows drivers that enable an IP data connection – for example.0 21 .Chapter 2. taking it to a whole new level of genericity. known as TD-LTE. Up until the 13. Layer 3) is not obtained with this kind of testing. Using a Rohde & Schwarz TSMW Universal Radio Network Analyzer. 2.0 version. and all IP information elements will then be populated. RSRQ. What Was New in TEMS Investigation 13. or a wide variety of network cards.0 version. Data Service Performance Verification with Generic Device TEMS Investigation 13.4. as well as video streaming. embedded modules. etc. can be run on such a device.0 introduced scanning support also for the TDD mode. This feature can be used to verify application layer performance for arbitrary devices. Please note that lower-layer data (RF. With the 13. USB modems. however. NT12-7002 ver 1.2. The data set obtained is similar to FDD and includes RSRP.1.0 expanded the concept of data service testing. Recently Introduced Features in TEMS Investigation – – – – Samsung SCH-R920 (Chief) Samsung SGH-I727 (Galaxy S II Skyrocket) Samsung SGH-I997 (Galaxy S Infuse 4G) ZTE X500 2. Layer 2.4. Any IPbased activity in the Service Control Designer. iPhone or BlackBerry units. as will be desirable prior to launching them in the network. it is possible to do Top-N LTE signal scanning in both TDD and FDD mode.

4.4.0. 2.6. or all the parameters needed to access and interact with a particular FTP server. • – – – Sony Ericsson Xperia arc (Android-based smartphone): GSM/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 WCDMA/HSPA 900/2100 (LT15i) WCDMA/HSPA 800/850/1900/2100 (LT15a) 22 . The utility can also be seen as a complement to the script saving function in the Service Control Designer.4. using TEMS Investigation 13.1 User’s Manual 2. Selection of Preferred Workspace at Startup When you start TEMS Investigation 13. Furthermore. PBCH BLER.TEMS Investigation 14.2. New Utility for Sharing Script Configuration Settings The TEMS Settings Manager is a utility which lets you save to file any service and scanner settings that are used for service testing.18. many LTE elements previously available only with LG devices are also obtainable with Qualcomm devices. The TEMS Settings Manager boosts usability by enabling easy distribution of configuration data among users and among instances of TEMS Investigation.4. a range of additional LTE information elements are obtained. and PUSCH BLER. some other existing workspace.1.0. which creates files specifying the activities to perform during testing. For example.0 UMTS Terminals 2. See section 20. 2.4.5. 2.6. New Connectable Equipment in TEMS Investigation 13. such a file may contain all details of how to perform an LTE Reference Signal scan with a PCTel MX scanner.3. including PDSCH Transmission Distribution. you are invited to select what workspace to use: one recently used.4. See section 4. New LTE Information Elements With LG devices.2. or a new one that is empty.

0 Mbit/s) Nokia C7-00 HTC Imagio 2.1 2.15. HSUPA Category 5 (2. Support for SSH2 Protocol in Iperf Testing The SSH2 protocol (Secure Shell version 2) is offered as an alternative to Telnet as connection client when doing Network Bandwidth testing with Iperf. Compare section 2. and support for these is planned for inclusion in future releases of TEMS Investigation.6.4. NT12-7002 ver 1. HSUPA Category 6 (5. LTE Scanner: Rohde & Schwarz TSMW The R&S TSMW Universal Radio Network Analyzer enables TD-LTE measurements in TEMS Investigation 13.Chapter 2.4.4. Scanner capabilities include: • • Support for all LTE frequency bands: 30 MHz to 6 GHz Top N LTE signal scanning for TDD as well as FDD The R&S TSMW scanner handles a range of other technologies. SSH2 requires a separate license option and installation package.0 onward.2 Mbit/s).4.1.2.7. which sends logins and passwords in plain text. see section 2. 1.8. since it is subject to export restrictions due to its use of strong encryption.7.76 Mbit/s) WCDMA/HSPA 850/900/1700/1900/2100 MHz GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 MHz HSDPA Category 9 (10. Update to this text: GSM and WCDMA scanning is supported with R&S TSMW from TEMS Investigation 14.0 23 . Such technology expansions will then be possible to do remotely by means of a scanner software upgrade. Unlike the Telnet protocol.3.2 Mbit/s).0. SSH2 uses cryptography to authenticate the remote computer and therefore renders the Iperf server less vulnerable to hacker attacks.16.3. See section 20. Support for 64-bit Windows 7 TEMS Investigation 13. 2.0 can be run under 64-bit Windows 7. Recently Introduced Features in TEMS Investigation – • – – – • HSDPA Category 8 (7.

MTSI Session Completion Failure Ratio (%). Other improvements include better memory management and reduced start-up time. PCFICH CFI Information. More LTE information elements obtainable with Qualcomm chipset based devices: MAC PDU Handover Interruption Time. Overruns. 2.4. HSUPA: New information element “HS UL E-DCH TTI (ms)” indicating TTI length (2 ms or 10 ms). Lost Packets. Average/Min/Max Playout Delay. • • 24 .TEMS Investigation 14. Possible to select AMR speech codec rate. Underruns. – – – • TD-LTE information elements introduced: Ack Reporting Mode. Special Subframe Configuration.0 generates lower CPU load than previous versions. Extensive set of VoIP jitter buffer metrics obtained as information elements: RFC 1889 Jitter.0. PBCH BLER. 2. MTSI Registration Time (s).10. • – – New Features in TEMS Investigation 13. UL/DL Configuration.9. nCCE Average/Min/Max. • • Additional New Features Internal GPS of PCTel MX available as data source in TEMS Investigation. Np and Np+1 Distribution.11. Position of Minimum k Distribution. MTSI Session Setup Failure Ratio (%). The KPI computation itself is done in TEMS Discovery or TEMS Automatic. UMTS network connect can be done from within TEMS Investigation with Samsung GT-B3730. Performance Improvements For any given device configuration and test setup. Events generated enabling computation of the following VoIP KPIs: MTSI Registration Failure Ratio (%). PUSCH Phy Throughput.4. GT-B3740 LTE/UMTS dual-technology devices.1 Improved VoIP testing: PJSIP VoIP client added as alternative to CounterPath.4. UL/DL Configuration Type. PDSCH Transmission Distribution elements. MTSI Session Setup Time (s). TEMS Investigation 13. Possible to select AMR-NB or AMR-WB as VoIP speech codec. Decoding Errors.1 User’s Manual 2. Size Increase (frequency of jitter buffer size increases).

Support added for Qualcomm TD9200 TDD. Support added for LG FM300. Recently Introduced Features in TEMS Investigation • • • • • • • • • • • • Timestamps given with 1 ms resolution in message windows and logfile text format export. Support added for ZTE AL621. Support added for ZTE MF682. Support added for LG MN270. Support added for ZTE AL611. Support added for Samsung SGH-A307 (LTE part).0 25 . Support added for Samsung SCH-R380. Support added for Vodafone K5005.Chapter 2. Support added for Samsung SCH-I510. Support added for Sierra Wireless AC320U. NT12-7002 ver 1.

3.1. • Choose Start  Programs  Ascom  TEMS Products  TEMS Investigation 14. TEMS Investigation can be launched from the Start menu.1 User’s Manual 3. Recommended Skills Since TEMS Investigation is a Windows application. chapter 5 and section 8. To obtain a genuine understanding of the presented information. 26 .3. The overall structure of the user interface is described in more detail in chapters 4 and 5.2. Note: We recommend that you plug the external equipment you are going to use into the PC before starting TEMS Investigation. Quick Guide to the User Interface This section gives a quick overview of the TEMS Investigation user interface.1. This option is selected by right-clicking the Start menu item above and choosing Properties  Shortcut tab  Advanced. familiarity with Windows is useful.4.2. In Windows Vista and Windows 7 you must run the application as administrator.TEMS Investigation 14. Basics of TEMS Investigation This chapter guides you through some fundamentals of TEMS Investigation. Starting TEMS Investigation Once installed. 3. 3. Installing TEMS Investigation See the Getting Started Manual. 3. you need a working knowledge of the wireless technologies concerned.

0 27 . particularly those relating to logfile recording and analysis. To manage your windows more smoothly. you can divide your workspace into several worksheets. Up to ten worksheets can be active simultaneously. Toolbars The toolbars provide shortcuts to certain functions in the application. From here you also open presentation windows. Basics of TEMS Investigation Toolbars Menu bar Worksheet Navigator Status bar Workspace and Worksheets The entity that stores all the windows and settings used in a working session is called the workspace. and manage your worksheets. change the mode of presentation of information elements.Chapter 3. Most of the toolbar buttons are mirrored in the menus. Navigator From the Navigator you manage your connected equipment or view information on the currently loaded logfile. NT12-7002 ver 1. Only one workspace can be open at a time.

28 .1 User’s Manual Menu Bar The menus mirror the toolbars as well as the Navigator’s Menu and Worksheets tabs.TEMS Investigation 14. Status Bar The status bar displays various messages that indicate the current status of the application.

4. User Interface 4. one for testing and recording. 4. however. User Modes TEMS Investigation can be run in two different modes. To be able to open a logfile. it switches to drive testing mode and remains in this mode as long as some external device is activated. The terminology is used in the manual to clarify how things work. As soon as you activate external equipment.Chapter 4.) In drive testing mode you can record new logfiles.0 29 . User Interface This chapter goes through the user interface in more detail. you must close it before you can activate external devices.4. see section 8. • The two modes are mutually exclusive. and can be seen as an expanded version of section 3. (Regarding the “activate” operation. nor is the current mode shown there. At the beginning of a session. Deactivating all external devices returns the application to analysis mode. NT12-7002 ver 1.1. Note: You do not set the working mode explicitly in the user interface. and one for logfile analysis: • Drive testing mode: The information presented on the screen is obtained from data-collecting devices connected to the PC and activated in TEMS Investigation. This means that: • • If you have a logfile open. you must first deactivate all currently active external devices. the application is in analysis mode. Analysis mode: The presented information is read from a logfile which you have loaded in order to inspect and analyze it.

The workspace selection dialog closes automatically after 10 seconds if there is no user interaction. 4.2.2. If you click OK without making any selection in the dialog shown above. Click OK and TEMS Investigation will start with the chosen workspace. the default workspace (identified in the dialog) is opened. The chosen workspace is added to the workspace list in the dialog above.tdc). empty workspace. you handle workspaces 30 . Create a New Workspace: This option creates a new.1 User’s Manual 4. Archived Material: This option takes you to the regular open workspace dialog. Only one workspace can be open at a time. a workspace selection dialog opens: • • • Open a Recent Workspace: Here you can open an existing workspace by selecting it from a list of recently used workspace files (*.1. A timer in the lower left corner indicates the remaining time. Settings include information on connected external devices. where it is automatically selected. Workspaces and Worksheets Workspaces The environment that stores all the windows and settings used in a working session is called the workspace. where you browse the file system to select a workspace file. The dialog cannot be opened again. later on.TEMS Investigation 14. When you start TEMS Investigation.

give the following command: investigation.2.exe -newwksp • • 4. you can divide your workspace into several worksheets.tdc To start the application with the most recently used workspace.1\Workspaces Note: You cannot save changes to the predefined workspaces.2.1. All of the commands that follow need to be executed from the directory <TEMS Investigation install dir>\Application. Up to ten worksheets can be active simultaneously. This is already done in the default workspace. Opening Workspaces from a Command Prompt Alternatively. you can use the Command Prompt to launch TEMS Investigation with a specific workspace. 4.3.2.1 cannot load workspaces from older TEMS Investigation versions. save the workspace under a different name. give the following command: investigation. 4. Predefined Workspaces Besides the default workspace.0 31 . as shown by their designations.2.1. Worksheets To manage your windows more smoothly. They all normally reside in the following directory: • • Windows 7. User Interface from the File and View toolbar (see section 4. Windows Vista: C:\Users\<user>\Documents\TEMS Product Files\TEMS Investigation 14.Chapter 4.exe <workspace name>.1\Workspaces Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\<user>\My Documents\TEMS Product Files\TEMS Investigation 14. TEMS Investigation 14. which has a number of worksheets dedicated to different purposes.exe -recent To start the application without loading any existing workspace. whether predefined or user-created. To save your modifications.4 for further details).1. • If you know the exact name of the workspace you want to use. you can launch TEMS Investigation with that workspace loaded by giving the following command: investigation. or alternatively from the File menu.2. some further predefined workspaces are supplied. NT12-7002 ver 1.

2. When you stop the recording. See section 11. which can also be accessed by right-clicking in a worksheet. see chapters 7–9. 4. 4.1. not the full contents of the file.1. Record Toolbar Start/Stop Recording: Start/stop recording a logfile. “MS1” is replaced by “MS2”. the logfile is closed. The Toolbars The toolbars in the main window give speedy access to some of the most central functions of TEMS Investigation.1. Fast Forward/Stop: Start or resume loading of the opened logfile/Stop loading of the opened logfile. Insert Filemark: Insert a filemark in the logfile. 32 .3. For a full description of the recording function.3. See section 11. the device channel (“MS”/“DC”) index is incremented in all windows: for example.2. Open/Close Logfile: Open a logfile/Close the logfile that is currently open. Recording properties are set from the Logfile menu. Equipment handling is done from the Equipment tab of the Navigator. 4.2.3. This allows you to instantly duplicate a worksheet for a different device.1 User’s Manual Worksheets are handled from the Worksheet menu.TEMS Investigation 14. The toolbars are mirrored in the menus (see section 4. Note that this operation only presents logfile metadata. When you copy a worksheet. see section 11. Replay Toolbar This toolbar is accessible in analysis mode.5).

Report Toolbar Generate Report: Generate a report from one or several logfiles. NT12-7002 ver 1. otherwise directs you to the online help: 4. Print Preview: Show a preview of the window printout.4. During loading of a logfile.2. the progress bar shows what proportion of the logfile has been loaded. Save Workspace: Save a workspace. Toggle Full Screen: Toggle between full screen and normal mode.8.3. File and View Toolbar New Workspace: Create a new workspace.3. 4. “Play” Section This section is active in analysis mode.2.4. Compare section 11.4.3. The Status Bar The status bar at the bottom of the main window displays symbols and short messages concerning the current status of the application and of external devices. See section 11.Chapter 4. Print: Print the selected window.4. Help Section Shows a help text when you point to a button or combo box on the main window toolbars. 4. User Interface 4.0 33 . Open Workspace: Open a saved workspace.1. It is divided into the following sections: 4.

this menu mirrors part of the File and View toolbar.3. Window Menu This is a standard window manager.1 User’s Manual 4.1. 4. Presentation.TEMS Investigation 14. containing the same information as this manual. and to the about page. 34 .8 respectively).1. When some form of logfile recording is ongoing.2.6. “Record” Section This section is active in drive testing mode. View Menu From here you choose which toolbars and which other tools should be visible. Compare section 11. Control. Help Menu Gives access to online help. Logfile Menu The Logfile menu mirrors the Record and Replay toolbars. File Menu The Menu Bar Apart from holding some standard File menu commands. and Configuration Menus These menus mirror the Menu tab of the Navigator. From here you can also set recording properties.4. The Full Screen mode hides the Navigator. and generate logfile reports (see sections 11. a rolling progress bar is displayed here. and 11. export logfiles.5. 11. Worksheet Menu From this menu you manage your worksheets.

Keyboard Shortcuts A number of central operations in TEMS Investigation.6.Chapter 4. User Interface 4. can also be performed from the keyboard. A list of keyboard shortcuts is found in appendix A. NT12-7002 ver 1.0 35 . as well as many standard file and edit operations.

1. 5. used for equipment handling: section 5. giving an overview of your current workspace configuration: section 5. 5. The Navigator has the following tabs: • • • • • the Equipment tab. 36 .2 the Info Element tab. listing the types of windows provided: section 5. allows you to set up and manage your workspace and your external equipment.2. They are divided into the categories Presentation. Control. and Configuration. You can hide the Navigator by switching to full screen mode (done from the View menu or from the File and View toolbar). How the windows work and how they can be configured is covered in the present document: see chapters 23– 31.3 the Logfile tab. All Navigator windows can also be opened from the menu bar.TEMS Investigation 14. To open a window. Menu Tab The Menu tab lists most types of windows that are available in the application. chapter 8 for descriptions of the contents of individual presentation windows. double-click the corresponding symbol.1 the Menu tab. Equipment Tab See chapters 7–9. located on the left in the TEMS Investigation main window.4 the Worksheets tab. The Navigator The Navigator pane. showing information on the logfile currently loaded: section 5. listing information elements: section 5.5. See Information Elements and Events.1 User’s Manual 5. or drag the symbol from the Navigator to the worksheet where you want it.

Chapter 5. The attributes are edited from the Info Element tab. The attributes are: • • • Color: Range of colors used to encode the IE value (in a variety of presentation windows).3.0 37 .3. Please use the alphabetical index to locate them.3. When you add an information element to a presentation window. Info Element Tab The Info Element tab lists all the information elements handled by TEMS Investigation. Regarding information element categories. Symbol: Range of plot marker shapes (symbols) encoding the IE value in Map windows. Some numeric elements have such presentation attributes defined by default.3.1. see section 5. 5. others do not.5). these settings are automatically used unless you have specified a different usage in that particular window (possible only with colors in certain window types.2. see section 23. The Navigator The control and configuration windows are also described in this volume. NT12-7002 ver 1. Size: Range of plot marker sizes encoding the IE value in Map windows. Presentation Attributes of Information Elements For all numeric information elements (that is. 5. see Information Elements and Events. those not of type “Text”) can be defined presentation attributes which determine the graphical presentation of the element as a function of its numeric value. 5. right-click the element in the Navigator and select Add  Color.2. • Editing the Color Ranges of Information Elements If you want to add color ranges to an information element.

1.1 User’s Manual • If you want to edit the default color ranges of an information element.TEMS Investigation 14. • Automatic Setup of Color Ranges This is the easiest way to set up color ranges. • • Set the number of intervals. In either case. continue as follows: 5. choose colors for the extremes of the value range. Click Auto Setup.2. 38 . double-click the information element to expand it and show the presentation attributes. Under From Color and To Color. then double-click Color.3.

0 39 . See section 5.3.2 above.2.2. and make your changes. select it and click Delete. set the endpoints of the interval. Editing the Marker Sizes and Symbols of Information Elements Ranges for map plot marker sizes and symbols are edited in exactly the same way as color ranges. A single remaining interval cannot be deleted.3. follow these steps: • To add an interval. click Add.4. these values will be drawn in black.Chapter 5.3. When you click OK. NT12-7002 ver 1. 5. If you delete parts of the color range so that no color is defined for some values. 5. click Edit. • • To edit an interval. select it. a color range is created automatically with evenly sized intervals and suitable intermediate colors. Logfile Tab See section 11. nor can the color range as a whole be removed. If you do not check the Via Color box. 5.3. To delete an interval.2. the intermediate color is chosen automatically based on the “From” and “To” colors. and choose a color. Manual Setup of Color Ranges If you prefer to assemble your color range interval by interval. The Navigator • Check the Via Color box if you want to use a specific color in the middle of the range.

1 User’s Manual 5.TEMS Investigation 14. Worksheets Tab The Worksheets tab lists the worksheets currently active in the workspace. You can rearrange windows from this tab by dragging them between the worksheet folders.5. Each worksheet is represented by a folder containing the windows in this worksheet. 40 . Double-clicking on a symbol will make that particular window (and the worksheet it is placed on) active.

Cell data can be provided in two ways: • • in a plain-text XML file (*. chapter 4.0 41 . Cell Data TEMS Investigation can present information on individual cells in cellular networks. in a file with a plain-text. Cell data is also made use of in logfile reports.xsd. TEMS Investigation specific format (*. Regarding TEMS Investigation CDMA CSV cell files in general.xsd defines TEMS-specific XML data types.3. See section 6. NT12-7002 ver 1. The schema TEMSCell.cel). 6. section 4.2. Creating a Cell File in XML Format The XML-format cell file uses two XML schemas. which are found in the directory XMLSchema beneath the TEMS Investigation installation directory: • The schema TEMSDataTypes. In particular.Chapter 6. relying on the data types in TEMSDataTypes.1. Cell Data 6. and fill in the data from there.xml) whose format is common to several TEMS products: See section 6. derived from the fundamental data types set down in the XML specification. see the Technical Reference. • The most convenient way of composing XML-format cell files is to load the above schemas into a suitable XML development tool.1. it is possible to draw cells on maps and to display cell names in various windows.xsd defines XML attributes and elements that embody cell and site data. GSM and WCDMA cells can be mixed in one file. CDMA cell files in TEMS Investigation CDMA CSV format can be converted to the XML format using TEMS Discovery. A full description of the XML format is found in the Technical Reference. This format is for UMTS only.

Loading Cell Files To make a cell file active. See sections 31. chapter 3. To remove a cell file from the list.5.5. The cell file is added in the list box.1. 6.4. and 31. Creating a Cell File in CEL Format The CEL format is a unified version allowing both GSM and WCDMA cells in the same file. It is described exhaustively in the Technical Reference.5.3. The set of loaded cell files can be modified at any time. cell information is presented separately from each type of file. In the General window.1 User’s Manual 6. XML cell files created with Mentum CellPlanner can be loaded into TEMS Investigation. Otherwise. the following functions become available in the application: • Drawing of cells and indication of neighbor relations and channel usage on the map. When you are done selecting cell files to load. if you load both CEL and XML files. no attempt is made to correlate CEL and XML cell information. 42 . the information in all files is correlated in the presentation. double-click the item Cellfile Load. 31. If you use a spreadsheet application to edit CEL files.3. select it and click Remove. To remove all cell files.2.5. open the General window.5. unwanted characters might be inserted which prevent TEMS Investigation from interpreting the file correctly.4. If multiple files of the same type (CEL or XML) are loaded.TEMS Investigation 14. Loading Cell Data from Mentum CellPlanner Mentum CellPlanner uses the XML format for cell data. To add a cell file. click Remove all. click OK. click the Add button and browse to select your file. be sure to save them in tab-delimited plain text format.5.5. 6. • • • • • From the Navigator’s Menu tab. rather. 6. However. it must be loaded in the General window. You can have several cell files loaded in the application at the same time. Use of Cell Data in Presentations Once cell data has been loaded.

Bar charts: section 30.0 43 .2.3.Chapter 6. See Information Elements and Events. Cell Data • • • Serving cell and handover indication on the map. See section 31. Configuration of status windows is covered in sections 24.5. In logfile reports: Association of statistics with individual cells. Presentation of cell names in status windows.4. and bar charts. Indication of distance from current position to current serving cell. See the Technical Reference. • • • • NT12-7002 ver 1. Generation of events detecting (probable) missing neighbors. Best server indication on the map. See section 31.4.6. Presentation of cell data on the Info tab of a Map window.3.2. based on scan data. chapter 7. section 10. See Information Elements and Events.5. Line charts: section 29.3.5. See section 31.2–24. line charts. chapter 3 (“Cell Distance” IEs).5. Computation of cell ranking based on these statistics.

chapter 10.1 User’s Manual 7. Managing External Equipment: General This chapter summarizes how external equipment is handled in TEMS Investigation. 7. – – • Bottom pane: – – 44 . The functionality here relates to the device that is currently selected in the top pane. and many more besides.TEMS Investigation 14. See chapter 8. See chapter 9. The in-focus device can be changed with a context menu command.1. 7. can be automated using the Service Control tool. Provides shortcut to device properties. Overview of User Interface Components Dealing with External Equipment Equipment tab of Navigator: • Top pane: – Shows the devices currently plugged into the PC and has controls for activating and deactivating the devices in TEMS Investigation. Connectable Equipment The range of equipment that is compatible with TEMS Investigation is given in the Getting Started Manual. See chapter 21.2. Activities tab: From here you can manually apply various commands to and perform various actions with the selected device. One device at a time is in focus in this pane. which is covered in chapter 20. All of these tasks. Full details follow in chapters 8–10.

Managing External Equipment: General – Information tab: Shows some basic data on the selected device.3. Status Control Monitor: This window gives a quick overview of the status of current tasks. of equipment connected. NT12-7002 ver 1. See section 8.0 45 .Chapter 7. and of the PC. its purpose is to give an at-a-glance overview of vital data in one place. For further information. The information shown in this window can be found in other places in the application or can be retrieved with the Computer Diagnostics tool. turn to chapter 10.

1 User’s Manual 8. External devices supported by TEMS Investigation are automatically detected by the application after they have been plugged into the PC. special configuration of both device and PC is required. These steps are covered in the Getting Started Manual as follows: Device Ericsson Fixed Wireless Terminal DRT scanner Andrew i. section 10.Scan scanner Rohde & Schwarz TSMW scanner GS Chapter 11 12 13 14 8. 46 . see the Getting Started Manual. section 7.6. see the Getting Started Manual. For some devices.1. so that they will not be plugged directly into the PC. The only exceptions to this rule are handled using the Manual UE Configuration utility.1. Activating External Equipment This chapter describes how to activate external devices in TEMS Investigation for the purpose of data collection. Special PC and Device Configuration Requirements Regarding device-specific preparations for running data services. Plugging In External Equipment Note first of all that devices may be mounted in an equipment case.TEMS Investigation 14.

1. a 100Base-T crossover cable is used for this purpose. • Plugging In Scanners SRUs connect via USB. or connect the power connector of the SRU cable to an external 12 V power source. while the red one can optionally be used to power supply the device (the other option is to use an external 12 V power source).1. Other PCTel SeeGull LX scanners connect to a COM port. and PCTel PCT scanners connect via USB. Plugging In Phones and Data Cards Most supported phones and data cards connect to the PC via USB.) Flashing green: The SRU has sufficient power. (See the Getting Started Manual. Activating External Equipment 8. the black one must always be connected. Plugging In Ericsson Fixed Wireless Terminals An Ericsson Fixed Wireless Terminal is connected to the PC by means of a LAN cable. The “Status” LED on the SRU front panel is interpreted as follows: – Steady green: The SRU has sufficient power. and so no startup command is sent to the scanning module. Anritsu ML8720 scanners connect to a COM port. and the Windows service “TEMS Device Manager” has detected the SRU. either directly on the PC or via a local area network. chapter 11. EX. NT12-7002 ver 1. – – • • • • • PCTel SeeGull MX.Scan. Anritsu ML8780A scanners connect via USB. Flashing red: The SRU does not have sufficient power to start up the scanning module. A single USB cable connects the USB port on the device to a USB port on the PC.Chapter 8. (All OK. LX MM2.0 47 .1. Rohde & Schwarz TSMW and DRT scanners connect to an Ethernet port.1. The device has two USB plugs. 8.) 8. – If the scanner is connected directly to the PC.2. but the TEMS Device Manager has not started or cannot detect the SRU.3. Plug in the red USB plug. Andrew i. so that the SRU’s scanning module has started up. Workaround: Restart the TEMS Device Manager service in Windows.

1. 8.4. 8. The Navigator Equipment Tab: Basics Top Pane All devices detected by TEMS Investigation are listed in the top pane of the Navigator’s Equipment tab.1. This option is selected by right-clicking the Start menu item above and choosing Properties  Shortcut tab  Advanced.1.2. Plugging In GPS Units Supported GPS units connect via USB or Bluetooth. An audio cable is connected between the AQM module and its associated phone. In Windows 7 and Windows Vista you must run the application as administrator. The AQM module also requires a separate 12 V power supply (the voltage provided through the USB connector is insufficient). 8. both should be connected to local area network ports with normal 100Base-T cables.5. In the example below. 48 . • Starting TEMS Investigation Launch the application as follows: Choose Start  Programs  Ascom  TEMS Products  TEMS Investigation 14.1. 8. 8. 8.TEMS Investigation 14. or to a COM port.3. a Sony Ericsson Z750i phone has been autodetected.6. Plugging In Stand-alone AQM Modules The stand-alone AQM module connects to the PC via USB.1.1 User’s Manual – If the scanner and PC are to communicate over a local area network. Plugging In Equipment Cases All supported equipment cases connect via USB.3.

3. Device Context Menu If you right-click an EQ item. Change Equipment: Select a number to change the device’s EQ index to that number.1. Properties: This menu item takes you to the device properties. Activating External Equipment Each device is represented by a numbered “EQ” item. See section 23.Chapter 8. see chapter 21.3.1. It is possible to select an index that is already taken by another device.3. external devices are represented by their channels (“MS”/“DC”/“PS”).4.3. a context menu pops up containing the following commands: • • Activate.1.5 8. • NT12-7002 ver 1.1. the two devices will then swap indices.3. You can change the EQ index assigned to the device: see section 8.5 Device is selected as preferred GPS: see section 8.0 49 . Please note that in presentation windows. Deactivate: How to activate and deactivate devices is explained in section 8. The icon to the left of each device shows the status of the device in TEMS Investigation: No symbol added Red cross Hourglass Prohibited sign and label “NL”. device string is red Earth symbol Device is activated Device is deactivated Device activation or deactivation is in progress Device has no license: see section 8.

the number of the phone must be known to TEMS Investigation. Capabilities Identity IMSI Phone Number Shows the IMSI of a UMTS phone’s subscription. Air Interface. 50 . Data.3.3. Examples: IP Sniff. the phone number will display here. Editable field. PESQ. The number you enter will be used for this phone from now on. In such cases you need to enter the phone number manually in this field. or because the phone did not respond properly to the AT command. unless the AT command succeeds at that time.2. Examples of identification strings: • • • • IMEI for UMTS phones (in the EQ row) ESN for CDMA phones (in the EQ row) serial number for DRT scanners (in the EQ row) the identity of an AQM module paired with the phone (in the MS row).2. this may be because no phone number is defined on the SIM. the autodetect procedure sends an AT command to it in order to find out the phone number. Device identity.1 User’s Manual 8. If a phone is going to measure AQM in a Call Generator/MRU configuration.TEMS Investigation 14. 8. which is usually stored on the SIM card.3. If no phone number shows. 8. If this operation succeeds. A phone number retrieved by an AT command will always override a manually entered number. When you plug in a phone.2. “Information” Subtab Capabilities of the device. Bottom Pane “Activities” Subtab See chapter 9. It will also be used on future occasions when the phone is plugged in.1. Position. The phone number of a user terminal.2.

Wait until the LED turns green before plugging the USB cable into the scanner.3. 8.3.3.3. • • Detection of Equipment: Special Cases Detection of PCTel SeeGull EX Scanner Start up the scanner without the USB cable connected. Verizon branded. and Windows has detected the device for the first time. you need to click the Refresh button to have it detected. If you need to power cycle the scanner during use.2.3. TEMS Investigation attempts detection of DRT and R&S scanners only at startup and when you click the Refresh button on the Navigator’s Equipment tab (see section 8. 8. • • Detection of PCTel SeeGull MX Scanner After installing the driver.6.3. etc. 8. 8. if you plug in one of those scanners after starting TEMS Investigation.3. 8.1. Therefore. Below.3. The details of the configuration differ depending on the phone (unbranded. pull the USB cable before doing so. and do not reconnect it until the scanner has started up again (green LED).1). Detection of HTC Touch Pro2 Phones HTC Touch Pro2 phones (including HTC Imagio) need some configuring before TEMS Investigation can detect them. Always wait for the scanner to boot completely (LED turns dark green) before starting TEMS Investigation. Activating External Equipment Ports Ports exposed by the device.0 51 .Chapter 8. Detection of DRT Scanners and Rohde & Schwarz TSMW For technical reasons. the scanner should be rebooted.).3. This can take up to 90 seconds (during which time the LED is pale green or orange). Tethering means using a mobile device as a modem to provide Internet access to an unconnected device – in NT12-7002 ver 1. a brief description is given of what needs to be done.4.3. On all phones you need to activate tethering via USB while the phone is connected to the PC by the USB cable.3. AT&T branded.

WLAN) is by default disabled. only one phone at a time can be used with TEMS Investigation.3. you also need to install TCP Router software.3. On other HTC Touch Pro2 phones. 52 . That means that KPI data cannot be collected with these phones. and the icon will be tagged with a “prohibited” sign and accompanied by the text “NL” (for “No License”): The same thing will happen if by plugging in a device you exceed the number of devices with which you can do simultaneous data collection. the PC on which TEMS Investigation is running.1. Detection of Equipment Not Covered by License If you plug in a type of device for which you have no license. Of phones having the “Internet Sharing” function. activate the “Modem link”. For instructions. 8. This is provided by Ascom in the form of a CAB file.3. This is to prevent an inordinate number of devices from appearing in TEMS Investigation when you are doing data collection with multiple devices. the text for this device will be red. The terminology used to refer to tethering differs between phones: • • On a Verizon branded phone.3. section 3. activate “Internet Sharing”. it cannot of course be activated in TEMS Investigation. For HTC Touch Pro2 phones generally.3.5. this operation creates ports in Windows that TEMS Investigation can detect. On all HTC Touch Pro2 phones except Verizon branded ones. In each case. 8. IP sniffing needs to be disabled.16.3. please refer to section 20. See the Getting Started Manual. it will still appear on the Navigator’s Equipment tab. This limitation does not apply to the Verizon branded phones. as granted by your TEMS Investigation license. Detection of Network Adapters Detection of network adapters (LAN.1. When a device has no license.TEMS Investigation 14.6. However.1 User’s Manual this case.

then you can run the Manual UE Configuration utility to help TEMS Investigation recognize the device. section 7.Chapter 8. set the Network Card device to enabled in the Device Detection Properties dialog (see section 8. you can launch this utility by running the file <TEMS Investigation install dir>\Application\ManualUEConfig. Activating External Equipment • To enable detection of network adapters. On the Equipment tab of the Navigator. You must enable network adapter detection if you want to transfer logfiles over a LAN or WLAN connection. see section 11. 8. although it is supported. • On the Port Configuration tab you create an entry that is directly mapped to a COM port number on the PC. there are however certain devices for which you must use Manual UE Configuration as an aid to detection – see the Getting Started Manual.2.1. The tool Manual UE Configuration has two tabs where you create different kinds of entries used in the detection phase: Device Configuration and Port Configuration.0 53 . • NT12-7002 ver 1. Alternatively.6.exe.3. The Device Configuration tab is the most commonly used.3). The Port Configuration tab is mainly used for Datang devices. User-assisted Detection of Devices If a device is not detected properly by TEMS Investigation. click the button Start Manual UE Config. It creates an entry for the device that can be reused independently of the actual COM port number used for the device. see the Getting Started Manual.1. You must restart the application for the change to take effect.4.5. section 7. Normally there is no need to do this.

You can change this assignment by modifying the selections in the combo boxes. Then click OK. click the New button to create a new entry. The device is added to the list in the main window. Ports that do not have a mapping can be left blank or undefined. In the combo boxes on the right is indicated the functional assignment of each port in TEMS Investigation. choose the correct device type according to its capabilities.1–8. In the tree view.4. click OK.1 User’s Manual • On the Device Configuration tab. Select the type of device to use and map each available port on the device to its function.) Under Type.TEMS Investigation 14.4. enter a name for the device. In the Ports section. • • • Under Name. • The Manage Device dialog appears. • • 54 . A dialog titled Select your device appears. Click Save and Close. (The string does not show anywhere else in TEMS Investigation.4.3. See also sections 8. Finally.3. all ports of the device are listed. select the device root node that contains the ports of interest.

) Below are some examples of mappings in UEDescription. TEMS Investigation will update itself automatically with this data when launched. the entries in the existing UEDescription. (See the XML code excerpt below.1. Activating External Equipment Click the Refresh button in the Navigator. This is necessary to update TEMS Investigation with the device configuration just defined. and the DESCRIPTION tag is the name displayed in the tool.Chapter 8. The TYPE tag is mapped towards the interfaces.xml: LG LTE LTE DM – AT Ndis Samsung LTE LTE DM – AT Ndis Function Air Interface Data Interface AT Interface Ethernet Interface Qualcomm Diag:xxx Data Modem AT Ndis ST Ericsson Modem Data Modem Device Management Ndis For a Samsung LTE modem (third column above) this corresponds to the following selections in the Manage Device dialog: NT12-7002 ver 1.) 8.3.0 55 . Mapping Device Ports to Interfaces If it is not clear which port should be mapped to which interface. (If you are running the Manual UE Configuration utility independently.xml file (found under <TEMS Investigation install dir>\Application) may give an indication.4.

1 User’s Manual In the file UEDescription.2.xml itself the following entry appears: <PRODUCT NAME="This name is not displayed anywhere" PID="6889" FAMILY="SAMSUNG"> <DEVICE DESCRIPTION="Samsung USB LTE Adapter" SETUPCLASS="Net" TYPE="Ndis" /> <DEVICE DESCRIPTION="Samsung LTE Control Port" SETUPCLASS="Ports" TYPE="AT"/> </PRODUCT> 8. Launch the Manual UE Configuration utility and select your device as described in the introduction of section 8. 56 . In the Manage Device dialog. Then. select the appropriate chipset family. Under Type.3. Finally. Qualcomm Devices with LTE/TD-LTE Capability These are devices built on the Qualcomm MDM9x00 chipset families (TEMS Investigation license options “Qualcomm E” and “Qualcomm F”). click OK.TEMS Investigation 14.3. 1.4. 2. pair each available port to the correct port type as shown in the screenshot below.4. in the Ports section. do as follows.

Click Save and then Close. set Type to “LG Electronics LTE Modem”. The device is added to the list in the main dialog window. LG and Samsung Devices with LTE Capability 1. assign that port to “AT Interface”. 8. assign the port named “.3. For an LG device..0 57 . Under Ports.4. Also identify and map the ports to use for air interface messages (“Air Interface”) and AT communication (“AT Interface”).3.3. TEMS Investigation will detect the Qualcomm device as being of the type you selected in step 2. Launch the Manual UE Configuration utility and select your device as described in the introduction of section 8. assign the port named “Samsung USB LTE Adapter” to the “Ethernet Interface” function. 3.Chapter 8. set Type to “Samsung LTE Modem”. 2. For a Samsung device. Under Ports.. If the device has a “Samsung LTE Control Port” that answers to AT commands. NT12-7002 ver 1.4. Activating External Equipment 3. USB NDIS” (or similar) to the “Ethernet Interface” function. From now on.

4.4. The device is added to the list in the main dialog window. 8. 8. set Type to “Data Only Device” in the Manage Device dialog. provided that it comes with Windows drivers enabling an IP data connection.1. and all IP-related information elements will then be populated. You need to activate a device in TEMS Investigation before you can use it for data collection. Map the device ports as appropriate.4. Click Save and then Close.TEMS Investigation 14. All IP-based services can be tested (as well as video streaming).1 User’s Manual 4. Activating and Deactivating External Equipment in TEMS Investigation Activating External Equipment 8.3. Data Service Testing with Arbitrary Devices Data service testing in TEMS Investigation can be done with any applicable device (even if not officially supported by Ascom). Below is an example. • • If you want to use a device that is not officially supported. 58 .4.

Note: A device that is going to use an NDIS data connection must have an APN assigned to it. To activate all detected devices.3.2. do as follows: • Right-click the device on the Equipment tab and choose Deactivate from the context menu.4. NT12-7002 ver 1. Furthermore. a phone device starts delivering idle mode reports.3. see chapter 9. • To activate a detected device. you can activate it in TEMS Investigation. you must close it to be able to activate equipment. but deactivate it in TEMS Investigation for the time being. Deactivating External Equipment If you want to leave an external device plugged into the PC. The red cross disappears from each device icon to indicate that the device is now active. only one such device at a time can be activated in TEMS Investigation (unless the connection manager supports multiple devices).Chapter 8. Once the device has an APN. Compare section 8. Activating External Equipment Note: If you have a logfile open. • 8.1. only one phone at a time can be activated in TEMS Investigation. and a GPS device starts reporting positions. when you select an activated device in the Navigator top pane. Regarding these operations. right-click it on the Navigator’s Equipment tab and choose Activate from the context menu. the Activities tab in the bottom pane is populated with the operations that you can perform manually on this device.6. Limitations for Particular Devices • If the device connection must be set up using an external connection manager application. On being activated. click the Activate All button on the Navigator toolbar. See the Getting Started Manual. section 10. Of HTC Touch Pro2 phones having an “Internet Sharing” function and requiring installation of TCP Router software.4.0 59 .

It is referred to as the current Preferred GPS. 8. only one at a time can update the positioning-related information elements in TEMS Investigation. then all detected GPS units are activated but the currently preferred GPS remains preferred (and only this one will update positioning data in the application). and they will then all be detected by TEMS Investigation. 60 . and you activate one GPS. If no GPS is activated in TEMS Investigation.1 However. GPS units in phones. If no GPS is activated. are currently not recognized by TEMS Investigation. the “Preferred” setting cannot be changed.5. and you click the Activate All button.1 User’s Manual To deactivate all active devices: Click the Deactivate All button on the Equipment tab toolbar. The device responsible for this will be the one tagged with an “earth” symbol on the Navigator’s Equipment tab. while multiple GPS units can be detected and activated. While a logfile is being recorded. as shown in the tooltip: The following rules apply: • • • The first GPS unit detected automatically becomes the preferred one and remains as such even if further GPS units are plugged in and detected.TEMS Investigation 14. that GPS automatically becomes the preferred one. As long as a GPS or some other device is activated in TEMS Investigation. This includes GPS units built into scanners. Managing GPS Units It is possible to have several positioning devices plugged into the PC. • • 1. on the other hand. the “Preferred” setting cannot be changed.

Note that for this to work. see section 8. mappings between phone IMEIs and AQM module identities are stored by TEMS Investigation in the Windows registry. then right-click the desired GPS in the Navigator and choose Preferred GPS from the context menu. you can recreate the same pairings automatically in TEMS Investigation.1. NT12-7002 ver 1. At any time. The earth symbol and “Preferred GPS” tag will then be transferred to that GPS. When plugging the same phones and AQM modules into the PC on a later occasion.6. This function operates the same way whether your AQM modules are standalone or mounted in an equipment case.6. Click the Re-pair Phones with AQM Modules button at the top of the Equipment tab. Note that you must always do a refresh after using the Manual UE Configuration utility.6.0 61 . you can inspect which AQM module is matched with a device by right-clicking the PESQ Device Pairing item under the Control node. Re-pairing Phones with AQM Modules When you match phones with AQM modules manually as described in section 9. To do this: Click the Refresh button at the top of the Equipment tab.4. you can start the detection procedure over from scratch.10) before the phone was deactivated.10. first deactivate any devices that are activated and stop logfile recording if applicable. Activating External Equipment • To select a different GPS as the preferred one. 8.3. Further Features of the Navigator’s Equipment Tab The Refresh Function 8. on the Activities tab.2. If a device could not be matched with an AQM module.1. 8. If the devices you connected to the PC were not detected properly (for whatever reason).1. the pairing must not have been undone using the Reset function (see section 9.Chapter 8. the text “UE not paired” will be displayed in the PESQ Device Pairing dialog.

1 User’s Manual 8.2. if you are using an equipment case and let two phones swap places. it is a good idea to label the phones and AQM modules in some suitable manner to ensure that each phone is always hooked up to the same AQM module.1.6. If you have been working with different equipment configurations connected at various times to the same PC. Note that normally there is no need to do this.6. If several phones have previously (at different times) been using the same AQM module.TEMS Investigation 14. 62 . Device Detection Properties The Device Detection Properties dialog can be used to enable and disable detection of various device categories. To prevent this.3. To open this dialog: Click the Device Detection Properties button at the top of the Equipment tab. For example. Each AQM module can only be paired with a single phone. the following holds: • • Only AQM modules that are physically present when you click the button will be paired. 8. Details and Limitations of the Re-pairing Function The re-pairing function assumes that the phone-to-AQM-module mappings found in the Windows registry are still valid. the re-pairing will be incorrect for these phones and the AQM data will be garbage. the dialog is provided mainly for the purpose of troubleshooting in cases of conflicts during device detection. only one of them will be paired with it. No check is performed that the physical connections are in fact still the same.

Note. By default. that device will again be mapped to EQ3 the next time it is plugged into the same PC with the same Windows user logged in. Activating External Equipment The checkbox in the Enabled column determines if detection of a device type is enabled. As a result. The latter is disabled because otherwise the PC’s network adapter. you need to restart TEMS Investigation for the change to take effect.3.5. NT12-7002 ver 1. that if you wish to upload logfiles over FTP using the PC network card. Saving of the Equipment Configuration When you exit TEMS Investigation. you must enable the “Network Card” item. the configuration on the Navigator’s Equipment tab is automatically saved. which would be undesirable most of the time. This means that the mappings between devices and EQ items are stored in the Windows registry. as well as other network adapters accessible via LAN/WLAN. detection is enabled for all device types listed except “Network Card”. 8.1. TEMS Investigation does not save any information on equipment configuration in the workspace.0 63 . Such devices include phones with their IMEIs. however. The saving extends to all devices whose hardware permits a reliable identification. Compare section 11. if a device is represented at one time by (say) EQ3. If you make changes in this dialog.7.Chapter 8. would always be detected as EQs in the application.

right-click and choose Stop. For all manual device operations. right-click the desired item on the Activities tab and choose Start from the context menu. and particularly the reference material in section 20. • • To execute an operation. These operations are the subject of the present chapter. 9.1.TEMS Investigation 14. Operating and Controlling External Equipment Manually From the Navigator’s Equipment tab (bottom pane. Activities “subtab”). you double-click the desired item on the Activities tab to open the setup dialog associated with it. When operating devices manually. 64 .1 User’s Manual 9.16. To stop the operation. you make use of the same configuration sets that you refer to in scripts. Control Functions See also chapter 21. which covers device property dialogs that provide further means of controlling devices. Compare chapter 20. you can manually run various services on a device and manually apply control functions to it (as opposed to controlling the device with a script).

section 10. See chapter 21. Z750i K800i.3. No. access control BLER target control (WCDMA) Cell lock (+ prevent) PLMN control RAT lock Reserved cells. Supported for devices capable of audio quality measurement using Call Generator/MRU. access control NT12-7002 ver 1. Operating and Controlling External Equipment Manually 9.Chapter 9.1. see the table below. Control Function Support by Device The following control functions are independent of cellular technology: Control Function AT commands Nonvolatile item read/write PESQ device pairing Supported By Supported for all connectable devices. Samsung Galaxy S 4G Xperia arc S* (Qualc.) K790i/a. these functions are in many instances implemented as device properties instead. K600i Access class control Band lock.1. Sony Ericsson C702/C905*/W760i/W995* Sams. WCDMA Barred cells. Note that for devices other than Xperia arc S. See the Getting Started Manual.0 Nokia NTM3 65 .1. Supported for Qualcomm chipset based UMTS devices. Regarding other control functions. W600i Control Function Samsung Infuse 4G TM506. GSM Band lock.

) K790i/a.2. They are explained in section 21.1. W600i Control Function Samsung Infuse 4G TM506.2. 66 Nokia NTM3 .2.011. Samsung Galaxy S 4G Xperia arc S* (Qualc. Functions of Dialog Buttons Besides OK and Cancel. Access Class Control Here you can manipulate access class settings ( 3GPP 22. K600i RRC WCDMA capability control Speech codec control 9. but without exiting the dialog. No. just like OK. chapter 4).1. Z750i K800i.1.1 User’s Manual Sony Ericsson C702/C905*/W760i/W995* Sams. The latter transfers the current dialog settings to the device. The Set Default Access Class option causes the phone to revert to its default access class settings. the control function dialogs contain an Apply button.3.TEMS Investigation 14. 9.

1. you need to be aware of the following limitations: • • If the 850 band is selected.12. Use the Lock option to change the BLER target to the value selected in the combo box. See section 20.4.2. NT12-7002 ver 1. • • Check the bands that the phone should be allowed to use. What frequency bands appear here depends on what the phone has support for. Band Lock You can restrict the phone’s use of frequency bands.1.0 67 .Chapter 9. For details.2 for details. Sony Ericsson Specific Limitations If you make selections under GSM. 9. 9. Clicking OK will close the dialog.1. Click either OK or Apply. Each AT command is specified in a configuration set which is identical to that referenced by an AT activity in a Service Control script. The Default option causes the phone to revert to its default BLER target. see section 21. the P-900 band cannot be selected.6.2.16. you need to create one.5. Only one 900 band at a time can be selected. Operating and Controlling External Equipment Manually 9. AT Commands The AT item is used to issue AT commands manually. BLER Target (WCDMA) This function overrides the BLER target set for the phone by the network. If no AT configuration set exists.1. whereas Apply keeps it open.

2.8. • • Cell Lock in GSM For GSM you can do the following: Lock the phone on one or several cells1. and it has an effect in idle as well as dedicated (connected) mode. The phone is then restricted to using only these cells. This is the Prevent option in the Cell Lock dialog. The options are the same as in sections 21.1. Cell Barred Here you can modify the phone’s behavior with respect to accessing of barred. 68 .11 (WCDMA).7. Cell Lock The Cell Lock function spans both GSM and WCDMA.2. This is the Allow option in the Cell Lock dialog. The phone is then prevented from using these cells.1. Prevent one or several cells.5 (GSM) and 21.TEMS Investigation 14.1. 9.1. In other words. it can be used to control both cell selection and handover behavior.8. 9.2. and other cells.2.1 User’s Manual 9. reserved.

Chapter 9.0 69 . click the Add button: • Band selection: Here you specify a GSM band from which to select ARFCNs. NT12-7002 ver 1. 1. The word “cell” is used somewhat loosely here to mean either an ARFCN or an ARFCN + BSIC combination. Operating and Controlling External Equipment Manually • To configure the set of cells to which the lock or prevent function should apply. See below.

you specify a range of ARFCNs as extending from Start Channel to Stop Channel. The phone is then restricted to using only these cells/UARFCNs. A complete list of BSICs from 00 to 77 is displayed for devices that support BSIC selection..1. The phone is then prevented from using these cells/UARFCNs.2. Under Range selection. • To remove an item from the list box.1 User’s Manual • • • Range selection and Channel selection: You can define either of these.1 You can define additional items as shown above to extend the ARFCN set. 137} on the GSM 850 MHz band. or both. • • Cell Lock in WCDMA For WCDMA you can do one of the following: Lock the phone to one or several cells and/or UARFCNs. Under Channel selection.TEMS Investigation 14. Prevent one or several cells and/or UARFCNs. the phone is locked to the ARFCN set {132 . 1. clicking the Add button each time. The ARFCN and the BSIC set are joined by an implicit AND. The BSIC box is empty in the above screenshot because BSIC selection is not supported for the phone in question. Here. select it and click Remove. 70 .8.. Below is an example of a GSM Cell Lock setup. you pick a single ARFCN and one or several BSICs. 134. 9.

Operating and Controlling External Equipment Manually • To configure the set of cells/UARFCNs to which the lock or prevent function should apply.0 71 . click the Add button: • • • Band selection: Here you specify a WCDMA band from which to select UARFCNs. The UARFCN and the SC set are joined by an implicit AND. Range selection is not used for WCDMA. Under Channel selection. NT12-7002 ver 1. you pick one UARFCN and one or several SCs.Chapter 9.

• To remove an item from the list box. the phone is locked on the Band I (2100 MHz) cells having UARFCN 10565 and SCs {3. select it and click Remove. Specifics on the NV interface are vendor proprietary and must be obtained from the vendor. 4. Nonvolatile Item Read/Write The Nonvolatile Item functions allow you to inspect and modify settings for Qualcomm chipset based UMTS devices by reading and writing items over the Qualcomm NV interface. 5}.TEMS Investigation 14.1.9. Here. this is however sufficient to cover most basic NV items.1 User’s Manual You can define additional items as shown above to extend the cell/UARFCN set. 72 . Below is an example of a WCDMA Cell Lock setup. 9. The dialog is limited to 4 bytes. clicking the Add button each time.

You are always prompted to confirm an NV command before it is executed. select the appropriate AQM module in the combo box. indicating that the device has not yet been paired with an AQM module. the string “UE not paired” is displayed. section 10.Chapter 9. All traffic over the NV interface is logged in internal protocol reports. identified by their serial numbers. so if you are recording a logfile in TEMS Investigation it should be possible to recover the previous values of parameters by studying these reports. whereas Apply keeps it open. Clicking OK will close the dialog.1.10. this is how you select the AQM module with which a given EQ should interact. 9. Click either OK or Apply. which holds all available AQM modules. Selecting this item opens the PESQ Device Pairing dialog: • • At the outset. a read is always performed at the same address. To accomplish pairing. PESQ Device Pairing If you are going to do audio quality measurement with a Call Generator or MRU. The PESQ Device Pairing item is selectable only for devices supporting audio quality measurements (these are listed in the Getting Started Manual. Before an NV write.0 73 .1). Operating and Controlling External Equipment Manually WARNING: It is possible to corrupt the phone’s calibration parameters or otherwise damage the phone by writing the wrong value to the wrong address. AQM modules do not themselves appear as EQs on the Equipment tab. • NT12-7002 ver 1. After an NV write the phone is always automatically reset.3. and consequently it is deactivated in TEMS Investigation.

12. provided that the physical connections between phones and AQM modules are unchanged.2. specified by an MCC and MNC combination just as in section 21. • If you want to undo the pairing so that the device is no longer associated with any AQM module.1 User’s Manual You need to pair off your EQs and AQM modules manually like this the first time around. Note that if you unpair the devices in this way. with the third box set to “-”.2.1. click the Reset button. Two-digit MNC are entered in the first two combo boxes.2) to recreate the same pairing automatically. 74 . the two-digit MNC “01” is entered like this: On the other hand.2. the three-digit MNC “001” (formally distinct from the preceding!) is entered as follows: 9. you can use the re-pairing function (see section 8.6. PLMN Control This function locks the device on a PLMN.TEMS Investigation 14.1. Radio Access Technology Lock (Lock on RAT) Certain devices can be locked to a particular radio access technology. On later occasions. 9.11. The RAT lock function works only in idle mode. you can no longer use the re-pairing function. There is however one difference compared to the device property setting: The control function allows you to distinguish two-digit and three-digit MNCs. For example.

Chapter 9. Operating and Controlling External Equipment Manually

The Lock on technology combo box shows the phone’s current RAT lock state. You also use the same combo box to perform RAT lock actions by selecting a new RAT lock state to be applied and then clicking the OK or the Apply button. Clicking OK will close the dialog, whereas Apply keeps it open. Note that the lock on RAT procedure may take some time to complete. The items in the “Lock on technology” combo box have the following meanings: • Not locked – – • – – • – – State: No forcing of UE network selection will occur. Action: Releases a previously applied RAT lock. State: The phone is locked to GSM, that is, the phone is forced to camp on a GSM network whenever one is available. Action: Locks the phone to GSM. State: The phone is locked to WCDMA, that is, the phone is forced to camp on a WCDMA network whenever one is available. Action: Locks the phone to WCDMA.

GSM

WCDMA

NT12-7002 ver 1.0

75

TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual

9.1.12.1.

RAT Lock vs. Technology-specific Control Functions: Sony Ericsson

This section also applies to the Qualcomm chipset based Sony Ericsson Xperia arc S. The RAT lock setting takes priority over all technology-specific locking functions (channel, cell, and band lock) covered in sections 9.1.5, 21.2.2.6, and 21.2.2.13. On the assumption that both types of network (GSM and WCDMA) are available to the phone, this has the following implications: • If the RAT lock is set to “WCDMA”, the phone will be locked to WCDMA indefinitely1; specifying GSM bands or channels to lock on will not by itself force the phone into GSM mode. Analogously, if the RAT lock is set to “GSM”, the phone will be locked to GSM indefinitely1; specifying WCDMA UARFCNs or cells to lock on will not by itself force the phone into WCDMA mode. In order to force immediate use of GSM, you must set the RAT lock to “GSM”; the phone will then be locked to a GSM network indefinitely, and any GSM-specific settings you have made will take effect. The same holds for WCDMA.

Note again that the RAT lock function has an effect in idle mode only. If no RAT lock is applied, the phone will camp on whatever network the fixed side prescribes (as it normally does). Whatever technology-specific settings you have made will be in force while the phone is using that technology; however, these settings will not interfere with the choice of RAT made by the fixed side.

9.1.12.2.

RAT Lock vs. Technology-specific Control Functions: Nokia

If you lock a Nokia phone on a RAT, then try to apply a locking function for a different RAT, the phone will go into No service mode. For example, this will be the result if you lock the phone to GSM, then attempt to lock on a WCDMA cell. However, the technology-specific setting is remembered and will come into effect after the RAT lock has been released. In the above example, when you
1. Except if you put the phone in scanning mode, in which case it ceases to behave like a phone at all.

76

Chapter 9. Operating and Controlling External Equipment Manually

release the GSM RAT lock, the phone will immediately switch to WCDMA and lock on the WCDMA cell you selected.

9.1.13.

RRC WCDMA Capability Control

This function lets you modify the phone’s reported HSPA capabilities. The options are the same as in the device properties described in section 21.2.2.14.

9.1.14.

Speech Codec Control

This function lets you redefine the set of speech codecs that should be enabled in the phone and change the default order of priority between these codecs. The user interface is the same as in section 21.2.2.3. The Set Default Speech Codecs option causes the phone to revert to its default speech codec settings.

9.2.

Voice/Video Calls

Under the Voice and Video nodes are found various operations related to CS voice and video telephony. They use the same types of configuration sets as the corresponding Service Control activities, which are covered in sections 20.16.6 and 20.16.7. Which a CS voice or video call is ongoing, its progress is displayed on the Navigator’s Equipment tab immediately beneath the device engaged in the call.

NT12-7002 ver 1.0

77

TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual

9.3.

Data Services

Under the IP and Messaging nodes are found operations for running PS data service sessions. Again these operations correspond in one-to-one fashion to activities in Service Control scripts. All configuration details are covered in the Service Control chapter, sections 20.16.3–20.16.6. For example, if you want to conduct a manual FTP download, you first need to set up a network connection using IP  Network Connect, and then you can do the actual download by initiating an IP  FTP Download operation. This assumes that you already have configurations defined for each operation. If not, then right-click the operation on the Activities tab, choose Configuration Sets, and create a configuration by clicking New in the dialog that appears. Progress indicators are shown for data service sessions in the same way as for CS voice/video; compare section 9.2. Note: If you run multiple concurrent data service sessions using multiple devices, avoid starting all of these in very rapid succession. It is better to start one session at a time with at least a few seconds in between. Compare the note at the end of section 20.10.4.

9.3.1.

Presentation of Data Service Testing

Testing data services will produce the following output: Information elements in the Data category: see Information Elements and Events, section 3.8. Selections of these elements are by default presented in the data service oriented line charts. See Information Elements and Events, chapter 8. A number of events pertaining to various services, and more: see Information Elements and Events, sections 7.2 and 7.4. These are by default presented in the data service oriented line charts. KPI-related events in the message window Events of KPI Type: see Information Elements and Events, sections 7.4 and 8.8. Messages in the Data Reports message window: see Information Elements and Events, section 8.8.

• •

78

Chapter 9. Operating and Controlling External Equipment Manually

9.4.

Scanning

Under the Scan node you can set up and execute scanning sessions. This can alternatively be done from Service Control scripts, as described in section 20.16.5. General aspects of scanning are covered in chapter 13. For complete details on scanning setups for each supported cellular technology, see chapters 14– 19. The configuration is done in the same way whether the scanning is manual or script-controlled.

NT12-7002 ver 1.0

79

TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual

10.

The Status Control Monitor

The Status Control Monitor provides at-a-glance information on: • • • • the status of devices connected to the PC, including positioning equipment service execution PC performance logfile recording.

The window is found in the Control category on the Navigator’s Menu tab. Generally speaking, the Status Control Monitor indicates what last happened: it does not provide comprehensive coverage but should be seen as a complement to other parts of the user interface. Each “LED”-style indicator is accompanied by a text string that details the significance of the indicator’s current color.

10.1.

Equipment Connection

This indicator relates to the status of data collecting devices other than positioning equipment. Symbol green yellow red no color Meaning A new device (EQ) has been activated in TEMS Investigation. A device which is activated has stopped delivering data. A device has been deactivated in TEMS Investigation. No devices detected.

Compare the Navigator’s Equipment tab: see section 8.3.

80

Chapter 10. The Status Control Monitor

10.2.

Positioning

This indicator reflects the status of the currently preferred positioning device. (Regarding the definition of “preferred”, see section 8.5.) Symbol green red no color Meaning The preferred positioning device is delivering valid data. The preferred positioning device has stopped delivering valid data. No positioning device detected.

Compare the Navigator’s Equipment tab: see section 8.3.

10.3.

Service Status

This indicator relates to service usage. It covers both service sessions that are initiated manually (from the bottom pane of the Navigator’s Equipment tab: see sections 9.2, 9.3) and service sessions controlled by a script (see chapter 20). However, if you initiate a service directly on the device, using the device keypad, such an action does not affect this indicator. Symbol green yellow red no color Meaning Last service execution OK, everything in order. Service execution failed once or twice. Service execution failed repeatedly (at least three times in a row). No service executing.

NT12-7002 ver 1.0

81

TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual

10.4.

Computer Performance

This information is taken from Windows. Memory usage for all tasks, not only TEMS Investigation, is indicated. Symbol green yellow red Meaning CPU and memory usage both below 75%. CPU and/or memory usage above 75%, but both below 95%. CPU and/or memory usage above 95%.

10.5.

Logfile Progress

This indicator relates to logfile recording only, not to logfile analysis. Symbol green red Recording active. One of the following: • • no color Size of logfile not increasing due to an error. Device deactivated. Meaning

No recording in progress.

Compare the status bar, Recording section: see section 4.4.3.

10.6.

Context Menu

You can record all text messages printed in the Status Control Monitor to a text file. Right-click in the Status Control Monitor, and a context menu will appear; from that menu you can start and stop the logging of the window contents. By default the message recording is turned off.

82

Chapter 11. Logfiles

11.

Logfiles

This chapter explains: • • • • • • • • how to log information received from external devices to file (section 11.1) how to load a logfile for analysis (section 11.2). loading of logfiles from sources outside TEMS Investigation (section 11.3) viewing of logfile contents (section 11.4) transferring of logfiles via FTP (section 11.5) logfile export (section 11.6) merging of uplink AQM data into logfiles (section 11.7) generation of logfile reports (section 11.8).

The chapter also describes:

11.1.
• •

Recording Logfiles

Logfile recording can be initiated in the following ways: Manually from the Record toolbar or Logfile menu. Such a logfile will always include all activated devices. By starting a walk, either along a planned route or unguided, in the Pinpoint Window: see section 12.3. Here, too, all activated devices are included. By a script that is executing. In this case the logfile can record devices selectively, as specified in the script setup. For full instructions on how to configure scripted recording, turn to sections 20.16.1.7–20.16.1.9.

Several logfiles can be recorded concurrently, and each recording is then completely independent of the others. The activities of one device (EQ) can be recorded in multiple logfiles. Regardless of the method used to record a logfile, the output is always a single file with extension .trp.

NT12-7002 ver 1.0

83

TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual

The rest of the present section deals with manual recording, which is most conveniently handled from the Record toolbar. To initiate recording of a logfile: Click the Start Recording button on the Record toolbar. This dialog appears:

File name

The default naming is in the form of a timestamp: mmddhhmmss.trp (month, day, hours, minutes, seconds). Here you can enter free text characterizing the logfile. This attribute is also visible in Windows Explorer1 (select the Subject column for viewing). Use this field to categorize the logfile with suitable keywords. A tag is defined simply by being entered here. Valid keyword separators are comma (,) and semicolon (;). The Tags attribute can also be inspected in Windows Explorer1 (select the Tags column for viewing). Free-text field for describing the logfile.

Subject

Tags

Description

1. Note: This feature is temporarily disabled in TEMS Investigation 14.1.

Now activate your equipment if you have not already done so. (By starting the recording first you ensure that you capture all of the relevant measurement data in the logfile.)

84

Chapter 11. Logfiles

Perform the desired tasks with your external equipment. After you have completed all of these tasks, click Stop Recording to end the recording and close the logfile. Once you have closed it, you cannot log any more data to the same file.

Alternatively, you can control the recording with the corresponding commands in the Logfile menu.

11.1.1.

Inserting Filemarks

Filemarks are text strings which can be inserted automatically or manually in a logfile in order to tag interesting segments in the file. They are treated as events and appear as such in presentation windows. Filemarks can be searched for in message windows, as explained in section 26.7.2. In Service Control scripts, you can use the Filemark activity to have filemarks inserted automatically. See section 20.16.1.5. To add a filemark manually: Click the Insert Filemark button and enter the filemark text (up to 50 characters).

A Filemark event is written to the logfile for each filemark.

11.1.2.

Further Recording Options

Some additional options are available when recording logfiles. From the Logfile menu, choose Recording Properties.

NT12-7002 ver 1.0

85

meaning that you indicate your exact positions as you walk around measuring. This reduces the consumption of disk space as well as the CPU load during recording. Positioning Logfiles by Pinpointing in the Map Window This section describes how to use the pinpointing technique for positioning logfile data. 11. The Pinpoint Window is dealt with in chapter 12.3. If you check this box. Pinpointing is useful in environments where GPS coverage is lacking.TEMS Investigation 14. The pinpointing described here is done in the Map window and is manual. and you cannot view or edit any settings controlling this behavior.1 User’s Manual Default recording folder Clear history buffer at start of new logfile Here you can change the default directory where logfiles will be saved.1. the history buffer in TEMS Investigation is automatically cleared on reaching a size of 410. This function is automatic. an internal history buffer (providing quick access to logfile data) is cleared every time you start recording a new logfile. To prevent out-of-memory issues. TEMS Investigation also has another pinpointing tool. where you can either pinpoint manually or plan and create your route in advance and then walk it in a simplified fashion. 86 .000 messages. the Pinpoint Window.

3. Now click the Start Recording button on the main window toolbar. On the Map window toolbar. the corresponding position is registered in the logfile as a waypoint along your route.1.1. you cannot activate a GPS in TEMS Investigation. As long as a phone is activated. you need to position it. You must do this before starting the logfile recording. pinpointing in the Map window is disabled. Then. clicks on the map will be interpreted as pinpointing actions. you indicate your position by clicking on the map at regular intervals. The waypoint is marked with a black diamond. Logfiles Note: If you activate a GPS in TEMS Investigation. This is indicated by the cursor changing into an upward arrow whenever it enters the Map window. Each time you pinpoint. and a new route segment in the form of a straight line is drawn to it from the preceding waypoint. but it cannot be activated in the TEMS Investigation application.3–31.4. A GPS can be physically plugged in without disabling the pinpointing function.Chapter 11.0 87 . • Basic Pinpointing Procedures First. the measurement reports received between the two points are drawn as theme symbols distributed uniformly along the new route segment (and assigned the corresponding positions in the logfile). If the image file is unpositioned. Conversely. See sections 31. 11. while pinpointing is in progress. To record positions for measurements. click the Pinpoint button. 2 1 3 4 5 Route Waypoints (pinpoint markers) Measurement data points NT12-7002 ver 1. load your floor plan or other image to be used for pinpointing into a Map window.

It is wise not to replace the map during recording. 11. finish as follows: Deactivate the phone.TEMS Investigation 14. the failure will likely be registered in both logfiles. Furthermore. To optimize the performance of the Map window. Advice on Pinpointing and Recording From section 11. TEMS Investigation continuously maintains an internal buffer with the latest signaling: up to 15 seconds’ worth of it or up to 1. (Note that this is in fact not the case in the figure in section 11. • Pinpoint one last time to ensure that all data is accurately positioned.3.1. is dropped). Buffering in Connection with Logfile Recording For each connected device. you should pinpoint every time you change direction. To 88 .2.g.) If you pinpoint close to the edge of the Map window. whichever is less.3. the map will scroll automatically. the contents of this buffer are inserted at the start of the logfile. the signaling leading up to the establishment of the call or data session.000 messages. and this duplication of data will skew any statistics that are computed based on it.4. Now if a call fails (e. then any two consecutive logfiles will overlap. you should remove all unused themes (see section 31.1 it is clear that in order for the recorded route to agree well with the actual one.3.1.1. If the Start Recording and Stop Recording activities are put first and last in the loop. for example.1. Consider a script where voice calls are repeated in a while loop and a new logfile is recorded in each turn. Therefore the waypoints and connecting lines appear also when the logfile is loaded for analysis later on. This is potentially useful in order to capture as much as possible of the context surrounding a device activity. When logfile recording is started (by any of the available methods). you should try to maintain approximately the same speed throughout your route.1 User’s Manual The waypoints themselves are stored in the logfile as “Pinpoint” messages which appear by default in the Events window.5) and avoid having other presentation windows open at the same time unless you really need them.1. where the tester has increased his speed considerably between waypoints 3 and 4. to obtain equal data densities in different locations. Please note that this mechanism may cause unexpected and possibly unwanted data to appear at the beginning of a logfile. When you are done with your measurement session. 11. Click Stop Recording to end the recording and close the logfile.

you must also exit Pinpoint mode there. Logfile loading is controlled from the Replay toolbar or from the Logfile menu. TEMS Discovery is used. One logfile at a time can be loaded in TEMS Investigation. Opening a logfile only loads logfile metadata into the application.1.0 89 . Regarding the latter. see section 20. Alternatively.9). you can open a logfile by drag-and-drop from Windows Explorer. NT12-7002 ver 1.1. The quickest method is to use the toolbar buttons. The metadata is displayed on the Navigator’s Logfile tab.2. Logfiles prevent logfiles from overlapping.9.2. not the full contents of the file (that is.2. if you have been pinpointing in the Map window. Furthermore. The name or entire path of the logfile can be copied to the Windows clipboard by right-clicking in the logfile name box and selecting the appropriate command: Copy filename to clipboard or Copy full path to clipboard. insert Wait activities in your script. Opening a Logfile Click the Open Logfile button to open a logfile. turn to section 11.3. Loading Logfiles for Analysis Note: To be able to load a logfile.Chapter 11. for instance by clicking the Selection Tool button on the Map window toolbar (see section 31. the measurement data).16. 11. For multi-logfile analysis. 11. This tab shows the logfile name at the top. The remaining space on the Logfile tab is divided into subtabs whose contents are detailed in the subsections that follow. The file must then be dropped onto the Logfile tab of the Navigator. you must deactivate your external equipment.

Description Start Time Stop Time Probe Shows the contents of these fields as defined at logfile creation time.TEMS Investigation 14.1. and an attempt was made to recover the file. 90 . a TEMS Automatic RTU or a TEMS Pocket release.2.1 User’s Manual 11.0) logfiles. 11. This can be a version of TEMS Investigation. Date and time when the recording started.2.2. but it might just as well be. Status Bounding Box The smallest area (defined by min/max latitude and longitude) that encompasses the route traveled in the logfile. for example.1. Normal: The logfile was recorded normally. Date and time when the recording concluded. TEMS product or component used to record the logfile. Tags. Unknown: Value displayed for old (pre-14. Recovered: A failure occurred during recording of this logfile.2. Logfile Metadata and Statistics “General” Subtab Subject. see section 11. Please note that the file may be corrupt.

2. Logfiles 11. Each device appears with the same EQ number assigned as it had at the time of recording.3.) just as is done in live mode for active devices on the Navigator’s top-level Equipment tab (Information subtab: see section 8.Chapter 11. No data from that device will then be loaded into the presentation windows when you load the full logfile contents. Selecting a device populates the fields at the bottom (Capabilities. “Equipment” Subtab This subtab holds all devices that were activated in TEMS Investigation during recording of the logfile. The Revision field contains miscellaneous device information such as firmware revision.2.2. You can right-click a device and choose Deactivate to hide data from that device in the logfile presentation.0 91 .2.2). etc. NT12-7002 ver 1.

2. “Activities” Subtab This tab gives a complete chronology of the activities (whether scripted or executed manually) performed by all devices in the course of the logfile recording. You can show all activities or only those of a particular type. Result: The chronology is broken into separate tables for each possible outcome (Succeeded.TEMS Investigation 14. Activity: The chronology is broken into separate tables for each type of activity performed. 92 .2. etc. You can group and/or filter the contents in various ways: Group by Not Grouped: The chronology is given in a single table.).1 User’s Manual 11. Failed. Filter by Equipment Filter by Activity You can show all activities or only those of a single EQ.3.

Chapter 11. “Statistics” Subtab NT12-7002 ver 1. which shows equipment status and the outcome of the last activity performed during the execution of a script.1). 11.4. Compare the Service Control Monitor (section 20.3.2. Logfiles Clicking an activity link opens a detailed description of the configuration. and outcome of the activity. • Click the Back link to return to the activity listing. execution.15.2.0 93 . Below are shown a couple of extracts from the description of an FTP Download activity.

Play Section of Status Bar While a logfile is being loaded. Click Fast forward once more to resume logfile loading. 8.3.x. 4.2.1 User’s Manual This tab provides statistics on the outcomes of activities performed by the devices during recording. • • • • • • TEMS Investigation 6. 10.2).x TEMS Investigation EDGE 1. See section 4. 5.x TEMS Investigation WCDMA 3. Filter by Equipment You can show statistics for all devices taken together or for one selected device. You can click the same button again. 7. 6. 2.1. now labeled Stop. Loading Logfiles from Other Sources TEMS Investigation can load and analyze logfiles from the TEMS products listed below. When you are done analyzing a logfile.x1.x1.x.x and later TEMS Investigation GSM 5. to halt the loading of the logfile.TEMS Investigation 14. 3.x 2 94 . Loading Logfile Contents Click the Fast forward button to load the logfile measurement data into the presentation windows.x1.x.x. Compare the Service Control Monitor (section 20.3. The data loaded thus far is then displayed in the presentation windows. click the Close Logfile button to close it. 11.x.4.x TEMS DriveTester GSM–TDMA 1. 11. 11. the Play section of the status bar shows the name of the file and indicates the percentage of the file that has been loaded. 11.15.2.3.x (GSM logfiles) TEMS Pocket 12. which computes similar statistics in testing mode while a script is executing.x1.3.

Viewing Logfile Contents Everything about data presentation is dealt with in chapters 23–31.Chapter 11.5. click the Settings button. 2. Logfiles • • • • TEMS Automatic 9.0. • • Setting Up Logfile Transfers To set up FTP logfile transfers. 7.x.x.2.x. Logfile Transfer via FTP TEMS Investigation has a function for uploading logfiles via FTP according to preconfigured FTP server settings.x (any MTU and TEMS Pocket Remote logfiles) TEMS Automatic 5. 11. described in section 26. section 3.e. Please note that logfiles from these TEMS Pocket versions must first be converted using a PC utility that is delivered with that version. 11.10) 11. 8.5 TEMS Investigation can also read • • • • EFEM logfiles from Motorola phones MDM logfiles from Qualcomm chipset based devices logfiles from Anritsu ML8720 scanners (i.7. TEMS Pocket 9.1. In the window that appears.0 95 .x (any MTU logfiles) TEMS Automatic 4. 2.x (MTU logfiles recorded with GSM-only MTUs) TEMS Automatic 3. Note especially the search functions in message windows. on the Menu tab of the Navigator. NT12-7002 ver 1.x logfiles cannot be loaded in TEMS Investigation. files logged by the scanner itself) MTR files (GSM.4. 6. 1.5. see the Informations Elements and Events volume. choose Configuration  File Transfer.

The local directory on the PC from which logfiles will be uploaded.5.1. FTP Server Settings User name and password on the FTP server. IP address or host name of FTP server.1 User’s Manual 11. Password Server Address Port Server Logfile Directory Local Logfile Directory 96 . Path to the directory on the FTP server where the uploaded logfiles will be stored (in a subdirectory named according to the current date). The FTP server port to use.1.TEMS Investigation 14. if required. The logfile names are augmented with a timestamp indicating the time of upload: _tfu__hh_mm_ss (“tfu” means “TEMS file upload”). User.

Using some suitable third-party software.1. Equipment Here you select the device to use for logfile transfer.5.16. this behavior is preselected and cannot be changed. Logfiles 11. they are deleted from the local directory.3. Logfile Options If this is checked. • • Delete: After logfiles have been uploaded. TEMS Investigation will generate an MD5 checksum (128-bit hash value) for each logfile to be transferred and send that value as a text file along with the logfile. See section 8..3.5.2.1. Start transfer when logfile is closed [. Note that you do not need to have the device activated in TEMS Investigation to be able to transfer files. If the option is not checked.3. The parameters of this configuration are gone through in section 20. logfiles that have been uploaded are moved to a subdirectory Complete that is created automatically for the purpose.1. For a cellular network device. Move: Within the local directory.] files after transfer Generate MD5 checksum If checked.Chapter 11.5. you initiate transfers manually as described in section 11. NT12-7002 ver 1. you need to supply parameters for connecting to the network. Click the Connection parameters button to open the dialog for creating a Network Connect configuration set.2.. If Start transfer when logfile is closed is checked. or over an Ethernet or WLAN connection. 11. The transfer can be done over a cellular network. every logfile will be transferred immediately after the recording has ended.0 97 . you can then compute the checksum for the uploaded file and confirm that it agrees with that of the original.6.3. Note: Transfer over Ethernet or WLAN requires that detection of network adapters be enabled (it is disabled by default).

See the Technical Reference. this button is named Auto and grayed out. • • • To save a setup.TEMS Investigation 14.6. • Exporting Logfiles in Other Formats Logfiles can be exported in the following formats: Text file with tab delimited data (suitable for processing in. • • In the File Transfer Settings dialog.4. The setup is added in the list box. TEMS Automatic logfiles.2 is not set. type a name for it in the Name box and click Save. define or select the setup you want to use. select it in the list box and click Delete.5.5. 11. In this case you start the logfile transfer manually on each occasion. 11. can be exported in this format.2 Marconi Planet DMS 3. too. section 9. To delete a setup. see the Technical Reference. chapter 8. Setup You can save all settings made in this dialog as a file transfer setup.1. The setups are maintained in the dialog.) The progress bar will indicate the progress of the transfer.1 Ethereal (Wireshark) MDM • • • • • Some of these formats contain multiple files for each logfile.2. then click OK. for example.0 (Interchange or Tab format) ArcView Shapefile: about version. chapter 9 for details. The text export format is described in detail in the Technical Reference. To load a previously saved setup. 98 . a spreadsheet application).5. (If the file transfer is automatic. there is no explicit handling of setup files.1 User’s Manual 11.1. select it in the list box and click Load. click the Start button. Starting Logfile Transfers This section is applicable only when the option Start transfer when logfile is closed described in section 11. In the File Transfer window. MapInfo 3.

If there is no positioning information in the logfile. or Planet format requires that the data be positioned. NT12-7002 ver 1. (This is not a logfile export format in the strict sense. • • Preparing an Export Order First. the export file will contain only a header and no route data.1. Logfiles Note: Export in MapInfo. choose Export Logfile. 11. deactivate any external devices that are currently activated.Chapter 11. In the TEMS Export window. Regarding the choice PESQ merge.6. From the Logfile menu. ArcView.7. A separate window named TEMS Export is launched. This is necessary in order for the export to work properly.0 99 .4. see section 11. see section 11. click Add.6. The Add Export Order dialog appears: Format Select the output format for your logfiles. For the latter possibility.) Input files Type or select the logfile or logfiles you want to export. Logfile export can be done either from the TEMS Investigation user interface or from a Command Prompt.

as described in the Technical Reference. etc. 11.6. each logfile is exported separately. If the Merge output option is unchecked. all logfiles will be merged into a single set of export files. Export to other formats produces files with fixed extensions. File extension for export file.2. This will have exactly the same effect on information elements and events as having cell files loaded in the TEMS Investigation application itself (populating IEs that require cell file data.1.1 User’s Manual Cell files Click this button to include one or several cell files in the export. To the export file name you can optionally add a descriptive suffix. If you are exporting several logfiles and this option is checked. Specifying the Contents of Export Files On clicking the Setup button. To the export file name you can optionally add a descriptive prefix.2. Selecting Information Elements to Export The Information Elements tab is common to many of the formats. chapter 9. see section 11.). 11. and the export file set simply retains the name of the logfile. there is no sorting of messages by timestamps. Here you select which information elements to include in the export: 100 . Editable only for certain formats.2 below. including the plain-text format.TEMS Investigation 14.6.6.) The name given to the export files depends on the ordering of logfiles in the Input files box. Merge output Directory Prefix Suffix Extension The directory where the export files are written. a dialog appears whose contents partly depend on the format chosen. (Logfiles are simply concatenated. • Now click the Setup button to specify details of the export.

choose that category in the combo box in the Available IEs section.Chapter 11. you do not get the whole element at once. Repeat for all components you want to export. To select the component with the next higher argument. For all export formats except tab-delimited text. • To export an element. the Data category). To export the item only from specified phones. To export an information element from a different category (e. • • • Editing the Selected Items To edit an information element: • In the Selected IEs box. From information elements with arguments you pick one component at a time. The Edit IE dialog appears. Elements from different categories can be freely mixed in export files. you can also edit the following settings: NT12-7002 ver 1. By default a chosen item is exported from all devices that report it. you can restrict the export of a selected IE to a single device. To remove an item from the Selected IEs box. By default the items selected are picked from all phones. select the desired item and click the Edit button above the box. or change the IE argument (where one exists). select the item and click “<”. For all export formats. To clear the entire Selected IEs box.g. If the element has arguments. but only the component with the lowest argument. select it in the Available IEs list and click the “>” button to move it to the Selected IEs list. click “<<”. see Editing the Selected Items below. you must edit the item.0 101 . click “>” again. Logfiles You choose each individual element separately.

but in different files. Optionally. “-1”). See section 11. (You might want to make this string shorter. By default. Note also that the NAME and NODATA settings are not saved along with other logfile export settings. You can rearrange the items by selecting them and moving them using the Up and Dn buttons.6. any string is accepted.6. 11. • As long as these settings have not been edited. whereas for the remaining formats the string must be numeric (e. the IE name is preceded by an asterisk (*) in the Selected IEs box.2.2. including user-inserted filemarks.g.8. the column heading string consists of the IE name. For Planet. the text export file always contains data on events. The choice is made on the Options tab: 102 . Arranging Items in the Export Files The order of the items in the Selected IEs list will also be the order in which they come in the export files. the export can be reduced in order to decrease the duplication of data and the number of lines in the export file.TEMS Investigation 14.) NODATA field: If you enter a string here. By default the text export file also contains message information.2. “999”. There are no user settings relating to the event data.1 User’s Manual • NAME field: This is the IE column heading in the export file. it will be written in the export file whenever the IE does not have a valid value. Text File Specific Settings Besides your chosen information elements.

all IE values are written for every message. All messages are kept. All other standard columns are always included. Events and filemarks only. and Hexadecimal String are excluded from the export file..Chapter 11.. (The Event column is kept. In addition there will be one column for each selected IE or IE component.) Messages not triggering an event and containing no changed IE values are wholly excluded. chapter 8. NT12-7002 ver 1. see the Technical Reference. If the box is not checked.. The following columns are optional: Message Type. as is the Event Info column provided that the Event information checkbox below is checked. This makes for a considerable reduction of the export file size. • Event information Governs whether the Event Info column is included in the export. and Hexadecimal String. If you check Show changed IE values only. IE values are written out only if they have changed since the previous message. Message ID. Check a column to include it. Logfiles Full message information. Message ID. The export file is reduced in two ways: • The columns Frame Number.0 103 ..

MapInfo Specific Settings For MapInfo export (whether to Interchange or Tab format). the Options tab looks like this: Reports to export data from This setting governs what types of report from the phone are included in the export files: • • • all reports only Layer 3 reports only mode reports.txt.1 User’s Manual Message options Check the relevant boxes in order to have Layer 2 messages. 11.TEMS Investigation 14. By default all reports are exported. 104 .6. Layer 3 messages.2. and phones’ mode reports exported as unabridged plain text to a common separate file whose name ends in _textexp.3.

2. ArcView Specific Settings Export message information. uplink. downlink) Message name Hexadecimal string For details on ArcView output. Export events and plot. Note. For details on MapInfo output. and that the symbol used is not one of the default TEMS Investigation event symbols. The following data is added (one column for each item): • • • • Message direction (internal. see the Technical Reference.. Check this to include information on Layer 3 and Layer 2 messages in the export files. section 9.. The following data is added (one column for each item): • • • Message direction (internal. Export events but do not plot. but no event-specific symbol is used in MapInfo when plotting on a map.1.2. that there is no differentiation of event types. section 9. Logfiles Export message information.: Events are exported.. Events This setting governs the export of events.: Events are exported.4....Chapter 11. 11.. see the Technical Reference. Check this to include information on Layer 3 and Layer 2 messages in the export files. however. uplink.6. • • • Include file name in file Check this to include the file name in the export files. NT12-7002 ver 1. downlink) Message name Hexadecimal string Extension (containing cause values) Do not export events: No event information is exported.0 105 . and a unique symbol is used when plotting in MapInfo to distinguish events from other data..

1 User’s Manual 11. The Export message information checkbox must be checked. see the Technical Reference. To load a previously saved setup in the Setup dialog.6. MDM Specific Settings MDM export is intended for logfiles recorded with Qualcomm chipset based devices. The Export message information checkbox must be checked. click Load and locate the setup file.7.TEMS Investigation 14. For details on MDM output. downlink) Message name For details on Marconi Planet output.4. 11. see the Technical Reference. For details on Ethereal output. uplink..tex for a text-format export setup).5.2. Ethereal (Wireshark) Specific Settings The export encompasses all of the logfile content. section 9.6.5. The file extension will depend on the format (for example. section 9. see the Technical Reference. . you may want to save the setup for future use.2.2.6.3. 11. • 106 .2.6. otherwise the output file will be empty. click Save and store the file where appropriate.8.. • In the Setup dialog. Check this to include information on Layer 3 and Layer 2 messages in the export file. Marconi Planet Specific Settings Export message information. Saving and Loading Export Setups When you are done specifying the export. otherwise the output files will be empty. The export encompasses all Qualcomm-specific air interface messages in the logfile.6. The following data is added (one column for each item): • • Message direction (internal. section 9. 11.

2) are not saved in the above-mentioned files.6. Executing Export Orders All the export orders you have defined are listed in the Export Logfile window.4. Wildcards can be used in the file name in regular DOS fashion. Logfiles However. 11. 11. A summary of the export execution appears in a popup window (“Export Result”).6.4. the NAME and NODATA settings for information elements (see the introduction of section 11. Use semicolons (. • • To start executing the export orders. /IF and /InputFiles can be used interchangeably. Command Line Controlled Logfile Export Logfile export can alternatively be initiated from a Command Prompt by running the file TEMS. where optional parts are placed within square brackets [ ]: TEMS. right-click and choose Abort from the context menu. right-click and choose Start from the context menu (or click the Start button in the window).3.) to separate files. To abort the execution of the export orders.exe /IF "<logfile name(s)>" [/OD "<output directory path>"] [/CFG "<configuration file name>"] [/CF "<cell file name(s)>"] [/EF "<export format>"] [/P "<prefix>"] [/S "<suffix>"] [/E "<extension>"] [/MO] [/V] Each of the command line switches has an abbreviated as well as a full form. which is found under <TEMS Investigation install dir>\Application. NT12-7002 ver 1. Mandatory Command Line Switches /IF (or: /InputFiles) Equivalent to Input files field in logfile export dialog.6. The command has the following syntax.0 107 .exe.ExportTool.6.ExportTool. for example. 11. They are instead written to DBF files that are found in the Settings directory beneath the TEMS Investigation installation directory.Chapter 11.1.

4." Exports all TEMS Investigation logfiles found in the specified directory.1.2.TEMS Investigation 14. Here is how configuration file types match up with export formats (/EF): • • • • • /EF "Text file" /CFG "C:\Path\filename.avx" /EF "Marconi Planet-file" /CFG "C:\Path\filename. 108 .trp. Optional Command Line Switches /OD (or: /OutputDirectory) Full path of output directory. This parameter is optional but strongly recommended for all export formats that have a configuration. • /IF "C:\ExpTest\*. Most importantly. /CFG (or: /ConfigurationFile) Logfile export configuration file.C:\ExpTest\0825_02. the location where the export files are written is indicated in a file batch_result. • /IF "C:\ExpTest1\*.6. under Windows 7: C:\Users\<user name>\AppData\Local\Temp).trp" Exports all TEMS Investigation logfiles found in directories ExpTest1 and ExpTest2 as well as those in directory ExpTest3 matching the given file name pattern. compare section 11.6.C:\ExpTest2\*.1 User’s Manual Examples: • /IF "C:\ExpTest\0825_01.tex" /EF "MapInfo Interchange (mif)" /CFG "C:\Path\filename. nor for PESQ uplink data merge. 11.8. created by saving a setup in the logfile export dialog as described in section 11.mex" /EF "ArcView shape-file" /CFG "C:\Path\filename.mex" /EF "MapInfo Tab-file" /CFG "C:\Path\filename. a configuration file is required to have any information element values exported.C:\ExpTest3\0825_*1.trp" Exports the logfiles listed.pex" No configuration file exists for export to MDM or Ethereal.2.txt which is found in the Temp directory of your Windows user (for example.2. If you do not specify an output directory.6. Equivalent to Directory field in logfile export dialog.

Logfiles /CF (or: /CellFiles) Equivalent to selecting cell files by clicking the Cell files button in the logfile export dialog. /V (or: /Verbose) If you include this switch.) as delimiter. The possible values are those seen in the Format combo box: "Text file" "MapInfo Interchange (mif)" "MapInfo Tab-file" "ArcView shape-file" "Marconi Planet-file" "Export to Ethereal" "Export to MDM" "Pesq Merge" /P (or: /Prefix) Equivalent to Prefix field in logfile export dialog. /EF (or: /ExportFormat) Equivalent to Format setting in logfile export dialog. /S (or: /Suffix) Equivalent to Suffix field in logfile export dialog. Note again that for some export formats you cannot override the default extension. the name of each exported logfile will be printed in the Command Prompt window. /E (or: /Extension) Equivalent to Extension field in logfile export dialog.Chapter 11. If you specify several cell files. If this parameter is omitted.0 109 . NT12-7002 ver 1. the export is done in text format. use semicolon (. The format string needs to be enclosed within double quotes (" "). /MO (or: /MergeOutput) Including this switch is equivalent to checking the Merge output checkbox in the logfile export dialog.

trp format) that includes both uplink and downlink AQM data.3. 11. This uplink data needs to be inserted in each logfile (*. To perform the data merge. 110 . This could be done in a number of ways. 11. The output is stored under C:\ExpTest\Export.7.ExportTool.tex" This command exports in text format all logfiles found in C:\ExpTest that were recorded on August 25 (we are assuming here that the default logfile naming has been retained).exe /IF "C:\ExpTest\0825*" /OD C:\ExpTest\Export /V /CFG "C:\ExpTest\GsmN.6. The output is a new logfile (still in *. by default under C:\TIPESQ in a subfolder named <yyyymmdd><phone number>.4. using the setup described in the configuration file GsmN. since the merge algorithm relies on this structure to locate the correct files. for example: • • • by setting up access to the Call Generator output directory as a network drive by downloading the uplink data files via FTP by copying the files onto a USB stick or a CD/DVD.1.tex. No special tool is currently provided in TEMS Investigation for accessing the uplink AQM data. See the screenshot in section 11.trp) recorded with TEMS Investigation. Retrieving Uplink AQM Data The uplink AQM data is stored as XML files on the Call Generator PC.1 User’s Manual 11. The XML files are given random four-digit numbers as names.7. the files must be collected manually from the Call Generator. Example Below is an example of a logfile export command: TEMS.2.7. uplink AQM data is computed by a Call Generator and output in XML files. you need to export the TEMS Investigation logfile with Format set to PESQ merge. Note: When downloading the uplink data files it is important to preserve the Call Generator directory structure. Merging Uplink AQM Data into Logfiles (UMTS) As described in chapter 35.TEMS Investigation 14.

Logfiles 11. What happens during the merge is that the uplink AQM data is integrated into the logfile.trp. You are now ready to perform the merge. then OK once more. (Exception: The first score in each pair of Frequent AQM scores needs to be moved a further 2. select PESQ merge.. An example is shown below: UL AQM root directory • • • Click OK.5 s backwards in time so that each score aligns with the speech sentence for which it was computed. Back in the Add Export Order dialog. To compensate for the delay in computing the AQM data. choose Export Logfile.7.6. The Add Export Order dialog appears.trp) containing the downlink AQM data. A dialog appears in which you point out where the uplink AQM data files are located (one XML file for each AQM call). • • Under Format. The name of each output logfile will consist of the original name plus the suffix “-AQM”.7.1. click the Browse dir button next to the Directory box and navigate to the desired directory. under Input files. Click the Setup button next to the Format combo box. • Preparing and Performing a Merge From the Logfile menu.” button and locate the root directory holding all XML files (the level above the directories named by date).2.0 111 . Click OK to exit the Add Export Order dialog.1. Click the “. the logfile export function also moves the downlink data 5. See section 11. You also need to specify where the merged output files should be written.6. Click Add.Chapter 11. select the TEMS Investigation logfiles (*.3.75 s NT12-7002 ver 1. Be sure not to check the Merge output option. To this end. all entries being sorted by their timestamps.. Execute the AQM export order from the Export Logfile window as described in section 11. Compare section 11. • • • The output files will remain TEMS Investigation logfiles with extension .

see the Technical Reference. Generating Logfile Reports Note: Reporting functions are also available in TEMS Discovery. This is necessary in order for the report generation to work properly. or 8. From one or several logfiles you can generate a report in HTML format which summarizes the data in the logfiles.) The uplink data is simply inserted into the logfiles at the correct points in time.TEMS Investigation 14. 11. deactivate them. chapter 10. If any external devices are activated. If one of these files is currently open. It is possible to perform a merge with an incomplete set of uplink data files.8. For full details of logfile report contents and format. This dialog appears: 112 . close it. including timing issues. see the document “AQM in TEMS Products (Including PESQ and POLQA)” which is found on the installation CD in the subdirectory Documents. • • The logfiles to be included in the report cannot be open while the report is generated. For in-depth coverage of the computation of AQM data.25 s in total. click the Generate Report button on the Report toolbar. To prepare a logfile report. and to repeat the merge procedure later on with further uplink data supplemented. No duplication of data in the output logfile will result from this: the logfile export function processes each AQM call only once.1 User’s Manual backwards.

Chapter 11. Click Add and browse for the files. or click the button labeled “.” to browse your file system. Enter a path. 11. IE Tab NT12-7002 ver 1. Now click Properties to assemble the contents of the report.. choose the logfile or logfiles on which to base the report. Specify an output directory for the report. A multi-tab dialog appears..0 113 .1.8. Those that you choose are listed in the Files box. Logfiles • • • First.

• • • Choose an information element. click the Add button. it is indicated for each threshold • • how many times the value of the information element has crossed the threshold (changed from a more normal value to a more extreme one) how long these peaks/dips have lasted on average.1 User’s Manual The report can compare information element values with thresholds. A number of thresholds are predefined in the dialog. Choose an argument (where applicable). 114 . you can also define your own thresholds. Specify the two thresholds. It will contain statistics of the type “Percentage of measurement points with Active Set CPICH Ec/No below –15 dB”. Adding User-defined Thresholds • To add a pair of thresholds. Check a cellular technology to use all thresholds defined for that technology. Each item in the list represents a set of two thresholds for an information element value: or Whether peaks or dips are counted depends on the information element and cannot be changed. as is seen in the above screenshot. Check those that you wish to use.TEMS Investigation 14. and uncheck the others. In the report. All thresholded information elements listed will also have their distributions visualized in bar charts.

Editing Thresholds • To edit a threshold.2. Events Tab The report has a section with event statistics.4). Modify the value ranges in the dialog that appears. double-click it and enter the desired new value. double-click it and enter the desired new value. Logfiles • • Click Add to add this threshold pair to the list and keep the Add Threshold dialog open.8. Editing Arguments • To edit the argument of the information element (where one exists).0 115 . 11. On this tab you choose what event types to include in these statistics. Click OK to add this threshold pair to the list and close the Add Threshold dialog. If you set up your own value ranges for an IE. and the distribution charts are drawn in a preconfigured manner. Customizing Value Ranges The Ranges column is used to customize the drawing of distribution charts (see the Technical Reference. select it and click the Delete button. NT12-7002 ver 1. By default no ranges are set. the distribution chart will be drawn with one bar for each range: • • • Select the desired information element. Click the Edit Range button.Chapter 11. section 10. Deleting Thresholds • To delete a threshold pair.

The algorithm counts all events. • Mobiles Tab Check the external devices whose data you want to include in the report. etc. press Ctrl + A again to deselect all events. 11. GPS data. is included implicitly. “DC1”.3.4.8. Note: The ranking of cells in the report (“Worst Cell Indication”) is partially based on the number of events occurring in the cell. if available. not only those signifying failures. 11. Scanned Channels Tab Note: The settings on this tab are applicable only if your logfiles contain scan data.1 User’s Manual • Check the events you want to include. In this step you choose what scan data to present in the report. This dialog appears: 116 . and leave the rest unchecked. Therefore.TEMS Investigation 14.) used to record the logfile will be checked. in order for the cell ranking to make sense. click the Define channels button in order to populate the “Available” box. By default all device channels (“MS1”. only failure events should be checked in this step. This is also the default setting. Press Ctrl + A to select all events.8. “MS2”. • First.

NT12-7002 ver 1. For CDMA. just check the desired ARFCNs in the list box. specify an RF channel range under “Lower limit” and “Upper limit”. then check the desired CPIs in the list box.Chapter 11. then check the desired scrambling codes in the list box. specify an EARFCN range under “Lower limit” and “Upper limit”. For TD-SCDMA. The PN selection applies to all RF channels within the chosen range. – – – • Click OK to return to the Report Properties dialog. For WCDMA. select the band of interest. It might look like this: The “Available” list box now lists the selected channels in the following format: • • GSM: m[p] means ARFCN m on the p MHz band. specify a UARFCN range under “Lower limit” and “Upper limit”. The scrambling code selection applies to all UARFCNs within the chosen range. specify a UARFCN range under “Lower limit” and “Upper limit”. The CPI selection applies to all UARFCNs within the chosen range. For LTE. The cell selection applies to all EARFCNs within the chosen range. – – For GSM. then check the desired PNs in the list box.0 117 . then check the desired Cell Identities in the list box. Logfiles • In the combo box at the top. WCDMA: m[f] means scrambling code m on UARFCN f.

Move the items that you wish to present from the Available box to the Selected box. click Load and locate the setup file. For each selected item. The report will be stored under [My] Documents\TEMS Product Files\TEMS Investigation 14. The averaging takes place in the mW domain. Prepared by Logfile information: Logfile names and used equipment 118 . User Details Tab Here you can type a user name and a report number which will be printed in the report header. 11. Saving and Loading Report Setups When you are done specifying the report contents. chapter 10 for a complete description): • • Header: Date. you may want to save the setup for future use. Report Contents The logfile report has the following main sections (see the Technical Reference.TEMS Investigation 14. 11. To load a previously saved setup into the Report Properties dialog. • • In the Report Properties dialog. CDMA: m[f] means PN m on RF channel f. max) and a bar chart. • Generating the Report In the Report wizard. The file extension is .1\GeneratedReports.1 User’s Manual • • • • LTE: m[f] means Cell Identity m on EARFCN f.rpt.5. 11.8. click Save and store the file where appropriate. median.7.8. min.6. TD-SCDMA: m[f] means CPI m on UARFCN f.8. 11. the report will contain signal strength statistics (mean. Time.8.8. click Finish.

Logfiles • • • • • • Worst cell indication: Ranking of cells based on thresholds crossed and events triggered Thresholds: Detailed statistics on how often and in what cells each threshold has been crossed Events: Statistics on events Scan data: Statistics on the signal strength of scanned channels (if any) Distribution charts for thresholded parameters Distribution charts for scan data (if any) The output involving cell data naturally requires a cell file in order to be generated.0 119 . NT12-7002 ver 1.Chapter 11.

1. Such logfiles incorporate the map set used. Logfiles that you record in the Pinpoint Window are created in regular TEMS Investigation format (*. When you save a map set that you have modified in the Pinpoint Window (by defining planned routes in it). 12.TEMS Investigation 14. while others may include a map set in addition to their regular contents.1. Please note that the Pinpoint Window is not a subtype of the Map window (see chapter 31) but distinct from it. 12.1.1 User’s Manual 12.2. • Creating Planned Routes Opening a Map Set Click the Open button and browse to select a map set file. The Pinpoint Window 12. The operations in the Pinpoint Window are also wholly distinct from the pinpointing performed in a Map window. Alternatively. Introduction The Pinpoint Window is designed to further facilitate pinpointing of indoor routes by enabling the construction and use of pre-planned routes.5 × 107) will be displayed at reduced resolution in the Pinpoint Window. 12.trp). 120 . Supported File Formats Holding Map Sets Some of these file types are pure map set formats. Map images of arbitrary size can be loaded. but please note that image files larger than 75 MB (pixel width × pixel height × 4 > 7.2.2. similar to those in TEMS Pocket 11. which is always manual (see section 11.1.x and later. the iBwave format is always used. you can also pinpoint manually in this window.3). The Pinpoint Window supports loading of map sets in the iBwave container format (as does TEMS Pocket) and in a number of other formats.1.

Chapter 12. The Pinpoint Window

• • • • • •

TEMS Investigation logfile (*.trp, version 14.0 and later) created during a previous route walk in the Pinpoint Window iBwave collection (*.ibwc): used as map set format in TEMS Pocket 11.3 and later TEMS Pocket 11.0–11.2 map set file (*.pms) TEMS Pocket 11.x logfile (*.tpz, *.zip) TEMS Pocket 7.3 logfile (*.zip) MapInfo TAB file (*.tab)

Please note that image files in map sets must be positioned; specifically, a TAB file with WGS84 coordinates must be present.

12.2.1.2.

Map Set Metadata Shown in Pop-out Pane

After you have loaded a map set, the pop-out pane on the right is populated with the following metadata: • Building: Expand this item to show a list of the buildings contained in the map set. For each building is indicated: – Lat, Long: Coordinates of the top left corner of the layout plans for each building.

Layout Plan: Expand this item to show the layout plans defined for the selected building. For each layout plan are indicated: – – – The layout plan name The number of routes currently defined for this layout plan The dimensions (in pixels) of the layout plan image.

When you click a layout plan, it is displayed in the map view.

NT12-7002 ver 1.0

121

TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual

Route: This item holds the routes defined for the plan currently selected under Layout Plan. – – – – – – For each route is stated the number of waypoints it contains. When you click a route, it is plotted on the map. Click the button next to a route to modify the route. See section 12.2.4. Click the button next to a route to delete it from the map set. Click the Add Route button to create a new route. See section 12.2.3. The No Route item is used for manual, “freehand” pinpointing without a planned route. See section 12.4.

12.2.2.
• •

Map Handling and Controls

You can pan the map by dragging. The slider on the left is a zoom control. The current zoom level is indicated by the figure below the slider. You can also zoom in and out using the mouse scroll wheel. Click the “home” button to set the zoom to native map size (zoom level = 1.0) and place the map image in the top left corner of the Pinpoint Window.

122

Chapter 12. The Pinpoint Window

12.2.3.

Creating a New Route

Click the Add Route button.

A new route appears in the route list, provisionally named “Unnamed Route <n>”. At the outset, of course, it contains no waypoints. Click this button next to the route to start creating it. The contents of the pop-out pane are replaced.

In the Route Name field, enter a name for the new route.

The route is created as a chain of waypoints. The Add Waypoints button is toggled “ON” in this situation to indicate that you are currently in “edit route” mode. • • Pan and zoom the map if necessary to locate the spot where you want to place your first pinpoint. To add a waypoint, just click in the desired location. The waypoint is marked by a pin symbol and labeled with a sequence number, starting at “1”.

NT12-7002 ver 1.0

123

TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual

Keep adding waypoints to trace your planned route. Each time you place a new waypoint, it is joined to the previous one by a connecting straight line.

It is appropriate to place waypoints no further than 10–20 s apart in terms of walking time. Also add a waypoint wherever the walking direction changes. Most importantly, of course, the waypoints should be located in such a way that the entire route (as defined by the connecting line segments) is “walkable”. In other words, the planned route should not pass through walls or other impassable obstacles, since measurements will then subsequently be positioned incorrectly along those segments. • • When you are done creating your planned route, click the Done button. Click Save to save the new route as well as any other changes you have made to the map set. The target format is always *.ibwc (iBwave collection).

How to modify your route in the course of creating it is the topic of the next section.

12.2.4.

Editing a Route

If the route you want to edit is not already loaded in the window, click the “pencil” button next to it in the pop-out pane. The route is then loaded. • To move a waypoint to a new location, just click and drag the pin where you want it. When a pin is selected, it is highlighted by a shaded bounding box, and its head turns blue.

124

Chapter 12. The Pinpoint Window

(If Add Waypoints is “ON”, you must take care not to release the mouse button without dragging, since such an action will add a new waypoint instead. It is most convenient to turn Add Waypoints “OFF” before rearranging waypoints.) • To add waypoints at the end of the route, toggle the Add Waypoints button “ON”. Then click on the map where you wish to place the new waypoints. The first new waypoint is automatically connected to the last waypoint of the existing route. When you have finished, click the Done button to exit “edit route” mode.

To insert a new waypoint somewhere along the existing route, you can choose between two methods: – One method is to right-click the waypoint nearest to the spot of interest, then select Insert Before or Insert After from the context menu that appears. The other method is to select the relevant waypoint and then click one of the buttons Insert Before or Insert After in the pop-out pane.

A new waypoint is now added halfway between the selected one and the one preceding or following it. Adjust the position of the new waypoint by dragging it.

To delete a waypoint, you can again proceed in two ways: – – Right-click the waypoint and choose Delete from the context menu, or: Make sure Add Waypoints is toggled “OFF”, then select the waypoint of interest and click the Delete Selected button.

NT12-7002 ver 1.0

125

TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual

The delete operation removes the pin symbol from the map view, and the waypoints adjacent to the one deleted are joined by a new connecting line.

• •

To delete all waypoints, click the Delete All button. You can edit the route name in the Route Name field.

Please note that it is currently not possible to edit a route while walking it, that is, during recording (see section 12.3.1).

12.2.5.

Deleting a Route

To delete a route from the map set, click the “trash can” button next to the route in the pop-out pane.

12.2.6.

Unloading a Map Set

There is no explicit function for unloading a map set. When you load a new map set, the previous one is unloaded automatically.

12.3.

Walking Planned Routes

This section tells how to walk a pre-planned route. A recorded walk along a planned route is referred to as a track in TEMS Investigation parlance. It should be pointed out straight away that a track can be less complex, or more complex, than the route it follows. This is because you can skip waypoints or, conversely, visit some waypoints more than once. The logfile of the track records all of your movements as reflected by your commit actions.

12.3.1.

Loading and Walking a Route

Load the desired map set by clicking the Open button.

126

Chapter 12. The Pinpoint Window

Next, select the planned route of interest among those defined in the map set.

The planned route is drawn in red between waypoints whose pins are likewise colored red. The map is centered around the first waypoint, which is enclosed within a shaded bounding box.

• •

Go to the physical location marked by the first waypoint. Click the Start button to start recording your track. You are asked where to save the resulting logfile. This file is created in the regular TEMS Investigation logfile format (*.trp), which also accommodates the auxiliary pinpoint data.

The following controls appear in the pop-out pane: Control Function Forward button: Advance to the next waypoint without committing to the current one.

Back button: Retreat to the previous waypoint without committing to the current one.

NT12-7002 ver 1.0

127

TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual

Control

Function Commit button: Commit to the current waypoint (whose sequence number labels the button) and move on to the next waypoint. When you perform the commit action, all measurements collected since your last commit are positioned in a straight line between this waypoint and the one you last committed to. The first time you commit, all measurements collected so far are positioned at that waypoint. You should therefore always commit to the first waypoint immediately on starting logfile recording. If you skip one or several waypoints, they are left out of account when data is positioned; see also section 12.3.3. Clicking the Commit button triggers the Pinpoint Added event. Stop button: Stop the test walk and close the track. If you click Start again with the same route still loaded, you will begin a new track which is saved as a distinct logfile (unless you choose to overwrite the previous one).

As soon as you have started recording, click the Commit button to indicate that you are currently in the highlighted location (“#1”). The pinhead turns green and the pin is redrawn “pressed down” (shorter) to indicate that you have visited this spot. The highlighting switches to the next waypoint, and the map is re-centered around it.

Walk in a straight line and at a steady pace towards the waypoint now highlighted. When you have reached that waypoint, click the Commit button again (now labeled “#2”). • Continue in this fashion until you have completed the route. Below the Commit button in the pop-out pane is a stack of boxed items representing

128

Chapter 12. The Pinpoint Window

your latest commits. For each commit action is shown at what waypoint it occurred, and when (“hh:mm:ss”).

12.3.2.

Repeating Parts of a Route

It is possible to backtrack along the route using the Back button, and commit to the same waypoint multiple times. Doing so simply adds more data to the logfile, and the positioning of measurements is always based on your movements between waypoints (regardless of how you retrace your steps). No previously recorded data is ever deleted from the logfile, and committing once again to a waypoint does not in any way override the previous commit action. If for some reason you need to take a break during a test walk, it is best to proceed as follows: • • Walk up to the next waypoint of the route and commit to it before taking your break. When resuming your test walk, click Back and commit to the same waypoint once more before you continue.

This procedure ensures that the measurements collected during the pause and along the next route segment to follow will be positioned accurately. To avoid these complications, it is advisable not to take extended pauses while walking and recording a track.

NT12-7002 ver 1.0

129

click the “No Route” item.trp). This is useful if you cannot get to a waypoint. A “shortcut” might thus be created that goes through walls or other obstacles – compare the advice given in section 12. Here is how to do manual pinpointing: • • Load the map set you want to use by clicking the Open button.3 on the preparation of planned routes.1 User’s Manual 12. This “freehand” pinpointing is similar to the procedure used in a Map window (described in section 11. without following a planned route. using the Back and Forward buttons.2. 12.4. This initiates recording of a logfile.3. except that it always involves logfile recording. which also accommodates the auxiliary pinpoint data. The following controls appear in the pop-out pane: 130 . the measurements will be positioned along a straight line between the adjacent retained waypoints.TEMS Investigation 14.1. • Click the Start button. and you are prompted for a location in which to save it. The logfile is created in the regular TEMS Investigation logfile format (*. Please bear in mind. for instance because it is behind a locked door. however. Pinpointing Without a Planned Route In the Pinpoint Window you can alternatively place waypoints manually to indicate your trajectory as you go.3).3. that this effectively removes the waypoint from the track when it comes to the positioning of the recorded data. Instead of selecting a route. Skipping Waypoints of a Route You can skip waypoints without committing to them.

All measurements collected so far are positioned at that waypoint. Also keep a steady pace between waypoints. Stop button: Stop pinpointing and close the logfile. The button is then always labeled with the sequence number of the next waypoint to be added.Chapter 12. all measurements collected since your previous commit are positioned in a straight line between the two waypoints. You can toggle between the two modes at any time. If you prefer Crosshair mode instead. Crosshair: In this mode. As soon as you have started recording. A pin with a green head is drawn in the map view to mark the spot. and the map is recentered around it. a large redheaded pin with a crosshair appears at a fixed position in the map view. Continue along your intended trajectory. they do not affect the positioning itself or how it is represented in the logfile. you simply click a spot on the map to place a waypoint in that spot. Commit button: Place a waypoint at the current position. The waypoint is automatically committed. This button is used only in Crosshair mode.) • Each time you place a new waypoint it is highlighted. then click the Commit button to place a waypoint there. as explained above. Mouse: In this mode. These modes are just two different methods of placing waypoints. The Pinpoint Window Control Function The Mouse and Crosshair buttons are used to select pinpointing mode.0 131 . (When you perform a commit. • • The default pinpointing mode is Mouse. click the Crosshair button. pinpointing at regular intervals and whenever you change direction. Pan the map so that the pin marks your current position. You may of course need to pan the map first to bring the relevant part of it into view. NT12-7002 ver 1. pinpoint once to indicate your starting position.

5. click Stop. Note also that you can have your walked track plotted in a Map window. 12. the new route will appear in the popout pane listing as “Unnamed Route <n>”.5. Below the Commit button in the pop-out pane is a stack of boxed items representing your latest waypoints. its sequence number and time of creation (“hh:mm:ss”) are displayed. in live mode as well as during analysis. You are also asked whether you want to save the waypoints you have placed as a route in the map set. However.TEMS Investigation 14. If you do. you can of course have any presentation windows open side by side with the Pinpoint Window and inspect measurement data there.5. Currently there is no presentation of information elements or other measurement data in the Pinpoint Window. This closes the logfile. the following applies: 132 . For each waypoint.1. a Pinpoint Added event is triggered. Naturally you can change that name if desired.2. Coexistence Issues While you are recording a logfile in the Pinpoint Window (whether pinpointing manually or walking along a pre-planned route).1 User’s Manual Each time you place a new waypoint. 12. Relation to Other TEMS Investigation Functions Data Presentation 12. • When you are done with your test.

• • • Conversely. but the positioning source is not unique to each recording. starting to record in the Pinpoint Window automatically redefines the preferred positioning source as pinpointing.0 133 . However. Having a GPS activated in TEMS Investigation does not affect the Pinpoint Window in any way. it is possible to start another recording in the Pinpoint Window. all methods of logfile recording can be used independently without restrictions. and not by any other source. The ongoing recording will not be affected. The Pinpoint Window • You can start recording of other logfiles by other means (using the manual controls or running a script). but note again that the positioning will be governed by your actions in the Pinpoint Window. while logfile recording initiated by other means is in progress.Chapter 12. these recordings will automatically be positioned according to the Pinpoint Window waypoints. However. Scripts can run independently of what is done in the Pinpoint Window. In summary. it will keep the positioning source that was preferred in TEMS Investigation when the recording began. so that any subsequent recordings initiated while the pinpointing is still active will be positioned according to the pinpointing data. A Start Recording activity in a script will start a new logfile. Clicking Stop Recording on the main window toolbar has no effect on the Pinpoint Window. NT12-7002 ver 1.

Scanning: General Scanning can be done either • • manually from the Navigator’s Equipment tab.5).1. Scripted Scanning Scripted scanning works just like scripting of other activities and does not require special comment. and they are gone through in chapters 14–19. The configuration dialogs are the same in both cases. that scripted scanning is currently available for a subset of supported scanning devices: R&S TSMW Manual Scripted 13. please refer to chapter 20 (the scan activities are listed in section 20.TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual 13.16. or as an activity in a Service Control script.Scan . Note. 134 Transcom Anritsu PCTel SRU DRT Scanning Type/ Scanning Device Sony Ericsson Andrew i. however.

select the device to scan with. Performing a Scan Manually With suitable configuration sets already defined. Once the device has been activated. Right-click the scanning method item again. the Activities subtab is populated. 13.2.2. to be able to access the scanning configuration dialogs.0 135 . you can initiate a scan manually as follows: • • • • On the Navigator’s Equipment tab. and from the context menu select the desired configuration set among those in existence. Expand this node to view a list of the scanning methods that this device supports. Scanning: General 13. All details are covered in subsequent chapters (14–19). the available activities will include ones collected under a Scan node. This opens a dialog where you define a setup for the selected scanning method. For a scanning-capable device. and select Configuration Sets from the context menu. On the Activities subtab.1. expand the Scan node. and from the context menu select Start. Manual Scanning Setting Up a Scan Manually Scanning tasks can be set up manually on the Navigator’s Equipment tab.Chapter 13. from the Activities subtab in the bottom pane.2. you need to activate the device you want to scan with (if it is not already activated). The dialog contents depend on the technology and scanning method chosen as well as on the make and model of the scanning device. See chapter 8.2. Right-click the scanning method you want to use. 13. • First. NT12-7002 ver 1. specifically. • • Right-click the scanning method you want to use.

4. and select Stop.2. create a new logfile as described in section 11. 13. scan data can be displayed in status windows of your own design.3. • 136 . go to the Activities subtab again. see the Getting Started Manual.1. since all scan data is available in information elements. It is possible to scan with several devices simultaneously. It cannot engage in voice/video calls or data services during this time.4.3. Frequency band support is determined by the scanning device and by the antennas.TEMS Investigation 14. included on the installation CD in the subdirectory Documents. • To stop scanning. 13. 13.1 User’s Manual While the scan is ongoing. For example. Under the Scan node. The scanning presentation windows are fully synchronized with the rest of the application. section 10. it will be indicated in the top pane of the Equipment tab for the device that is busy scanning. • • Technical Data on Scanning Devices A Sony Ericsson phone cannot act as a regular phone while it is scanning.1. The information elements of interest are all found in the Information Elements and Events volume. For band support in connectable scanning devices. Presenting Scan Data The output of scans is primarily intended to be displayed in a suite of readymade bar charts and other windows. How to build a status window is covered in chapter 24. Recording Scan Data Manually To record data from a manually initiated scan. right-click the scanning method being executed. and the output from all of these can be displayed in parallel. However. Detailed data on the scanning capabilities and performance of Sony Ericsson phones is provided in the technical paper “Scanning with Sony Ericsson TEMS Devices”. you are free to present it in any presentation window.

you are continuously notified in the setup dialog of how many measurement points that remain. scanning methods are conceptually independent. DRT Scanners For a DRT scanner. section 10.1.2. then the actual resource use will be raised automatically if the scan tasks require it. Scanning: General • Some technical data on PCTel scanners and antennas used with them is provided in the Getting Started Manual.3. Only the scanner measurement capacity places a limit on the possibilities of handling several scanning tasks in parallel. but the data volume would then become unmanageably large. 13. a WCDMA SCH timeslot scan at maximum resolution may require the full resources of the PCTel scanner. so that it cannot perform any other tasks at the same time. 13.Chapter 13. The resource percentage selected is the minimum that the scan task is guaranteed to get when executed. TEMS Investigation sets a limit on the amount of scan data it will accept. and the setup dialog keeps track of the number of measurement points that remain to be allocated. 13.) NT12-7002 ver 1.0 137 .5.5.) Again the limit is expressed in terms of measurement points. Rohde & Schwarz TSMW The TSMW scanner uses a form of automatic load balancing to make the best possible use of the scanner’s measurement capacity.7. For example.5. please consult documentation from the respective suppliers. (There is no inverse mechanism treating the selected resource percentages as “opening bids” that can be pared down at execution time. For further information on third-party scanning devices. Notes on Scanner Multitasking PCTel Scanners Within a cellular technology.5. A PCTel scanner’s measurement capacity is indicated as a number of measurement points.2. and they can be run concurrently by PCTel scanners. If the scan tasks that are running have a combined resource allocation of less than 100% in their setups.5. As you set up the scanning tasks. (The DRT scanner can produce more data than this. It is therefore not possible when setting up scan tasks to allocate more than 100% of resources in total. 13.

13. Notes on GPS Units in Scanners The internal GPS in a scanner equipped with such a device will deliver data only if it is selected as Preferred GPS and activated in TEMS Investigation. 13.5.1 User’s Manual R&S recommends that each scan task should be allocated at least 20% of resources in the setup dialog.4. Sony Ericsson Phones and SRUs Sony Ericsson phones and SRUs do not handle concurrent execution of multiple scanning methods. 138 .6.TEMS Investigation 14. See section 8.5.

GSM Scanning 14.1.4. 2.0 139 . the device must have been purchased with the relevant option (wherever applicable). Built on Ericsson hardware. chapter 14. see the Getting Started Manual. Please note that for a scanning method to be actually available in TEMS Investigation.1. section 10. NT12-7002 ver 1.1. supported using the various devices as indicated. How to configure the R&S scanner (and the PC along with it) for use with TEMS Investigation is covered in the Getting Started Manual. see Information Elements and Events. Scanning Methods and Capabilities TEMS Investigation offers these GSM scanning methods. section 4. although this is a slight abuse of the term.Chapter 14. For specifics. 1.1. GSM Scanning TEMS Investigation supports scanning of GSM radio frequency carriers with the following kinds of device: • • • • Sony Ericsson phones1 SRUs (Scanning Receiver Units)2 PCTel scanners Rohde & Schwarz TSMW scanner. 14. For more information about connectable scanners with GSM scanning capability. A note on terminology: GSM radio frequency carriers are sometimes referred to below as channels for simplicity.

140 Section Ref.3 14.2.3 14. 14. Select all channels to scan the entire band.1 User’s Manual Sony Ericsson PCTel SeeGull GSM Scanning Capability/ Scanning Device RSSI scanning.2.1.2.2.2. RSSI Scanning Setup of RSSI Scan: General Settings Set this to “GSM” for GSM scanning. SRU Setting this to Yes causes the phone to decode the Base Station Identity Code whenever possible. There is no limit to the selectable number of channels. GSM frequency band or bands to scan. Technology Band Channels 14. BSIC Setup of RSSI Scan: Sony Ericsson.2 14.2. static ARFCN set RSSI scanning: BSIC decoding RSSI scanning: C/I measurement RSSI scanning: Sys Info decoding Spectrum analysis R&S TSMW 14.TEMS Investigation 14. It should be noted that BSIC decoding is computationally costly and considerably reduces the sample rate of the scan.3 14.2 14. ARFCNs to scan on the selected band. SRU .

Chapter 14. GSM Scanning 14. the function can be turned on and off in the dialog.1. This setting applies to all channels you select for scanning. Bandwidth Remaining Measurement Points BSIC See section 13. Check the Device Inquiry mode report from the scanner to find out whether it is capable of decoding BSIC.0 141 . It is not possible to specify the type of scan for each channel separately. C/I Measurements Setting this to Yes causes a subset of the “C/I” information elements to be updated. as described in Information Elements and Events. PCTel scanners can be purchased with or without the C/I scanning function enabled. It should be noted that BSIC decoding is computationally costly and considerably reduces the sample rate of the scan. the measurements are extracted to the same information elements (Scanned RxLev.5.3. section 3. Setting this to Yes causes the phone to decode the Base Station Identity Code whenever possible. Regardless of the choice made here. etc. If available. NT12-7002 ver 1. in the “GSM” category). check the Device Inquiry mode report from the scanner to find out whether it has this capability (“GSM BCCH C/I”).2.1. Setup of RSSI Scan: PCTel SeeGull Select whether to perform a regular GSM signal scan (“Normal”) or a Continuous Wave scan (“CW”). PCTel scanners supplied with older versions of TEMS Investigation may lack BSIC decoding capability.

Whenever System Information is read. The scanner must suspend the regular scan in order to read System Information. Resources allocated on the specified front-end.5. 14. C/I (DL): Enables carrier-to-interference measurement. BSIC.3. and GSM frame number. • • Channels: Channels to scan. the information element Neighbor (SI) ARFCN is updated. and this is therefore done only once each time the strongest cell changes. SCH Power (DL): Enables SCH-related measurements such as SCH power. Dummy Burst Removal (DL): Enables detection of dummy bursts and removal of dummy bursts from the GSM signal before further analysis. Dummy Burst Power (DL): Enables power measurement for dummy bursts. The measurement tasks are manually distributed on the built-in front-ends. This is only valid for SCH-related measurements.1 User’s Manual SI on Strongest Setting this to Yes causes the scanner to decode System Information messages for the strongest cell. See also section 13.2. Setup of RSSI Scan: Rohde & Schwarz TSMW Average measurement rate (in millihertz) shared between all selected channels. Measurement Rate (mHz) Measurement Details • • • RF Front-end Front-end on which to schedule measurements. This can produce many more power results for C0 carriers than the SCH measurement.TEMS Investigation 14. Resource Allocation (%) 142 . ETS power.4.

GSM Scanning 14.5.3.Chapter 14.1. NT12-7002 ver 1. The bottom chart by default shows all scanned channels in order of ascending ARFCN. 14. Spectrum Analysis The setup for spectrum analysis is the same as for WCDMA (except that Technology = GSM). See section 15. see chapter 30.5.0 143 . Regarding the bar chart window itself. Presentation of RSSI Scanning The main vehicle for presenting GSM RSSI scan data is the GSM RSSI Scan Bar Chart: The top chart by default shows the strongest scanned channels sorted by decreasing signal strength.2.

TEMS Investigation 14. see the Getting Started Manual. the device must have been purchased with the relevant option (wherever applicable).1. How to configure the R&S scanner (and the PC along with it) for use with TEMS Investigation is covered in the Getting Started Manual. Scanning Methods and Capabilities TEMS Investigation offers these WCDMA scanning methods. For more information about connectable devices with WCDMA scanning capability.4.1 User’s Manual 15. supported using the various devices as indicated.1.1. WCDMA Scanning TEMS Investigation supports scanning of WCDMA carriers with the following kinds of device: • • • • • Certain Sony Ericsson phones operating in scan mode SRU (Scanning Receiver Unit) PCTel scanner Rohde & Schwarz TSMW scanner Anritsu scanner. Please note that for a scanning method to be actually available in TEMS Investigation. section 10. 144 . 15. chapter 14.

static SC set Pilot scanning.2 15.2 8 4 12 12 12 12 15. Anritsu ML8720: 1 or 2 depending on physical configuration. 12 1 15.3 15.2 15. WCDMA Scanning Sony Ericsson.0 145 Section Ref.Chapter 15. R&S TSMW PCTel PCT WCDMA Scanning Capability/ Scanning Device PCTel SeeGull MX PCTel SeeGull EX PCTel SeeGull LX Anritsu ML8780A Anritsu ML8720 .2.2 15.6 NT12-7002 ver 1. Top N Pilot: SIB decoding (continuous) Pilot: SIB decoding (snapshot) Pilot: High Speed/High Dynamic Pilot: P-SCH + S-SCH Pilot: Max. SRU Pilot scanning.2.3 15.4 15.2 15. no. of UARFCNs SCH timeslot scanning RSSI scanning Spectrum analysis Network scanning 1.2 15.5 15.

2.1 User’s Manual 15. the same method also scans primary and secondary synchronization channels (P-SCH. UARFCNs and scrambling codes are selected independently of one another. The choice is made under Type of Scanning in the setup dialog. SRU Setup options are as follows: Scan selected: A user-defined. BCH scanning: User-defined. Optional snapshot SIB decoding. Several UARFCNs can be scanned at a time.1.2. Technology Band Channels 15. static set of scrambling codes (common to all UARFCNs) is scanned. Optional snapshot SIB decoding. WCDMA frequency band to scan. Where supported.TEMS Investigation 14. • • • Setup of Pilot Scan: Sony Ericsson. scrambled with cell-specific scrambling codes. 15. S-SCH). Scan strongest: Strongest scrambling codes scanned (“Top N”).2. static set of scrambling codes (common to all UARFCNs) scanned. Here you set the UARFCNs of the frequencies on which to scan the CPICH. Pilot Scanning (with SCH Scanning) This method scans CPICH control channels. 146 . Setup of Pilot Scan: General Always “WCDMA” for WCDMA scanning. The allowed range is dependent on the frequency band. Unconditional and continuous SIB decoding.2.

This field is enabled if you have chosen “Scan selected” or “BCH scanning” under Type of Scanning. The scanner automatically finds the strongest scrambling codes. This decoding is furthermore continuous. However. To scan the N strongest scrambling codes.Chapter 15. and the sensitivity of the scrambling code detection may be lower as well. The default is –26 dB. unlike that governed by the System Information option (which see). the updating frequency will be considerably lower. The processing time freed up in this way is instead used to continuously decode System Information Blocks (SIBs). BCH scanning: If you choose this option. The threshold should be adjusted to ensure detection of cells actually present while keeping the false detection rate down. you select scrambling codes in the same way as for Scan selected. • Scan strongest: Choose this to have the N strongest scrambling codes reported from the chosen UARFCNs. Scan Strongest This field is enabled if you have chosen “Scan strongest” under Type of Scanning.0 147 . • Scan selected: Choose this to scan a static set of scrambling codes on all frequencies defined under Channels. WCDMA Scanning Type of Scanning See also the introduction of this section. • Cell Noise Floor Ec/Io threshold for accepting a signal on the CPICH as a detected cell. Enter the scrambling codes you want to scan. enter the value N here (N  40). and the same scan data will be collected. Scrambling Codes NT12-7002 ver 1.

this option is always set to Yes. 15.3.TEMS Investigation 14. Only settings supported by the connected scanner are displayed in the dialog. Type of Scanning See also the introduction of this section. It then refers not to snapshot SIB decoding but to the continuous SIB decoding performed by that method. static set of scrambling codes. Scan strongest: Choose this to have the N strongest scrambling codes reported from the chosen UARFCNs. • Scan selected: Choose this to scan a static set of scrambling codes on all frequencies defined under Channels.1 User’s Manual System Information If this option is set to Yes for Scan selected or Scan strongest.1. a “snapshot” SIB decoding will be done once every time a new cell has become the strongest (unless that cell has previously appeared as the strongest during the last two minutes). The scanner automatically finds the strongest scrambling codes. To scan the N strongest scrambling codes. • Number of Pilots This field appears if Type of Scanning is set to “Scan strongest”.2. If the strongest cell does not change within two minutes. 148 . common to all UARFCNs strongest scrambling codes (“Top N”) What settings are supported by the various PCTel SeeGull models appears from the table in section 15. The same scrambling codes will be scanned on the CPICH and on the P-SCH and S-SCH. the phone reverts to regular pilot scanning. Up to 128 scrambling codes can be selected. Setup of Pilot Scan: PCTel The set of scrambling codes to scan on each UARFCN is composed in one of two ways: • • user-defined. SIBs will be decoded again for that cell. On completing the SIB decoding. enter the value N here (N  32). For BCH scanning.

Chapter 15. S-SCH Ec/Io.) For “Scan strongest”. This is a signal code power threshold (in dB) used for the Aggregate Ec/Io and Delay Spread measurements (see section 15. as is SIR. and you will thus be able to discern multipath and fading effects more accurately.5. Enter the scrambling codes you want to scan. only P-SCH Ec/Io and S-SCH Ec/Io are excluded. It should be noted that choosing “Sub” results in a much faster updating of scan presentations. If the PN threshold is set too low. SIR”. The setting –20 dB is recommended. (The “SIR” field is disabled in this case.2.7). WCDMA Scanning Selected Numbers PN Threshold This field appears if Type of Scanning is set to “Scan selected”.2. P-SCH Ec/Io.10). It is possible to reduce the amount of data that is presented and recorded: • • Full means no reduction. The precise meaning of “Sub” depends on the scope of the scan: • For “Scan selected”.. Sub means that some data is not presented or recorded (compare sections 15.0 149 . • SIR Setting this to Yes causes the scanner to deliver the information elements “Sc . By raising the threshold you reduce the influence of random noise correlations. and Rake Finger Count are excluded.. the Aggregate Ec/Io and Delay Spread values will be affected by random noise more than may be desired. NT12-7002 ver 1.1. Time Offset.2.8 and 15. Remaining Measurement Points Data Mode See section 13.

TEMS Investigation 14. Resources allocated on the specified front-end. Setup of Pilot Scan: Rohde & Schwarz TSMW High Speed or High Dynamic. The default is 50 = 2000 ms. • Dwelling Time The length of time the scanner dwells on each scrambling code (cell) trying to decode System Information blocks. a maximum of 16 scrambling codes can be scanned. Each reported sample is typically based on a 10 ms measurement. 15.4.5. See also section 13. These are two algorithms with different priorities. Average measurement rate (in millihertz) shared between all selected channels. From the SIB decoding are extracted the information elements “Sc 1st (2nd. Measurement Mode There are two choices. whereas High Speed is faster and accordingly less accurate.3. High Speed and High Dynamic.1 User’s Manual System Information Set this to Yes to decode System Information blocks (continuously). The measurement tasks are manually distributed on the two built-in front-ends. 4th) Intra-freq Cells”. High Speed is faster and accordingly less accurate. Front-end (processor) on which to schedule measurement. These are two algorithms with different priorities: • High Dynamic puts the emphasis on accuracy.2. High Dynamic puts the emphasis on accuracy. before moving on to the next cell. With this option selected. Each sample reported by the scanner is typically based on a measurement 20 ms in length. Given as a multiple of 40 ms. Measurement Mode Measurement Rate (mHz) RF Front-end Resource Allocation (%) 150 . 3rd.

The same scrambling codes will be scanned on the CPICH and on the P-SCH and S-SCH. To scan the N strongest scrambling codes. The maximum number of pilots that can be scanned is equal to floor(40/Nch). up to 13 SCs can be scanned on each. static set of scrambling codes.0 151 .Chapter 15. This threshold (value in dB) determines how high above the noise floor a scrambling code must reach in order to be accepted as valid by the scanner. or strongest scrambling codes (“Top N”) Type of Scanning See also the introduction of this section. Setup of Pilot Scan: Anritsu The set of scrambling codes to scan on a UARFCN is composed in one of two ways: • • user-defined. enter the value N here. The default is 4 dB. For example. • Number of Pilots This field appears if Type of scanning is set to “Scan strongest”. if 3 UARFCNs are selected. (ML8720 only) Scan strongest: Choose this to have the N strongest scrambling codes reported from the chosen UARFCNs (“Top N”).2. Up to 32 scrambling codes can be selected.5. where Nch is the number of UARFCNs entered under Channels. Selective Level NT12-7002 ver 1. WCDMA Scanning Resource Available (%) Read-only field indicating the remaining available resources on the processor selected under RF Frontend. • Scan selected: Choose this to scan a static set of scrambling codes on all frequencies defined under “UARFCN” below. common to all UARFCNs. The scanner automatically finds the strongest scrambling codes. 15.

Search Method (ML8720) BCH Scan (ML8780A) If selected. If you are scanning two UARFCNs it is the only option.7) the CPICH Scan Data status window (section 15. The P-CPICH mode cannot be used if two UARFCNs are to be scanned. the scanner will measure and report on the P-SCH and S-SCH as well.9) 152 .2. The default is 20 dB. the P-CPICH radio button is grayed.TEMS Investigation 14. 15. • If SCH is selected.2. If you select two UARFCNs. however. how strong a signal path must be (in relation to the strongest signal path for that scrambling code) in order to be accepted as valid. only CPICH channels will be scanned to find scrambling codes.1 User’s Manual Rake Threshold This threshold (value in dB) determines. • • • Presentation: General Pilot scan data is presented in the CPICH Scan bar charts (section 15. for a given scrambling code. This setting governs the choice of cell search method in Top N scan mode (“Scan strongest” option).2.8) the CPICH Scan line charts (section 15. the scanner will search for scrambling codes that use P-SCH and S-SCH.6.) This mode is useful especially for troubleshooting of transmitters. (For all scrambling codes detected in this way. Setting the threshold at n dB means that a signal path must not be more than n dB weaker than the strongest one. This can only be done on one UARFCN at a time (only one is selectable under Channels when the BCH Scan option is set). as explained above. In other words. • If P-CPICH is selected. This is more suitable for drive testing and is the default setting in TEMS Investigation.2. the scanner will perform continuous SIB decoding. this threshold governs how many Rake fingers will contribute to the signal.

One predefined bar chart is provided for each UMTS frequency scanned.7. For a manually selected set of scrambling codes.8) for each scrambling code found.0 153 . Regarding data sorting.2. whereas for the “Top N” scan the number N is only marginally important (since all scrambling codes have to be searched regardless of N). The columns have the following meanings: NT12-7002 ver 1. WCDMA Scanning Synchronization channels are presented in the Synch Channels window (section 15. 15. Presentation: “CPICH Data” Status Windows The CPICH Data and CPICH Best UARFCN Data status windows both contain a large number of columns with scan data. 15.2. whereas CPICH Best UARFCN Data is sorted by Aggr Ec/Io regardless of UARFCN. Each bar chart by default presents peak Ec/Io (see section 15. Presentation: “CPICH Scan” Bar Charts The CPICH Scan bar charts present CPICH scan data.2.13.Chapter 15.10).1. They differ only with respect to sorting: CPICH Data is sorted first by UARFCN. see section 15. The updating rate is chiefly dependent on the number of live signals encountered in the network. the updating rate is also greatly affected by the size of this set.2.2.8.

e.e. The aggregate code power of the scrambling code in dBm.1 User’s Manual SC Peak Ec/Io Scrambling code number. Rake receiver gain.e. i. i.9.3). the number of Ec/Io peaks (multipath components) that are above the PN threshold. Ranges from 0 to 38399. The aggregate code power is a measure of the total signal power (distributed around the main peak due to multipath propagation) that is above the PN threshold (settable in the PCTel scanner: see section 15. This is a measure of the signal spreading due to multipath propagation. The aggregate code power of the scrambling code relative to the total signal power in the channel (Io). Signal-to-interference ratio of the scrambling code in dB.TEMS Investigation 14.2. Rake finger count. Difference in dB between the aggregate code power (Ag Ec) and peak code power (Peak Ec).2. i. the difference between them in dB. Peak Ec Ag Ec/Io Ag Ec Aggr–Peak Ec Delay Spread RFC Time Offset SIR All of these are identical with information elements having similar names but beginning with “Sc”. i. The peak code power of the scrambling code in dBm. 15. the difference between them in dB. Measured on DPCCH. section 3. The time offset of the radio frame on the CPICH.e. See Information Elements and Events. given in chips from a 1/100th second time mark aligned with GPS time. Time in chips from the first to the last Ec/Io peak that is above the PN threshold. The peak code power of the scrambling code (Ec) relative to the total signal power in the channel (Io). Presentation: “CPICH Scan” Line Charts The default configuration of this window is as follows: 154 .2.

1 • Poss No Of AS Members: The active set (AS) is defined as the set of scrambling codes (SCs) associated with channels that are assigned to a particular subscriber unit.0 155 . NT12-7002 ver 1. Here an SC is regarded as a possible active set member if it is sufficiently 1. Please note that the IEs described here are no longer present by default in this window. WCDMA Scanning Chart Panes The charts present the five strongest scrambling codes. Legend Pane The Legend pane (bottom left) glosses either of the two charts. Additional Information Pane The Additional Information pane (bottom right) shows the CPICH pilot pollution situation.Chapter 15. The top chart shows Aggr Ec (in dBm) and the bottom chart shows Aggr Ec/Io (in dB). you need to add them manually. right-click and choose the desired chart from the context menu. To switch to the other chart.

1 User’s Manual strong compared to the strongest SC. In the example below.. Note that one cannot know for sure (on the basis of the scan data alone) whether the possible members actually do belong to the active set.. there are three other SCs reaching above the threshold which is set relative to the strongest SC. max 2 SCs SC Other power. Ec values in mW). • Other/Own . based on the power threshold described above (again given as argument to each information element) and on different assumptions about the number of possible active set members. The four “Other/Own” elements represent the assumptions that there is desired signal power on 1. 3. so the active set is judged to have a total of four possible members. all SCs with a code power not more than 3 dB below that of the strongest SC will be counted. otherwise it is simply the sum of the code powers of all possible active set members. In the above figure.e. : These are estimated ratios between polluting signal power and desired signal power. For “Max N SCs”.TEMS Investigation 14. SC code power Strongest SC Distance to threshold. indicated by argument Threshold for possible AS members (which are included in “Own”) Own power. “Other” is the sum of the code powers of all remaining SCs. Example: If the argument is 3 (default value). for “Max 2 SCs”. “Own” is the sum of the code powers of the N strongest possible active set members. only the strongest of the three is included in “Own”. if the number of possible members is at least N. there are three such SCs. max 2 SCs The “Other/Own” ratios are of course calculated from absolute code power values (i. However. 156 . and 4 SCs respectively. The relative code power threshold is determined by the argument within square brackets []. 2.

0 157 . It is of course possible to set each argument to any of the permissible values. as described in section 24. “Changing Status Window Properties”. P-SCH (in dBm).2. The peak power of the S-SCH (Ec) relative to the total signal power in the channel (Io).3. Presentation: Synch Channel Data Window This window presents scan data on the synchronization channels P-SCH and S-SCH. the difference between them in dB. but with different arguments for different elements you cannot really draw any useful conclusions. the difference between them in dB.Chapter 15. obtained with the Pilot scanning method.e. The presented data can be freely rearranged. S-SCH Ec S-SCH Ec/Io By default the scrambling codes are sorted by signal power with the strongest on top. The peak power of the Secondary Synchronization Channel. i. i. The peak power of the P-SCH (Ec) relative to the total signal power in the channel (Io). SC P-SCH Ec P-SCH Ec/Io Scrambling code number.e. 15. NT12-7002 ver 1.10. WCDMA Scanning Note: The arguments should be kept the same for all five information elements. The peak power of the Primary Synchronization Channel. S-SCH (in dBm).

where the guiding principle of scheduling is to provide (as far as possible) all UEs with all the resources they need while also making sure that the total uplink interference does not exceed the accepted maximum. section 3. However.13.2.2. see Information Elements and Events. One form of refined TEMS Investigation output that can be based on SIBs is the Missing WCDMA Neighbor event which warns about missing neighbors in WCDMA. This is particularly interesting for HSUPA.7–15. See Information Elements and Events. • • • • Open the General window from the Navigator.1 User’s Manual 15.2.1. but they are also extracted as information elements. Double-click the item “WCDMA”. section 7.12.2.2. 15. Presentation: “Finger Info” Status Windows These windows present Rake finger information obtained during Pilot scanning.2. The sorting order is set in the General window. section 3. see sections 15. Another piece of data found in SIBs is an uplink interference measurement.TEMS Investigation 14.2. The uplink interference measurements can of course be inspected in the plain-text SIB decoding. Customizing the Presentation 15.2. Presentation: BCH Scanning All scan data collected using the options Scan selected and Scan strongest are obtained for BCH scanning also (though less frequently).2. Sorting of Scrambling Codes You can sort scrambling codes in scanning information elements in a number of different ways. see Information Elements and Events.11 above regarding the presentation of this data.13. No special presentation windows are provided for BCH scanning. decoded System Information Blocks are output in the Layer 3 Messages window at a greatly enhanced rate. 15.11. For definitions of the information elements. Sort by decreasing Aggr Ec/Io (default) Sort by increasing Aggr Ec/Io A dialog appears with these sorting options: 158 .

SCH Timeslot Scanning This method scans timeslot-length intervals.3. that is.0 159 . section 3. the code with the next higher index appears at argument index 2.3. and this sorting order is unchangeable. • 15.2). scrambling code n is always found at argument index n + 1. etc. WCDMA Scanning • Sort by fixed position: Scrambling codes are sorted by index and are always assigned the same argument indices. i.1. 15. Use these elements in order to view scan data from several UARFCNs in one window. 15.2. intervals 2560 chips long. all scrambling codes found on all UMTS frequencies are collected in a single array. WCDMA frequency band to scan.2.1.13. Presenting Scrambling Codes from Multiple UARFCNs In the “Sc Best” information elements. Setup of SCH Timeslot Scan General Settings Always “WCDMA” for WCDMA scanning. on a Primary Synchronization Channel (P-SCH).1. These elements are sorted by signal strength (Aggr Ec/Io) in descending order. 15.2) is fixed and is not affected by the General window settings. Technology Band Channels NT12-7002 ver 1. Sort by scrambling code: Scrambling codes are sorted by index. UARFCN to scan. the code with the lowest index appears at argument index 1. It is useful for monitoring synchronization reference signals sent on this channel.Chapter 15. It should be pointed out that this scan is wholly separate from the P-SCH and S-SCH scans included in the Pilot scanning method (section 15. Note: The sorting order of the “Sc Best” elements (see Information Elements and Events.3.e.

Every 2. Each SCH signal will show up as a spike on the trace.1.1.2. means that the peak (not average) power is reported for successive segments 2. The legend pane gives 160 .1 User’s Manual Center Frequency The center frequency of the UARFCN chosen. 4.2.3.TEMS Investigation 14. Context Settings The time resolution of the scan: • • Every means that a power value is reported for every chip in the timeslot. etc. the height of the spike reflecting the strength of the signal in terms of Es/Io. 15. Compression Rate Remaining Measurement Points See section 13.3. 15.5. Presentation: SCH Timeslot Scan Bar Chart The bar chart displays an Es/Io trace for the latest timeslot scanned (2560 chips). or 8 chips in length.

If the base station is not synchronized with GPS time. The SCH timeslot scan will then display multiple spikes within a timeslot.3. 15. In a WCDMA cell with multiple sectors. 4. the T_Cell parameter can be determined: the spike will be positioned approximately at T_Cell + 140 chips. From this the time separation between the sectors can be determined. the updating interval will be on the order of 1 s. Since the SCH signals are repeated every timeslot.4. However. Determining the time separation naturally does not require synchronization of the base station with GPS time. depending on the setup. see section 15. or 8 chips. 15. no conclusions can be drawn about the value of T_Cell.0 161 . Provided that the base station clock is synchronized with GPS time. one for each sector. and 512 chips). if the compression rate is set to “Every 4”. the offset being due to delay in the scanner. 15. The position of a spike shows at what point a new timeslot begins in the current transmission.g. In the lower right pane. WCDMA Scanning Es/Io for each chip. the parameters “Time diff 1-2” and “Time diff 2-3” are given: • • “Time diff 1-2” indicates the time separation in chips between the strongest peak and the second strongest. These parameters are identical with the information elements SCH TS Sc Time Diff 1-2 and SCH TS Sc Time Diff 2-3. or peak Es/Io for every 2. 256.1. section 3. Technology Band NT12-7002 ver 1.4.1.Chapter 15. “Time diff 2-3” indicates the time separation in chips between the second strongest peak and the third strongest. the spikes will normally remain in the same positions as the trace is updated.1. see Information Elements and Events.4.2. each sector will transmit/receive at a different time offset (e. The updating rate is dependent on the compression rate and on network conditions. 0. however. RSSI Scanning Setup of RSSI Scan General Settings Always “WCDMA” for WCDMA scanning. WCDMA frequency band to scan.1.

in the “WCDMA” category).TEMS Investigation 14.5.4.1 User’s Manual Channels UARFCNs to scan (up to 255). etc.2.4. the measurements are extracted to the same information elements (CW Sc RSSI.1. 162 . The allowed UARFCN range is dependent on the band. 15. This setting applies to all channels you select for scanning. Remaining Measurement Points See section 13. Bandwidth Context Settings Select whether to perform a regular WCDMA signal scan (“Normal”) or a Continuous Wave scan (“CW”). Regardless of the choice made here. 15. Presentation: RSSI Scan Bar Chart This bar chart displays RSSI for each UARFCN scanned.2.1.

Adapt the resolution to the width of the frequency range.1. WCDMA Scanning 15. Spectrum Analysis This scanning method shows downlink signal strength as a function of frequency. WCDMA frequency band to scan.1.1. Low end of the frequency range to be swept by the scan.2. the legend pane will list all samples. Setup of Spectrum Analysis Scan General Settings Choose “WCDMA” for WCDMA scanning. can of course only distinguish the samples as far as the screen resolution permits. Note that the spectrum analysis is prone to consume a large number of measurement points. the chart. 15.5. and the maximum is 16. the highest selectable resolution being 5 kHz.5.Chapter 15. Technology Band Start Frequency Stop Frequency Resolution Bandwidth 15.1. 15.1. See section 13. In the presentation window.0 163 . Remaining Measurement Points NT12-7002 ver 1.5. Number of Sweeps Context Settings The number of sweeps on which to base the presented average RSSI.5.5. High end of the frequency range to be swept by the scan. Interval between successive scan samples in kHz. The minimum number is 1. Given in MHz. Given in MHz. on the other hand.

a Sony Ericsson phone in scan mode is usually able to identify all carriers. It will detect WCDMA carriers (UARFCNs) that are in use on each of the WCDMA bands 2100 MHz. thus allowing faulty frequency allocations to be easily found and rectified.TEMS Investigation 14. In network scanning mode it is also possible to detect inappropriate allocation of UARFCNs resulting in carrier overlap.1 User’s Manual 15.2. one cell (scrambling code) is detected and presented. 1900 MHz. In contrast. Presentation: Spectrum Analysis Bar Charts Two charts are provided. automatically assumes that there are no further UARFCNs within ±3 MHz of the detected carrier and is therefore unable to spot overlapping carriers. On each carrier. A mobile phone in regular phone mode. Network Scanning This function is highly useful for obtaining a bird’s-eye view of an unfamiliar WCDMA radio environment.5. but the chart is retained to allow displaying of such data from old logfiles. 1. 164 . 850 MHz. once it has found a WCDMA carrier.6. 15.1 They both display RSSI as a function of frequency. overlapping or not. Uplink spectrum analysis is currently not supported by any currently connectable devices. one for the downlink (Spectrum Analysis Bar Chart) and one for the uplink (Spectrum Analysis Uplink Bar Chart).

Interval <n> enabled Band Set the flag to Yes if you want to define this UARFCN range. 3”) You can set up three separate UARFCN ranges (Interval 1.1.4 for details on the two kinds of channel.1. sections 5.6.3. Additional channels have UARFCNs that are completely different from the general channels. To 15. Setup of Network Scan General Settings Choose “WCDMA” for WCDMA scanning. 3) to scan in the network. If you want the UARFCN range to consist of a portion of a band.6. 2. From. If you want the UARFCN range to be identical to an entire WCDMA frequency band.1. Additional fields “From” and “To” appear.1. in which you specify the endpoints of the UARFCN range. (See  3GPP 25.0 165 .1. Custom range. NT12-7002 ver 1. 15.4.3–5. WCDMA Scanning 15.Chapter 15. 2. set Custom range to Yes.6.101.6. Technology 15.4. Include additional channels Context Settings Check this to include additional channels on the 1900 or 850 MHz band. UARFCN Ranges (“Interval 1.2. Each range can be located on any of the supported frequency bands. all additional channels that lie within the frequency range you have specified in the dialog (whole band or UARFCN range) will be included in the scan.) If this option is checked. select that band here.

1 User’s Manual Cell Ec/No threshold Ec/No threshold for cell detection within a detected carrier. Presentation: Network Search Window The result of the network scan is output in the Network Search window. the center frequency of each detected WCDMA carrier. The default setting is –26 dB. This threshold should be high enough to minimize the false detection rate.TEMS Investigation 14. several minutes at –100 dBm). One scrambling code (cell) is displayed for each UARFCN. Setting the threshold too low results in a very long search time (e. which should be suitable in most situations.g. 15.6.2. The default setting is –94 dBm. that is. 166 . yet not so high that cells actually present may go undetected. UARFCNs from all WCDMA frequency bands are listed in the same column. where all cells will be significantly disturbed. The risk of the latter is particularly pronounced in the case of overlapping carriers. reflecting a trade-off between the desire to detect all networks in operation and the wish to avoid spurious “hits”. It lists all UARFCNs found. RSSI threshold RSSI threshold for detecting carriers.

What needs doing is covered in the Getting Started Manual. Please note that for a scanning method to be actually available in TEMS Investigation. chapters 12–14. supported using the various devices as indicated. It is possible to run several of these scanning methods concurrently. Scanning Methods and Capabilities TEMS Investigation offers these LTE scanning methods. the device must have been purchased with the relevant option (wherever applicable). For more information about connectable devices with LTE scanning capability.Chapter 16. see the Getting Started Manual. 16. LTE Scanning TEMS Investigation supports scanning of LTE carriers with the following kinds of device: • • • • • Andrew scanner DRT scanner PCTel scanner Rohde & Schwarz TSMW scanner Transcom scanner.1. NT12-7002 ver 1.1. section 10.1. LTE Scanning 16.0 167 . Certain scanners require special configuration of the device itself as well as the PC to prepare them for use with TEMS Investigation.4.

P-SCH RSSI. SCHRQ) RS (RSRP.4 16. Setup of LTE Signal Scan: General Always “LTE”. S-SCH RSSI.2.2 16.2.2 16. Synchronization Channels are used for service detection and synchronization. LTE Scanning Capability/ Scanning Device Andrew i.1.5 16. RS CINR) CFO Time Offset 16.TEMS Investigation 14. LTE Signal Scanning The LTE air interface uses OFDM as modulation method on the downlink.Scan PCTel SeeGull MX PCTel SeeGull EX . The LTE signal scan provides the following metrics: • • • • • SCH (PCI. Technology Band 168 Section Ref. RSRQ) CINR (SCH CINR.3 16.1 User’s Manual R&S TSMW Signal scanning Enhanced signal scanning RSSI scanning Spectrum scanning Enhanced power scanning Transcom DRT 16. and Reference Signals (RS’s) are used for channel estimation purposes. PCIG. LTE band to scan.

For example. • • MMC: Log to MMC. None: Do not log to MMC. given in 0. (This logging has got nothing to do with TEMS Investigation.) The MMC must have been formatted and inserted into the scanner before the scanner is powered on. LTE Scanning Channels EARFCNs to scan within the selected LTE band. –6. Up to 12 EARFCNs can be selected. Epss/Io detection threshold (i. the scan data is always recorded in regular TEMS Investigation logfiles (*. Scan Rate Report Threshold 16. Max: 0 = 0 dB. Setup of LTE Signal Scan: Andrew Minimum time for scan in ms. If you are using a DRT scanner with the optional multimedia card (MMC). for Primary Synchronization Channel).2. Setup of LTE Signal Scan: DRT • Targeted Scan: Select this if you wish to scan a fixed set of cells. you can optionally record a logfile with scan data on the MMC as well. Set the number of cells the scanner should report under Top N. Scan Type • Logging Mode When using a DRT scanner purchased with TEMS Investigation. 16. NT12-7002 ver 1.5 dB is indicated as –65.3.1 dB increments.2.trp). Min: –240 = –24 dB.0 169 . Top N: Select this if you wish to scan the strongest cells. regardless of how this parameter is set.e.Chapter 16. Each EARFCN is specified as a number representing the center frequency of the channel.2. Specify the cells under Cell Index List.

TEMS Investigation 14. S-SCH RSSI. Not supported by currently connectable scanners. and the interference can be either noise or co-channel interference or both. Threshold (in negative dB) for detection of Secondary Synchronization Channel. Measurement of Synchronization Channels: P-SCH RSSI. Here you specify how many cells the scanner should report. Calculation of CINR. Measurement of BCH received power. Measurement of Center Frequency Offset. setting the field to N causes the scanner to return the N strongest cells (N  16). The carrier is the desired signal. Here you specify the indices of the cells to scan (up to 16 cells for each EARFCN. Max: 0 dB. Min: –30 dB. Max: 0 dB. up to 16 × 12 = 192 cells in total).e. This field is editable if you have set Scan Type to “Targeted”. CINR threshold for attempting to decode the MIB/ SIB. Min: –30 dB. Not supported by currently connectable scanners. i. Carrier to Interference-plusNoise Ratio for SCH and RS. Cell Index List Primary Detection Threshold (dB) Secondary Detection Threshold (dB) Decoding Threshold (dB) Enable SCH Enable BCH RP Enable RS Enable CINR Enable CFO 170 . Threshold (in negative dB) for detection of Primary Synchronization Channel. Measurement of Reference Signal (RSRP. and SCHRQ. Min: –30 dB. Max: 50 dB.1 User’s Manual Top N This field is editable if you have set Scan Type to “Top N”. RSRQ).

the scanner will itself detect the bandwidth in use. Normal: Normal prefix assumed. • • • Automatic: Cyclic prefix used by detected cells is automatically detected. since otherwise high-level signals may saturate the receiver and cause errors. LTE Scanning Bandwidth The bandwidth to scan.  3GPP 36.0 171 . Extended: Extended prefix assumed. 5. table 6. 10. simply select it. Robust mode: This mode uses lower detection thresholds and increased averaging to detect lower-level signals. • • Fast mode: This mode offers reasonable sensitivity with a fast scan rate. For this to work. that bandwidth will always be scanned. or 20 MHz).3-1 Number of LTE frames over which to average scan measurements. 3.2. TDD: Time Division Duplexing assumed. • Enable AGC Use of AGC (Automatic Gain Control) scanning parameter.Chapter 16. It should normally be enabled. Cyclic Prefix Detection Mode Duplexing Detection Mode • • • Enable ECP This should be turned on if the network uses Extended Cyclic Prefixes. • If you choose Auto-select. Observations Average Detection Mode NT12-7002 ver 1.211.4. a valid LTE signal with strength greater than the detection thresholds is required. If you choose a fixed bandwidth (1. 15. It is a slower scan mode. FDD: Frequency Division Duplexing assumed. If you know what the implemented bandwidth is. Automatic: Duplexing method used by detected cells is automatically detected.

g. “Normal 15 kHz”.4. If the eNodeB is using MIMO transmission. e.TEMS Investigation 14. The scanner is capable of detecting this automatically (“Auto Detect”). 16. Only Synchronization Signal (SS) measurements above this threshold will be reported. The type of cyclic prefix used in OFDM. Here you specify how many cells the scanner should report. Only Reference Signal (RS) measurements above this threshold will be reported. The number of antenna ports to measure on (multiple ports for MIMO).2. The bandwidth must be selected manually. The scanner is capable of detecting this automatically (“Auto Detect”).1 User’s Manual Number of Tx The number of Tx signals to be detected by the scanner. The RS and SS measurements will be performed only if measured Carrier RSSI is above this threshold. Setup of LTE Signal Scan: PCTel With PCTel only Top-N scanning is supported. with separate RS symbols per Tx port. the scanner can detect each of the different RS’s and is then able to measure each Tx signal separately. setting the field to N causes the scanner to return the N strongest cells. not scanning of a fixed cell list. Bandwidth Carrier RSSI Threshold Top N The bandwidth to scan. Number of Antenna Ports Cyclic Prefix Sync Signal Measurement Threshold Reference Signal Measurement Threshold 172 .

.1. Subband Size Subband Start Size of subband. “Tx4” in their names. NT12-7002 ver 1. The output to information elements remains exactly the same with this setup: All scanned EARFCNs are presented within the information element range “1st” … “12th”. multiple concurrent LTE signal scans can be performed.. the subband settings that follow become visible in the property grid. The RF Path and Subband options are referred to collectively as “Enhanced signal scanning” in section 16. stated as a number of resource blocks. If this option is included. Must be in the range 0 . all subband measurements appear in the plain-text decoded scan reports.Chapter 16. It populates the MIMO scanning information elements with “Tx1” . One of: • • • • Wideband Wideband + Subband Wideband + RF Path Wideband + Subband + RF Path The RF Path option means multipath (MIMO) scanning. which does not populate any special information elements. Number of subbands to divide the measurement bandwidth into. Subband Count With PCTel SeeGull MX scanners. for example on different bands. only the first 12 selected for scanning are presented. Equal to Bandwidth/Subband Size..0 173 .. Subband Count – 1. LTE Scanning Measurement Mode Signal scan measurement mode. Subband start index within the measurement bandwidth. However. If a total of more than 12 EARFCNs are scanned. The Subband option refers to subband scanning.

The scanner is capable of detecting this automatically (“Auto Detect”). only the first 12 selected for scanning are presented. a single frequency band is shared between uplink and downlink. The output to information elements remains exactly the same with this setup: All scanned EARFCNs are presented within the information element range “1st” … “12th”. uplink and downlink transmitters use separate frequency bands. A signal matching filter reducing scanner-internal interference will be applied if this parameter is set. If FDD. and if TDD. If a total of more than 12 EARFCNs are scanned. RS-CINR Noise Reduction 174 . RS-CINR being measured for each such section separately. Each selected value corresponds to a measurement where the 1080 kHz segment is divided into the specified number of equal-sized sections. Cyclic Prefix Frame Structure Measurement Rate (Hz) RS-CINR Carrier Sections Average number of 100 ms blocks to measure per second.1 User’s Manual 16. The final output is a single RS-CINR value. which is what is presented in TEMS Investigation. which will then give rise to multiple instances of the RS-CINR measurement.5.2. Setup of LTE Signal Scan: Rohde & Schwarz TSMW The type of cyclic prefix used in OFDM.TEMS Investigation 14. Specifies the type of LTE signal to assume for RS-CINR measurements. You can select several values. Seven (7) OFDM symbols (15 kHz) can be transmitted per slot if normal prefix length is used and 6 OFDM symbols per slot if extended prefix length is used. each dividing the 1080 kHz into a different number of sections. It is possible to run FDD and TDD signal scan tasks concurrently. Enables RS-CINR measurement within the innermost 1080 kHz around the center frequency of the LTE channel. Channel frame structure.

Front-end (processor) on which to schedule measurement. Number of cells to include in the presentation (up to 32). Read-only field indicating the remaining available resources on the processor selected under RF Frontend. Setup of LTE Signal Scan: Transcom Please note that the Transcom scanner is not capable of scanning more than one band at a time. See also section 13. LTE Scanning TDD Frame Configurations Specifies uplink–downlink configurations to try when performing reference signal measurements on TDD channels. The measurement tasks are manually distributed on the two built-in front-ends. Lower Ratio Limit (dB) Upper Ratio Limit (dB) Fixed Ratios (dB) RF Front-end Resource Allocation (%) Resource Available (%) 16.0 175 . What cells will appear depends on the selected sorting order (Sort Cells By parameter).6. LTE Signal Scan Type • • Top Number Full Band Scan: Scan the full band selected under Band. NT12-7002 ver 1. S-SCH to P-SCH Ratio Settings Ratio Type Specifies either a list of ratios or a range in which the power ratio between the primary and secondary synchronization channel must reside. Lower limit for ratio between primary and secondary synchronization channel.2. List of power ratios between the primary and secondary synchronization channels.Chapter 16. Cell Coverage Scan: Scan only the EARFCNs selected under Channels.5. Upper limit for ratio between primary and secondary synchronization channel.3. Resources allocated on the specified front-end.

1 User’s Manual Sort Cells By Parameter by which to sort cells in presentation windows. Use of Primary Synchronization Signal measurement.7. Presentation of LTE Signal Scan LTE signal scans are presented in a suite of predefined charts and status windows.2. Channel frame structure. table 4. SSS. uplink and downlink transmitters use separate frequency bands. Use of Reference Signal measurement with Rx1 antenna. 16. 176 . Use of Reference Signal measurement with Rx2 antenna.3. a single frequency band is shared between uplink and downlink. RP. Use of co-channel detection. Use of timeslot measurement. If FDD. or RS.211. One of RSSI. Use of Secondary Synchronization Signal measurement. TDD special subframe configuration:  3GPP 36. See Information Elements and Events. Use of BCH measurement. Frame Structure Type Subframe Configuration PSS Measurement SSS Measurement RS0 Measurement RS1 Measurement Timeslot Measurement BCH Measurement Co-Channel Detection Measurement Bandwidth Bandwidth to scan. section 8. Timing. or CINR for one of the signals PSS. If TDD. Does not exist for FDD.TEMS Investigation 14.2-1. “Unsorted” means that the cells will be listed in the order they are scanned.3. RQ.

the cell with the next higher Cell Identity appears at argument index 2. EARFCNs to scan within the selected LTE band.Chapter 16. Sort by decreasing RSRQ (Es/Io) (default) Sort by increasing RSRQ (Es/Io) Sort by fixed position: Cells are sorted by Cell Identity and are always assigned the same argument indices. Technology Band Channels NT12-7002 ver 1. etc.3. that is. Each EARFCN is specified as a number representing the center frequency of the channel. 16. Note: The sorting order of the “Sc Best” elements (see Information Elements and Events. Customizing the Presentation Sorting of Cells You can sort LTE cells in scanning information elements in a number of different ways. LTE band to scan.2. a cell with Cell Identity n is always found at argument index n. RSSI Scanning Setup of RSSI Scan: General Always “LTE”.0 177 . Sort by Cell Identity: Cells are sorted by Cell Identity. Double-click the item “LTE”. 16. Up to 255 EARFCNs can be scanned.2. A dialog appears with these sorting options: • 16. • • • • • Open the General window from the Navigator.1.8. section 3. LTE Scanning 16.3.1. the cell with the lowest Cell Identity appears at argument index 1.3) is fixed and is not affected by the General window settings.8. The sorting order is set in the General window.

Technology 178 .TEMS Investigation 14.4.1.3. Presentation of RSSI Scan RSSI scans are presented in a suite of predefined charts.4.1 User’s Manual 16.3.3. Bandwidth Remaining Measurement Points 16. 16.3.2. Setup of Spectrum Scan: General Always “LTE”. Setup of RSSI Scan: PCTel Bandwidth to scan. Setup of RSSI Scan: DRT See section 16.3. section 8. 16. 16. See Information Elements and Events. RSSI Scan Type Measured Bandwidth Bandwidth to scan. fixed at 100 kHz. Spectrum Scanning A spectrum scan shows downlink signal strength as a function of frequency. Bandwidth to scan. Logging Mode Bandwidth 16. select a bandwidth from the list. Channel Scan: Scan only the EARFCNs selected under Channels. Setup of RSSI Scan: Transcom • • Full Band Scan: Scan the whole LTE band selected under Band. See section 13. select a bandwidth from the list.3.1.4.3.5.5.2.3.

1. the legend pane will list all samples. however.4. LTE Scanning Band Start Frequency Stop Frequency Resolution Bandwidth Select the LTE frequency band to scan. Currently. Given in MHz.3. the chart. Scan Rate 16. 16. it will come into play only if you are using the LTE scanner to search for WiMAX presence.5. can of course only distinguish the samples as far as the screen resolution permits. the only value supported is 1.4. Low end of the frequency range to be swept by the scan.4.4.2.0 179 .Chapter 16. In the presentation window. Given in MHz.5. on the other hand. High end of the frequency range to be swept by the scan. Setup of Spectrum Scan: DRT The DRT-specific settings are the same as for WiMAX. Setup of Spectrum Scan: Transcom The number of sweeps on which to base the presented average RSSI. Setup of Spectrum Scan: Andrew Minimum time for scan in ms. 16. 16. See section 15.4.5. Number of Sweeps NT12-7002 ver 1. Note. Setup of Spectrum Scan: PCTel The PCTel-specific settings are the same as for WCDMA. that the Triggered Scan option is still associated with WiMAX frames. that is. Interval between successive scan samples in kHz. see section 19.

16.1.1 User’s Manual 16. section 8. Setup of Enhanced Power Scan Bandwidth to scan. center. Must be less than or equal to Timing Period Mark. Setup of Enhanced Power Scan: General Always “LTE”. the enhanced power scan is a higherperformance scan that provides selective power measurements in the time and frequency domains.2. 180 .5. LTE band to scan.6. Max: 20000.4. Technology Band Channel 16. One of: CW: 100 kHz Normal: 1.5. 16. Enhanced Power Scanning Compared to the spectrum scan. Spectrum Scan Presentation Spectrum scans are presented in a predefined bar chart. EARFCN to scan within the selected LTE band.TEMS Investigation 14. Time offset in units of 50 μs.3. The scan will start on the nearest Timing Period Mark with the Timing Period Mark Offset specified. or maximum frequency of the band to be scanned. See Information Elements and Events.5. Given in units of 50 μs.3.4 MHz Wide Type 2: 3 MHz Wide Type 3: 5 MHz Wide Type 4: 10 MHz Wide Type 5: 15 MHz Wide Type 6: 20 MHz Bandwidth Time Period Reference Timing Period Mark Timing Period Mark Offset Specifies whether the EARFCN given under Channel is the minimum.

Frequency step size in units of 2. section 8. then the number of bins must be odd.5. See section 13. Number of Bins Resolution Bandwidth Frequency Step Size Remaining Measurement Points Resolution bandwidth in units of 2. Must be larger than 100.5 kHz. See Information Elements and Events.3. Presentation of Enhanced Power Scan Enhanced power scans are presented in a predefined bar chart. The number of measurements to make within the specified band.3.5 kHz.Chapter 16. NT12-7002 ver 1... LTE Scanning Measurement Window Measurement window size in units of 50 μs.1. 16.3. Valid range: 2 . or else set to zero which means that the choice of window size is made by the scanner for optimal measurement performance. If Time Period Reference is set to Center.0 181 .5. 8000.

As for other cellular technologies. 17. you need to set the following: Technology Band Channels Always “TD-SCDMA” for TD-SCDMA scanning.4.TEMS Investigation 14. TEMS Investigation can make use of GPS data from the scanner’s internal GPS. General Scan Settings Regardless of scanning method. section 10.1 User’s Manual 17. For more information. TD-SCDMA band or bands to scan.1. Note: You must have GPS coverage to obtain TD-SCDMA scan data.4) 17.2. TD-SCDMA UARFCNs to scan within the selected band. TD-SCDMA Scanning TEMS Investigation supports scanning of TD-SCDMA UARFCNs with PCTel scanners. Each UARFCN is specified as a number representing the center frequency of the channel. and up to 255 UARFCNs for RSSI scanning.1. 182 . This is because a GPS signal is needed for time synchronization. Up to 12 UARFCNs can be selected for pilot scanning.3): Top N RSSI scanning (section 17. • • Scanning Methods Pilot scanning (section 17. see the Getting Started Manual.2. which is indispensable for the TD (Time Division) component of the TD-SCDMA technology.

Type of Scanning Setup of Pilot Scan • Scan strongest: The N strongest CPIs will be reported from the chosen UARFCNs.Chapter 17.223-840. During the cell search procedure. Midamble Top N Pilot Scanning This mode measures the Primary Common Control Physical Channel (P-CCPCH). The midamble is used as a training sequence for channel estimation. • • Pilot Scanning TD-SCDMA pilot scanning can be done in two different modes: Midamble Top N mode Sync DL Top N mode Depending on the mode. NT12-7002 ver 1.0 183 . enter the value N here (N  32). SyncDL Top N Pilot Scanning This mode measures the Downlink Pilot Timeslot (DwPTS). The DwPTS is used for downlink synchronization.3. and synchronization. located between the two data sections. 17. as explained further below. To this end it scans the TS0 midamble (144 chips). The value N is determined by the Number of Pilots parameter. The switching points are used to manage the transition between uplink and downlink (since TD-SCDMA utilizes TDD to separate uplink and downlink). The scanner automatically finds the strongest CPIs. section 7.1. TD-SCDMA Scanning 17. different parts of the TD-SCDMA frame are measured. The mapping between Cell Parameter Identity (CPI) and the Basic Midamble Code used is given in  3GPP 25. power measurements.3. table 6. the UE acquires the timing of the DwPTS by correlating with the SYNC-DL code transmitted in the DwPTS. Number of Pilots To scan the N strongest CPIs.3. which is transmitted in Timeslot 0 (TS0). which is located just before the first switching point in the Guard Period (GP) and after Timeslot 0.

5.1. Presentation of Pilot Scan Pilot scans are presented in a suite of predefined charts and status windows. Ec/Io will not be reported. 17.4.3. 17. Sort by decreasing Midamble Ec/Io (default) Sort by increasing Midamble Ec/Io Sort by fixed position: To each cell is assigned the argument that corresponds to its CPI. Select “Midamble Top N” or “SyncDL Top N”. • • • • • Open the General window from the Navigator.TEMS Investigation 14. so that a cell with CPI n is always found at argument index n + 1.3. The sorting order is set in the General window. See Information Elements and Events.2. Note: The sorting order of the “Sc Best” elements (see Information Elements and Events. A dialog appears with these sorting options: • 184 . the cell with the next higher CPI appears at argument index 2. See section 13.1 User’s Manual PN Threshold Remaining Measurement Points Measurement Mode If the Ec/Io value is below the PN threshold. section 3. Sorting of Cells You can sort TD-SCDMA cells in scanning information elements in a number of different ways.4) is fixed and is not affected by the General window settings. The modes are described in the introduction of section 17.3.2. Double-click the item “TD-SCDMA”. section 8. so that the cell with the lowest CPI appears at argument index 1.3. etc.1. Sort by Cell Parameter Id: Cells are sorted in order of ascending CPI.

Chapter 17. 17. You make the selection under General settings  Technology.4. 17.1. The GSM RSSI scan is configured in the usual manner as described in section 14. See Information Elements and Events. NT12-7002 ver 1. section 8.4. Scanners with both TD-SCDMA and GSM capability can do an RSSI scan on either of these technologies.2. RSSI Scanning The RSSI scan returns narrowband or wideband channel aggregate power. TD-SCDMA Scanning 17.1. Setup of RSSI Scan What UARFCNs to scan is set in the General settings. See section 13. see section 17.0 185 . Bandwidth Remaining Measurement Points Bandwidth to scan: either “Normal” (wideband) or “CW” (narrowband).2.4.3. Presentation of RSSI Scan RSSI scans are presented in a suite of predefined charts.5.4.2.

4.6 186 Section Ref.4 18. the device must have been purchased with the relevant option (wherever applicable). chapter 13.Scan PCTel LX/EX Pilot scanning RSSI scanning Narrowband interference scanning Spectrum analysis 1.1. CDMA Scanning TEMS Investigation supports scanning of CDMA (IS-2000. Andrew i. Please note that for a scanning method to be actually available in TEMS Investigation. .TEMS Investigation 14. supported using the various devices as indicated. IS-95) RF channels with Andrew and PCTel scanners.1 User’s Manual 18.3. 18. PCTel MX CDMA Scanning Capability/ Scanning Device 1 18. IS-856. Follow UE option not supported. See also the Getting Started Manual.5 18. Scanning Methods TEMS Investigation offers these CDMA scanning methods.Scan scanner (and the PC along with it) for use with TEMS Investigation is covered in the Getting Started Manual.3 18.1. section 10. How to configure the Andrew i.

Scan Rate Report Threshold Number of Top N PN Increment Correlation Length NT12-7002 ver 1. Up to 12 RF channels can be selected. General Scan Settings The following settings are common to all or most of the scanning methods: Technology One of: • • • Band Channels CDMA One (IS-95) CDMA2000 EV-DO CDMA band or bands to scan.2. Min: 512. Entering the number N means scan the N strongest pilots. Min: 1. scrambled with cell-specific PN sequence offsets. CDMA: Scan correlation length in chips.3. Max: 16.3. CDMA RF channels to scan within the selected band. Max: 32.1.0 187 . EV-DO: Scan correlation length in slots. Pilot Scanning This method scans pilots. Must be divisible by 128. Compare the discussion of the corresponding parameters in section 18. 18. Ec/Io detection threshold in dB. Min: –24. 18. CDMA Scanning 18.3. Each channel is specified as a number representing the center frequency of the channel. Max: 0. Max: 2048. Min: 1. Setup of Pilot Scan: Andrew Minimum time for scan in ms.2. The PN increment.Chapter 18.

no restriction on number of pilots). The output to information elements remains exactly the same with this setup: All scanned frequencies. This is a signal code power threshold (in dB) used for the Delay Spread measurements. or the 32 strongest pilots on the RF channel currently used by a CDMA phone that is also activated in the application.e. Entering the number N means scan the N strongest pilots. General Settings (Not Technology-dependent) Type of Scanning The set of pilots (PNs) to scan on each RF channel is composed in one of the following ways: • Scan selected: User-defined. Here you pick the pilots you want to scan. The setting –20 dB is recommended. are presented within the information element range “1st” … “12th”.2. Min: 1. • Selected Numbers Number of Pilots This field is visible if Type of Scanning is set to “Scan selected”. If the PN threshold is set too low. The latter option is activated by setting “Follow UE” to Yes. static set of pilots (up to 512. Setup of Pilot Scan: PCTel With PCTel SeeGull MX and EX scanners. the scanner automatically finds the strongest pilots. up to N = 32) on each RF channel. one PN scan on a CDMA2000 frequency and one on an EV-DO frequency. the Delay Spread values will be affected by random noise more than may be desired. This field is visible if Type of Scanning is set to “Scan strongest”. Scan strongest: The strongest pilots (“Top N”.TEMS Investigation 14. only the first 12 selected for scanning are presented. common to all selected RF channels. i. If a total of more than 12 frequencies are scanned. regardless of technology. and you will thus be able to discern multipath and fading effects more accurately. In either case. PN Threshold 188 . Max: 32.1 User’s Manual 18. multiple concurrent PN scans can be performed: for example.3. By raising the threshold you reduce the influence of random noise correlations.

. 6. of the time window in which the pilot is searched. The maximum radius within which to detect pilots. This is also the default and recommended setting. NT12-7002 ver 1. Selection of Measurements to Perform On the rows that follow you specify whether to measure each of the following (at least one item must be set to Yes): Ec/Io The peak pilot Ec/Io value. along with Start Pilot and Pilot Increment. Start Pilot Pilot Increment Max Cell Radius The index of the first PN allocated. Settings Specific to CDMA One (IS-95) and CDMA2000 (IS-2000) Use Pilot Increment This refers to the inter-sector pilot PN increment used by the access network in assigning PN offsets to sectors. Settings Specific to EV-DO (IS-856) Pilot Window Length This parameter indicates the length. Search Window Size Normal (64 chips). Wide (128 chips).. only the PNs 0. 3. The maximum pilot window length supported by the scanning receiver is 64.5. If a pilot increment is used. or Wider (256 chips). in chips. This parameter.1. The PN increment.0 189 . CDMA Scanning Remaining Measurement Points See section 13. TEMS Investigation will filter the list of selectable PNs: for example.Chapter 18. if Start Pilot = 0 and Pilot Increment = 3.. will appear in the list. are applicable only in “Scan selected” mode.

it is only found in scanner reports. High Dynamic puts the emphasis on accuracy. This measurement does not appear as an information element. Each sample reported by the scanner is typically based on a measurement 20 ms in length.1 User’s Manual Pilot Delay Aggregate Ec/Io Delay Spread The number of chips between the expected arrival time and the actual arrival time of the signal.TEMS Investigation 14. The sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold. Remaining Options Measurement Mode (EX only) There are two choices. High Speed is faster and accordingly less accurate. 1. 190 . These are two algorithms with different priorities. Each reported sample is typically based on a 10 ms measurement.1 The number of chips between the first and last pilot Ec/Io peak above the PN threshold. High Speed and High Dynamic.

Selected UE If this is set to On. GPS Preferred: The scanner will use its internal GPS for timing whenever possible and resort to the Pilot and Sync channels in other cases. This setting is enabled only if the scanner has been purchased with the Sync Channel Timing option. The Timing mode setting is applicable for IS-95 and IS-2000 only. NT12-7002 ver 1. not for IS-856. If you choose this option.Chapter 18. When the phone switches to a different RF channel. Pilot synchronization allows the scanner to operate in indoor environments where GPS coverage is lacking. the scanner can only use its GPS for timing. protocol. • • • GPS Only: The scanner will rely exclusively on its internal GPS for timing. Follow UE. CDMA Scanning Timing Mode Here you select by what method the scanner should synchronize to the base station’s transmissions. and RF channel information is taken from the phone. Setting this parameter high improves the accuracy and reliability of the output but also slows the scan down. Without the Sync Channel Timing option. a further field “Selected UE” appears where you select which CDMA phone the scanner should follow. all other controls in the dialog are disabled. the scanner follows along automatically. The scan will then cover the 32 strongest pilots on the RF channel that the selected phone is currently using. and 3072 for IS-856. Pilot Sync Only: The scanner will rely exclusively on the Pilot and Sync channels for timing. Integration (Chips) This is the number of chips over which each signal energy value is integrated. The default and recommended value is 2048 for IS-2000 and IS-95.0 191 . The band.

1. Sort by fixed position: Pilot PNs are sorted by index and are always assigned the same argument indices.3.1 User’s Manual 18.3. One predefined bar chart is provided for each RF channel scanned.5. Note: The sorting order of the “Sc Best” elements (see Information Elements and Events. 18. Pilots are sorted by ascending PN offset. the pilot with the lowest index appears at argument index 1.3. The sorting order is set in the General window. The updating rate is chiefly dependent on the number of live signals encountered in the network. regardless of RF channel.3. Customizing the Presentation Sorting of Pilots You can sort pilots in scanning information elements in a number of different ways. etc. the pilot with the next higher index appears at argument index 2. Presentation: “PN Scan” Bar Charts The PN Scan bar charts present pilot scan data.4. section 3. Sort by decreasing Ec/Io (default).TEMS Investigation 14. the updating rate is also greatly affected by the size of this set. pilot PN n is always found at argument index n + 1. Presentation: Strongest Scanned PN Bar Chart This bar chart shows the strongest pilots scanned. A dialog appears with these sorting options: • 192 . whereas for the “Top N” scan the number N is only marginally important (since all pilots have to be searched regardless of N). that is.2) is fixed and is not affected by the General window settings. Double-click the item “CDMA”. 18.3. Sort by increasing Ec/Io.5. Each bar chart by default presents peak Ec/Io for each pilot found. For a manually selected set of pilots. • • • • • Open the General window from the Navigator. Sort by Pilot PN: Pilot PNs are sorted by index. 18.

0 193 .. If you choose this option.4.. NT12-7002 ver 1.5.1.2288 MHz. n + 13].. protocol and RF channel information are taken from the phone. the bandwidth is 50 kHz.1.. 18. otherwise [n – 33 . 18. in the “CDMA” category). on the 1900 MHz band.Chapter 18. the scanner follows along automatically.. n + 33].2. all other controls in the dialog are disabled. CDMA Scanning 18. RSSI Scanning Setup of RSSI Scan Select Normal or Continuous Wave (“CW”). RF channels [n – 13 . n + 21]. etc.1 When the phone switches to a different RF channel.4. The band. This option is not available for EV-DO. the measurements are extracted to the same information elements (Scanned RSSI. RF channels [n – 21 . For the cellular (800) band. 1.. Specifically (n = phone’s RF channel number): on the 800 MHz band. CW: “Condensed” or CW band. RF channels [n – 26 .. Bandwidth Regardless of the choice made here. Choose Yes to scan the RF channel that the CDMA phone in the combo box is currently using (plus a number of adjacent RF channels). n + 26] if 79  n  275. Remaining Measurement Points Follow UE See section 13. For the PCS (1900) band. • • Normal: CDMA band. bandwidth 1. Presentation: RSSI Scan Bar Chart This bar chart displays RSSI for each RF channel scanned.4. on the 450 MHz band. the bandwidth is 30 kHz. This setting applies to all channels you select for scanning..

1 User’s Manual 18.5. 18.5. • • Interference Offset Open the General window and double-click the CDMA item.1.2. Setup of Narrowband Interference Scan General Settings Under Channels. 18. Remaining Measurement Points 18.5. 18. Narrowband Interference Scanning In this mode the scanner scans a narrow band centered around a specific RF channel.5. Once you have done a narrowband interference scan to identify interferers.5. you can proceed to perform a spectrum analysis in the relevant frequency range.5.3.1. This is a threshold governing how strong an RF channel must be in order to be regarded as an interferer. The narrowband interference scan has lower resolution than the spectrum analysis scan (see section 18. Context Settings See section 13. Specifically.TEMS Investigation 14.5. identifying other sufficiently strong RF channels as interferers. enter the Interference Offset in dB.1.1. thereby obtaining an even clearer view of the problematic signals. Presentation: Narrowband Interference Scan Bar Chart The results from this scanning method are presented in the CDMA Narrowband Interference Scan Bar Chart: 194 .1. For the cellular (800) band the scanned bandwidth is 30 kHz. and for the PCS (1900) band it is 50 kHz.6) but is considerably faster.1. As regards the rest.2. you select a single RF channel around which to scan. 18. In the dialog that appears. an in-band RF channel is considered to be an interferer if its strength exceeds the average in-band RSSI by an amount at least equal to Interference Offset.2. see section 18.

Chapter 18.1). 18.6. See Information Elements and Events.1. Spectrum Analysis This scanning method shows downlink signal strength as a function of frequency.6. CDMA frequency band to scan. Setup of Spectrum Analysis Scan General Settings Choose the relevant CDMA technology.3.6. predefined color coding: • • Yellow: The RF channel is an interferer according to the Interference Offset threshold criterion entered (see section 18. section 7.1.5.0 195 .1. An event “Narrowband Interference” is reported when an in-band interferer is detected. 18. 18. CDMA Scanning Each bar in this chart represents an RF channel. Green: The RF channel is not an interferer according to the Interference Offset criterion. Technology Band NT12-7002 ver 1. This chart uses a special.

on the other hand. the legend pane will list all samples.4. the chart.2. See section 16. Given in MHz.6. Given in MHz. See Information Elements and Events. Presentation of Spectrum Analysis Scan Spectrum scans are presented in a predefined bar chart. See section 15.6. 18. Interval between successive scan samples in kHz. • • Context Settings The Andrew-specific settings are the same as for LTE. can of course only distinguish the samples as far as the screen resolution permits.2.TEMS Investigation 14.1.1 User’s Manual Start Frequency Stop Frequency Resolution Bandwidth Low end of the frequency range to be swept by the scan. 18. section 8. The PCTel-specific settings are the same as for WCDMA.5.5.1. High end of the frequency range to be swept by the scan. In the presentation window.2. 196 . the highest selectable resolution being 5 kHz.3.

2. see the Getting Started Manual. 19. WiMAX channels to scan within the selected band. WiMAX Scanning 19. For more information. Each channel is specified as a number representing the center frequency of the channel.1. see section 19. chapter 12. General Scan Settings Regardless of scanning method. How to configure the DRT scanner (and the PC along with it) for use with TEMS Investigation is covered in the Getting Started Manual. Up to 1500 channels can be selected. and the associated OFDMA bandwidth.0 197 .4.Chapter 19. you need to set the following: Band WiMAX band to scan: one of the bands (WiMAX RF Profiles) supported by the scanner. Always “WiMAX” at present. • • • Scanning Methods WiMAX scanning methods are as follows: WiMAX preamble scan RSSI scan Spectrum analysis 19.1. Regarding band support.4. section 10. WiMAX Scanning TEMS Investigation has the ability to scan WiMAX carriers with a DRT scanner.1. Channels Technology NT12-7002 ver 1.

19.TEMS Investigation 14. The carrier is the desired signal. WiMAX RF Profile. Setup of Preamble Scan • Targeted: Select this if you wish to scan a fixed set of preambles. regardless of how this parameter is set. Top N: Select this if you wish to scan the strongest preambles. (This logging has got nothing to do with TEMS Investigation. the scan data is always recorded in regular TEMS Investigation logfiles (*. None: Do not log to MMC.e. you can optionally record a logfile with scan data on the MMC as well. and the interference can be either noise or co-channel interference or both. Preamble Scanning The WiMAX air interface uses OFDM as modulation method.3. Enable Preamble Power Enable Preamble CINR Calculation of preamble power. Up to 100 preambles can be tracked simultaneously. If you are using a DRT scanner with the optional multimedia card (MMC). each subframe is preceded by a preamble.1 User’s Manual 19. Scan Type • Logging Mode When using a DRT scanner purchased with TEMS Investigation. The preamble is used for synchronization and channel estimation purposes. Carrier to Interference-plusNoise Ratio. currently either 5 or 10 MHz). • • MMC: Log to MMC.) The MMC must have been formatted and inserted into the scanner before the scanner is powered on.trp). Within an OFDM frame. Calculation of CINR. The bandwidth scanned during preamble scanning is that of the selected band (i. Set the number of preambles to report under Top N.1. 198 .3. Specify the preambles under Preamble Index List.

One of Fast mode. Robust mode. cluster size N = 3 will be used for CINR measurement. Measurement of channel response in time domain. that is. If set to False. Measurement of multipath delay spread. that is. Enable AGC Use of AGC (Automatic Gain Control) scanning parameter. cluster size N = 1 will be used for CINR measurement. NT12-7002 ver 1.Chapter 19. CINR will be measured over all segments. Measurement of downlink MAP pilot CINR. WiMAX Scanning Enable CFO Enable Delay Spread Enable Absolute Delay Enable DL-MAP Pilot CINR Enable DL-MAP Pilot Power Enable DL-MAP Data Power Use N=3 for CINR Measurements Measurement of Carrier Frequency Offset. Measurement Mode Enable Channel Response: Time Domain Enable Channel Response: Frequency Domain Measurement of channel response in frequency domain. CINR will be measured for each segment. Measurement of downlink MAP pilot power. Measurement of delay relative to GPS. If set to True.0 199 . It should normally be enabled. or Rogue mode. since otherwise high level signals may saturate the receiver and cause errors. Measurement of downlink MAP data power.

The number of samples on which to base each computation of measurement statistics. This must be set on for measurement statistics (mean and standard deviation for RSSI. Preamble Index List Detect Threshold Decode Threshold Enable Statistical Information Number of Samples for Stats Enable Frame Prefix Decoding Enable Downlink Map Decoding Enable Uplink Map Decoding Enable DCD Decoding 200 . However. Decoding of downlink MAP messages. These include the burst profile for each user.TEMS Investigation 14. CINR) to be computed. Here you specify how many preambles the scanner should report. Decoding of Downlink Channel Descriptor (a message containing information about downlink characteristics).6). Threshold (in dB) below which data is not decoded. Compare Enable Downlink Map Decoding. Decoding of uplink MAP messages.1 User’s Manual Top N This field is editable if you have set Scan Type to “Top N”. The Frame Prefix specifies the modulation type and number of symbols associated with one or several downlink bursts that follow the FCH. which defines the modulation and coding scheme used on the downlink. the actual number of samples used may be smaller. Decoding of downlink Frame Prefix (DLFP). setting the field to N causes the scanner to return the N strongest preambles. This field is editable if you have set Scan Type to “Targeted”. Here you specify the indices of the preambles to scan. Threshold (in negative dB) below which no preamble detection is reported. as reported in the “Samples Taken” information elements (see Information Elements and Events. section 3.

section 8.1. 19.0 201 .5. Valid for triggered scan only.3.1. Spectrum Analysis A spectrum scan shows downlink signal strength as a function of frequency. select a bandwidth from the list. RSSI Scanning Setup of RSSI Scan See section 19. WiMAX Scanning Enable UCD Decoding Decoding of Uplink Channel Descriptor (a message containing information about uplink characteristics).6. Setup of Spectrum Analysis Scan See section 19. Logging Mode Bandwidth 19.4.4.Chapter 19. 19. The number of measurement points left to allocate.1. Length of time for total averaging in μs. 19. Presentation WiMAX scans are presented in a suite of predefined charts and status windows. Bandwidth to scan. Valid for triggered scan only. See Information Elements and Events. Setting this to Yes means that the scanning will be triggered at the start of a new WiMAX frame. Logging Mode Average Time Triggered Scan Offset Time (µs) Block Time (µs) Measurement Points 19. NT12-7002 ver 1.3. Length of time for block averaging in μs. Offset from start of frame in μs.5.6.

202 . and handover targets for neighbor lists.1 User’s Manual The purpose of having views that are grouped by preamble index. best server. rather than by RSSI or CINR. without any grouping by segment. is to provide information that is helpful in determining coverage. or find crossed feeders. The purpose of having views sorted by RSSI or CINR.TEMS Investigation 14. This can help identify improperly aimed antennas. is to provide information about all the sectors of a site.

1) normally support all types of script activities.1.1 Scanning can be scripted for all devices indicated in the introduction of chapter 13. Which of these are testable for particular cellular technologies is tabulated in section 20. • • Circuit-switched voice and video calls are supported.Chapter 20. VoIP. phone devices sold with TEMS Investigation 14. HTTP. for applying various control functions to devices. chapter 11 regarding preconfiguration of Fixed Wireless Terminals. and WAP.trp).2. NT12-7002 ver 1. for recording data collected while executing the scripts. video streaming. TCP. section 10. it is not possible to do data service testing with any other devices at the same time. Data service testing encompasses the following services and protocols: e-mail.1 (listed in the Getting Started Manual.2. Introduction to Service Control The Service Control tool is used to control the actions of devices that you activate in the application. Service Control 20.1.0 203 . 1. Ping. MMS. See the Getting Started Manual. The recordings will be regular logfiles (extension . Capabilities of Devices Apart from technology-related restrictions as noted in section 20. SMS. UDP. With multiple devices activated. • Special activities are available • • • 20. such as RAT lock and band lock for AT commands. However. Service Control 20.3. if an Ericsson Fixed Wireless Terminal is activated. multiple data connections can be maintained concurrently. FTP.

HTTP.1 User’s Manual Regarding other connectable devices. there are no technology-related restrictions.3. 20. 20. and Ping. Supported Services by Cellular Technology TD-SCDMA CS voice calls CS video calls E-mail FTP HTTP MMS Ping SMS UDP Video streaming VoIP WAP For scanning.4. What scanning devices can have their actions scripted is stated in chapter 13 (introduction).TEMS Investigation 14. it should be noted that data service testing with Ericsson Fixed Wireless Terminals is limited to FTP. The Service Control Designer The Service Control Designer window is where you compose service control workflows (scripts): 204 CDMA UMTS Service/Technology LTE .

The rest of this chapter is organized as follows. First comes a hands-on tutorial on how to build and run scripts.0 205 . and for execution flow control. At the bottom of each pane is a box showing an explanation for the item currently selected.18). The Properties pane contains properties of the activity that you are currently working with (the one currently selected in the Workflow pane). for example all the details of accessing a particular FTP server. The Workflow pane is the area where you assemble your script graphically in the form of a flowchart. for controlling devices. items can either be grouped into categories or be listed in alphabetical order.16–20. Service Control Properties pane Workflow pane Activity pane Configuration Sets pane • • • • The Activity pane is a palette holding all script building blocks: for running services.Chapter 20. In the Properties and Configuration Sets panes. use the buttons at the top to toggle between the two display modes.15). with numerous screenshots and examples (sections 20.5–20. Finally some additional features of the Service NT12-7002 ver 1. In the Configuration Sets pane you define various entities that can be reused in any script. Then follows a reference part cataloging all script activity types with their properties and associated configuration sets (sections 20.

• Add a voice dial activity to the script. 206 . and some reference material is given (sections 20.) 1 2 • The Dial box is tagged by an exclamation mark. points to the reference section 20. Video calls are handled in similar fashion. just like others that follow. expand the Voice node in the Activity pane and drag the Dial item to the empty workflow. This means that the activity is not yet properly configured. To this end.16.1 User’s Manual Control tool are covered. A similar exclamation mark in the Properties pane indicates the property that is undefined: “Configuration”.TEMS Investigation 14. 20. (The cross-reference here. For purposes of illustration we will build a very simple script that dials single voice calls.19–20.5.20). Basics of Creating Scripts (with Voice) This section covers the fundamentals of creating a complete and valid script that is ready to be run.

(In other cases it can be more complex. for which you will probably want to substitute something more specific. This is done in the Configuration Sets pane. Service Control • What we need to do is to define a configuration set for the Dial activity. such as one identifying the subscription having this number.Chapter 20. When just dialing a call like this.0 207 . as will be seen later. For a voice dial. The example below uses a neutral designation “Voice Call Recipient 1”. the configuration consists simply of the phone number to call. Finish by clicking the Apply button. • • • The Properties and Workflow panes are now updated with the configuration data.) Give the configuration a suitable name. The call will be established and then immediately hung up (since the script has run to NT12-7002 ver 1. it will not have a duration.

TEMS Investigation 14. The graphical user interface helps you position the Wait box correctly by means of guiding symbols and text. • Drag the Wait activity to a position just below the voice dial box. 208 .10. To give duration to a call.1 User’s Manual completion). 1 2 • Set the duration of the wait in the Properties pane: • Finally.5. use the Wait activity: compare section 20. add a Hang Up activity after the wait.

NT12-7002 ver 1. Service Control If you want the script to control both caller and receiver.10.4 for guidance. See section 20. • Expand the IP node in the Activity pane and add a Network Connect activity to the script. you need to specify whether to use RAS or NDIS. • Again you will be notified that a matching configuration is missing: • A configuration for a data connection is created in the same way as one for voice.Chapter 20.3. In particular.6. turn to section 20. which is a necessary preparation for running data services. Setting Up a Network Connection This section shows how to set up a network connection. 20.0 209 .16.1 for full details. only it contains many more parameters.

we will set up an FTP download as an example of a data service activity.6. so you do not need to associate it with a configuration set. 210 . Then add a Network Disconnect activity at the bottom of the workflow. Setting Up a Data Service Activity In this section. point to it from the Configuration field in the activity properties. The disconnect operation will take down the network connection. Associate it with the “W995_Dialup_1” configuration set created in section 20.TEMS Investigation 14. 20.1 User’s Manual • Once you have the configuration down. • • First add a Network Connect activity. Later on.6. if you have multiple network connect configurations defined. We will use the data connection configuration created in section 20. you can pick and choose among them.7. This activity needs no particular configuration.

you need to create a configuration set representing the FTP server and how to access it. NT12-7002 ver 1. Insert an activity of this type between network connect and disconnect: • For the FTP Download activity. Again this is done in similar fashion as for previously created configurations.0 211 . Service Control 1 2 • The FTP session itself is handled by the FTP Download activity.Chapter 20.

8. We will reuse the configuration sets and activities from sections 20.89. in that order (they are found in the IP category).67.45. At the start of this workflow. reference it from the FTP Download activity in the same manner as before. Stand-alone PS Attach and Detach In this section we will perform explicit PS attach and detach operations in isolation. particularly for the purpose of computing KPIs.dat from the FTP server with address 123. • After completing the definition of the FTP server configuration. logging in as user “TEMS_User”.1 User’s Manual We will download the file My_10_MB_File. This will detach the device from the PS network and then reattach the device. 20. One reason for doing this could be to measure the time taken by these operations.7.7. • • We begin with the FTP download workflow from section 20.6 and 20. add a PS Detach and a PS Attach activity. 212 .TEMS Investigation 14.

) Compare chapter 33. For an example of such a predefined snippet in use.4.9. since it will recur in any script where you want to detach and then reattach to the PS network. Example: The detach-plus-attach procedure in section 20. You can also save an arbitrary activity sequence as a user-defined snippet: • Select all of the activities by dragging the mouse pointer. The predefined snippets are also tailored to produce all data required to compute KPIs. then enter the File menu and select Save as Snippet.0 213 . You are prompted to name and describe the snippet.9. Predefined snippets for all supported services are provided in the Activity pane. Snippets A snippet is a fixed sequence of activities that is defined as a building block and can be reused as such.Chapter 20. (The KPI computation itself is done using TEMS Discovery or TEMS Automatic. NT12-7002 ver 1. see section 20. Service Control PS detach PS attach See also section 20.10.8 could be a good candidate for a user-defined snippet. 20. saving time and effort when creating new scripts.

to enable or disable them. You can then encapsulate the PS Detach and PS Attach activities within a sequence.1. You can now enable and disable the detach–attach sequence as a whole: 214 . Workflow Control Structures The Control Flow node in the Activity pane contains a number of logical constructs and timers for controlling the script execution flow.8.1 User’s Manual 20. then drag them both (using the PS Detach box as handle) into the sequenceActivity1 box. Sequences You can formally define a group of activities in a script as a sequence. Expand the Control Flow node and from it drag a Sequence activity to a position immediately above the PS Detach activity: • • Select the PS Detach and PS Attach activities by holding Ctrl and clicking each activity.10. 20. Suppose further that you want a convenient means of turning the detach/attach activities on and off. • Suppose your script includes PS detach followed by PS attach as described in section 20.10. This is handy if you want to apply some operation to all of these activities – for example.TEMS Investigation 14.

0 215 .2. so that the throughput is sharply reduced. the activity should terminate. Service Control Compare section 20.e.10. see section 20.5.Chapter 20. Suppose the phone is on a WCDMA network and is instructed to do an FTP download.16.2. If on the other hand the phone remains on WCDMA. To this end we use an if–else construct in the following manner: • First add a Network Connect activity. and then an FTP Download activity with the Abort property set to On Event and “Handover from UTRAN” selected as event type: • Then add an If–Else activity below the FTP download: NT12-7002 ver 1. (This is accomplished by imposing a “terminate on event” condition on the activity.12. For full details on the Sequence activity. then we want to abandon the download.5. i. see section 20. we want to proceed with a voice call (which does not require a large bandwidth). If–Else Constructs An if–else construct is used to split the execution flow into several branches based on the outcome of a previous activity. Here is an example. Now if the phone is handed over to GSM.15. 20.) After a handover to GSM has occurred. then after the FTP download has completed we want to continue with a video streaming session.

2. 20.16. by default “ftpDownloadActivity1”. This always evaluates to true.7 and is not detailed here. set Condition Type to Activity Result. This is done just as in sections 20. 216 . and set the associated attributes as follows: Activity = the name of the FTP download activity.1 User’s Manual – For the left-hand branch (“ifElseBranchActivity1”). • Suppose we want to execute an FTP download five times over. so that the right-hand branch will be executed whenever the condition in the left-hand branch is false.3. While Loops While loops are used to repeat a sequence of activities a predetermined number of times. Operator = Equals. See next screenshot. as described in the introduction of this subsection.1 for full details on the If–Else activity.) – • Add a voice dial activity on the left (to the node “sequenceActivity1”) and a streaming activity on the right (to the node “sequenceActivity2”). (Not shown in the screenshot below. set Condition Type to Any. Result = Stopped by Event. See section 20.5 and 20.10. For the right-hand branch (“ifElseBranchActivity2”).TEMS Investigation 14.

dropping it onto “sequenceActivity1” in the indicated spot (“Drop Activities Here”): • It may be desirable to insert a brief pause after each pass through the while loop. by entering the value 5. then fill it with the desired contents.10. we stipulate that the loop should be run five times in total.1 –. You can accomplish this by appending a Wait activity at the end of the FTP snippet: NT12-7002 ver 1. (Just as with sequences – compare section 20. set the number of times you want to iterate the while loop. you first add the empty While construct to the workflow. Service Control • Begin by dragging a While activity to the start of the workflow.Chapter 20. • • Now drag the predefined FTP download snippet into the while loop.) In the Properties pane. Below.0 217 .

1 User’s Manual • Set the duration of the wait in the Properties pane: For example. See section 20. the script will perform five FTP downloads in succession with a 10 s idle interval between downloads. 20.2 for full details on the While activity. a script can also control the activities of multiple devices. To create a branching structure for these concurrent tasks. one dialing and the other answering. See the screenshot below.1. caller and receiver must be put in parallel. where EQ1 calls EQ2: 218 .2. Parallel Activities All scripts so far have been written for a single device engaged in one activity at a time.TEMS Investigation 14. if one phone is to place a voice or video call to another.4.16. we use the Parallel activity from the Control Flow category. Example 1: CS Voice/Video – Caller and Receiver For example.10.10. However.4. 20. if you set Duration to 10 s. or assign multiple parallel activities to the same device.

Chapter 20.4.2.0 219 . For this purpose we need to build a somewhat more complicated workflow. Service Control A parallel structure is also recommended for MMS send/receive. NT12-7002 ver 1. 20. • First add a While activity and set it to run 10 times.10. This will become an outer loop repeating the various activities that will be included in it. one performing downloads over FTP and the other two looping short voice calls. as detailed in this section. Suppose that we want to control three UEs in parallel. Example 2: Concurrent Activities on Different Devices Next is a slightly more complicated example.

but in this case we do not need it at the topmost level – compare the steps that follow.1 User’s Manual • Remove “sequenceActivity1” by selecting it and pressing Delete. • • Since the Parallel construct by default provides only two branches.) Drop a Parallel activity inside the while loop. we need to add one more. The structure is now expanded with a third branch: 220 . To this end. right-click the “parallelActivity1” box and choose Add Branch from the context menu.TEMS Investigation 14. (The Sequence activity is created automatically.

we need to change the equipment (EQ) parameter to EQ2 and EQ3 in branch 2 and branch 3 respectively. Set the wait time to 10 seconds. Let us begin with the voice calls: • • • Add while loops to branches 2 and 3 and set each to execute 5 times. Service Control It is now time to define the service-related activities. After these steps. Add a voice call snippet (a predefined one is found in the Activity pane) to each while loop. This is done in the Properties pane or from the context menu for each activity. To assign the activities to the correct devices. branches 2 and 3 of the workflow should have the following structure: NT12-7002 ver 1.Chapter 20.0 221 .

1. 222 . In the screenshot that follows. the voice sequences have been collapsed to clarify the overall structure of the workflow. define the FTP task for device no.TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual • Next. All you need to do here is to add an FTP download snippet to branch 1 and associate it with a functional configuration.

16.0 223 .Chapter 20. allowing at least a few seconds between successive initiations.2.) NT12-7002 ver 1. Service Control This script will conduct a total of 10 FTP downloads and 2 × 5 × 10 = 100 voice calls. Note: When composing a script for multiple concurrent data service sessions using multiple devices. See section 20.3 for full details on the Parallel activity. (No such Waits are present in the above example. It is better to let the sessions start one at a time. it is wise to make sure that these sessions are not all initiated simultaneously. which contains only one data service session. Insert Wait activities as appropriate to achieve this.

16.1 User’s Manual 20.TEMS Investigation 14. All instances of the FTP Download activity use the same configuration set.4. however. Compare the similar advice in section 20. it is best not to start all of the scans at the exact same time. When assigning multiple scanning activities to the same device.9 for details). The activities concerned are those for FTP download/ upload. and Ping.4. e-mail.10. each activity adds a unique prefix to the target file name (refer to section 20. as exemplified in the following screenshot (branch 1: no Wait. The script shown below lets one device perform two concurrent FTP downloads. to prevent file write conflicts.10. 224 .3. Example 3: Concurrent Activities on the Same Device The Parallel structure can also be used to run multiple activities concurrently on the same device.3. branch 3: Wait with duration 4 s). branch 2: Wait with duration 2 s.2. HTTP. even multiple activities of the same type. Insert short waits as appropriate to stagger the start times. provided that the device supports it.

The Wait activity also comes in useful whenever some tasks need to be cleanly separated in time for one reason or other. Video Dial. the execution proceeds to the next activity.16. Scan activity.3.2.5. NT12-7002 ver 1.2. For some usage examples.0 225 . the Wait has the apparent effect of giving duration to that activity.10.10.10. When following a (voice) Dial.9. 20. Service Control 20. and 20..1. see sections 20. Wait The Wait activity basically does nothing. or Start . 20. After the wait time has expired. See section 20. and it temporarily halts the execution of the workflow branch it is located in.Chapter 20.7 for full details on this activity.16.4.5.. and this construction is the most convenient method of controlling the duration.

6. See section 20. providing a timing mechanism. Alternatively.10. Wait For The Wait For activity can be used to: • • • Wait for a scheduled point in time.5. Wait for a particular kind of event to occur. • • Create a While loop and set its termination condition to whatever you like. In the screenshots below. put a Wait For with Trigger = Schedule.8 for the fine points. 20. • 226 .16. At the top of the loop. set Start to Immediately. This can be accomplished by putting the voice call inside a while loop which also contains a Wait For activity. The loop will then pause at the Wait For activity each time until 10 minutes have passed since the previous turn. you can specify that the calls should begin at the turn of the hour (“On the Hour”) or at an arbitrary time (“Time of Day”).1 below.2. A special case is Wait For with periodic events: see section 20. Wait for another activity to finish with a predetermined outcome. Add activities for the voice call (Dial.6. This pattern will repeat until the while loop terminates. Hang Up) just as in section 20.1 User’s Manual 20. To make the loop execute with the desired frequency.10.1. continue by setting Repeat to Yes and Repeat Interval to 10 minutes.10. This is straightforward.6. the call duration has been set to 2 minutes. Waiting For a Scheduled Point in Time Suppose we want a device to dial a short voice call once every 10 minutes. Wait.6.3.TEMS Investigation 14. – – • If you just want to start the dialing as soon as the script starts. The schedule can be set up in a number of ways.10.10.2. See section 20. see the reference section 20.6.

Right: Loop controlled by Wait For with Start = Time of Day.10.6. Again taking CS voice as a simple use case.Chapter 20. we want to start a logfile recording to capture what happens over the following one-minute period. an alternative (“event-driven”) approach to data collection is to wait until something interesting happens and trigger recording only then. suppose that the voice service is tested by dialing one call after another. Configure the Dial activity to abort if the call is blocked (Abort property set to On Event with “Blocked Call” selected as trigger). • NT12-7002 ver 1.2. • • Create a Parallel structure with two branches. Waiting For a Given Outcome of an Activity Instead of collecting data continuously. If a call proceeds normally. but if a call is blocked. put a Wait For activity at the top monitoring the voice calls. Then add activities for logfile recording beneath the Wait For: Start Recording followed by a Wait with Duration = 1 min and finally Stop Recording.0 227 . In the right-hand branch. insert a While loop repeating voice calls. In the left-hand branch. Set the Trigger property to Activity Result and stipulate that it should equal “Stopped by Event”. Service Control Left: Loop controlled by Wait For with Start = Immediately. we do not log any data. 20.

and not only blocks.4. then set Activity Result to the catch-all value “Failed” instead. Next. 228 . We can then construct a user-defined event for the condition and make that event periodic.10. One natural application of this construction is to cell whitelists. signifying that the user is currently camping on an allowed cell. 20. If such an event is generated.6. The rest of the loop contains the task to be performed.3. so that the device performs its task once. which means that it is generated repeatedly at fixed intervals as long as the condition is true (see section 22. at the start of which a Wait For activity listens for the periodic event. Recording will then be triggered by any voice call that does not complete normally. a script is written containing a while loop. the Wait For activity waits for a whitelist event.3).TEMS Investigation 14. See section 22. etc. Wait For with Periodic Events Suppose we want to perform some kind of task whenever a given condition is satisfied.1 User’s Manual If any call failures are of interest. the script proceeds through the rest of the while loop. In this case. Then a new whitelist check is done.

Service Control Note that user-defined events are prefixed with the string “User Defined:” in the Events drop-down box.1 20. To resolve.10.9). and it may be preferable if you want to organize your scripts in modular fashion. NT12-7002 ver 1. If you add the Wait For first and create the userdefined events only later. Left: While loop with Wait For having event as trigger. they must exist when you add the Wait For activity to the script. Right: Selection of whitelist events (one for each RAT) as Wait For triggers. See the image below. the events will not show in the drop-down list for that particular Wait For instance. Using Run Script can be regarded as an alternative to saving and reusing snippets (see section 20.7. keeping down the complexity of each individual script. simply drag a new Wait For activity into the script flowchart and use that one instead. 1. Please note in this connection that for the user-defined events to appear in the Events drop-down list. Run Script The Run Script activity is a reference to another script and consists in executing the whole of that script at the given point in the workflow.0 229 .Chapter 20.

11. use the topmost activity as handle to preserve the ordering of activities. If you are selecting a number of consecutive activities and wish to preserve their ordering after they are moved or pasted. Copy. the sequence depicted below might then be inserted in the while loop to stop execution at 3 p. The activities do not have to be adjacent in the workflow but can be picked arbitrarily. The same operations can be performed from the window toolbar or from the context menu that appears when right-clicking a workflow item. When dragging a selection to a new position in the sequence.m.) The destination of a pasted item depends on what. Ctrl-click the activities from top to bottom in the same order as they come in the workflow. You can also edit workflows using the Cut. cut. 20. For example. The Wait For should then have Trigger = Schedule and Start = “Time of Day”. and Paste commands found in the Edit menu of the Service Control Designer window. (Whatever activity you use as handle will end up on top. if anything. One possible application of this activity is to combine it with Wait For to stop a script at a fixed time of day.1 User’s Manual 20. is currently selected in the workflow: • • • 230 .8. The editing commands work in standard Windows fashion. Terminate The Terminate activity simply kills the whole script immediately and unconditionally.TEMS Investigation 14. Editing Workflows and Script Settings You can move activities around in the workflow by clicking and dragging. or copy by holding Ctrl and clicking.10. A few points merit special comment: • You can select multiple activities to move. suppose the script contains a while loop.

or terminate the entire script (On Failure property). and paste material in text fields. Activities tab: see section 9. The keyboard shortcuts Ctrl + C. UE Control Functionality A number of control functions accessible from the Navigator (Equipment tab. or Parallel activity 1. 20. • • Activity Properties That Control Execution All activities have some general properties governing their execution: If an activity fails. Service Control Item(s) Selected in Workflow None One or more arrows. etc. 20.1) can also be applied in a script in the form of activities. Regarding editing of text input fields in the Properties and Configuration Sets panes. you can choose to skip that activity. For full details. You can have an activity aborted after a fixed length of time. use the context menu in the text field. it must be noted that the script activities are inevitably more generic in nature than the manual control functions. bottom part.13.12.0 231 . While.Chapter 20. the Band Lock activity has bands from every supported technology selectable. see section 20. whereas the manual band lock function in the Navigator (acting as it does on a specific device of a well-defined make NT12-7002 ver 1.2. For the RAT lock and band lock functions. Any except the ones mentioned in subsequent table rows.. cannot be used for this purpose. note the following: • To copy. retry the activity. or if a specific event occurs (Abort property). cut.17. since when composing a script it is not known what devices the activities will apply to. Therefore. no activity One or more activities1 Paste Destination Bottom of workflow Above arrow first selected Below activity first selected Bottom of sequence – (cannot paste) Sequence activity If–Else.

15.15.5. In the latter case.TEMS Investigation 14. except when the devices engage in a service where they interact. • 232 . Running Scripts You can run a script either from the Service Control Monitor or from the Service Control Designer. all branches are synchronized before the execution proceeds past the point of convergence. 20. In conclusion. See section 20.14 on validation).15. See section 20. you will receive a notification “Script validation succeeded”.5. when building more complex scripts involving multiple devices and control logic. However. Validation is also crucial for UE control functionality (see section 20. 20. You will be presented with the results. If the script passes validation. A script is automatically validated when you start it.14. The script is then ready to be run. and when devices are involved in different workflow branches that converge.13). You will be notified if this is not the case (see section 20. this may seem trivial. How to run only parts of a script is described in section 20.15.16. a UE control activity in a script can be executed only if the target device is capable of the operation in question. it needs to be validated to ensure that it is syntactically correct and does not assign tasks that your devices do not support. You can also explicitly have a script validated in advance: • • Enter the Script menu and choose Validate. 20. Validating Scripts Before a script is run.1 for full details on the UE control activities.1 User’s Manual and model) can only lock on the bands supported by the device.1. General Aspects of Script Execution • The devices involved in a script will execute their assigned activities independently of one another. For uncomplicated scripts like our first example in section 20. the validation becomes a non-trivial issue.

2.1.15. the keylock function must not be activated in any of the phones.Chapter 20. Click the Stop Script button to stop script execution.3. See the Getting Started Manual. 20.15. Running Scripts from the Service Control Monitor Click the Open Script button and select your script (file extension . however.15. Monitoring Equipment Status On the Status tab of the Service Control Monitor. this is not recommended.1 for further details and instructions.15. Otherwise.0 233 . you should wait until the receiving device has received the message before restarting the script. the current status for each device is displayed. Windows 7/Windows Vista and IPv6 In Windows 7 and Windows Vista. 20. Service Control • It is possible in the application to run several scripts at the same time. If it is. Click the Run Script button to start the script. If a device is engaged in multiple concurrent service sessions. • • 20. one line is printed for each session. (The script validation does not extend to such usage. If you stop a script while an SMS or MMS message is being transferred.3. unpredictable behavior may result.) When executing a script. Preparations 20.2. it is recommended that you disable IPv6 for all device modems.2.1.15.tsc). the script will not work properly. section 8. NT12-7002 ver 1.

15. Viewing Statistics on Script Execution On the Summary tab of the Service Control Monitor. statistics are given on the outcome of each activity type (number of succeeded.15.3). and failed activities). Click the Return to Designer button to return to the Service Control Designer window. Click the Stop Script button to stop script execution. The tab holding the usual contents of the window is now hidden and replaced by Status and Summary tabs which are identical with those in the Service Control Monitor (see section 20. aborted.TEMS Investigation 14. Running Scripts from the Service Control Designer • Enter the Script menu and choose Run. 234 .3.1 User’s Manual 20. Below is an example (UDP with full duplex tested): 20.15. Clicking an underlined number in this table brings up a summary of each activity that has been run.4.2.

Service Control 20. After disabling the sequence comprising the first two activities. An activity that is currently disabled appears dimmed in the workflow pane. For example.0 235 . You can easily disable any individual activity by right-clicking it or by changing the Enabled flag in the Properties pane.5. Suppressing Parts of a Script It may happen that you want to run only certain parts of a script and exclude others. the flowchart looks like this: NT12-7002 ver 1.Chapter 20.15. as shown below. suppose we want to skip the initial detach/attach procedure.

For example. Band Lock Locks the device to a subset of frequency bands. 236 . • Bands property: Specify band or bands to lock on.17. Control Activities 20.1.15.16. 20. (Define a configuration for each AT command you want to send. 20. This activity has no unique properties.1.1.1 User’s Manual Note: Be sure not to disable an activity that another activity is dependent on. 20.) 20.6. Presentation of Data Service Testing See section 9.1. The details are analogous to the manual band lock function on the Navigator’s Equipment tab.16.1. Activities (Reference Section) This section also explains all activity-specific properties found in the Properties pane: that is. Activate Activates the device so that it can be used in TEMS Investigation. • AT Command property: AT command string.5.2).1. those not covered in section 20. see section 9.TEMS Investigation 14. 20.1.3. Not all activities have unique properties. To re-enable a disabled activity.2. AT Sends an AT command.3.16. do not suppress an activity whose outcome is used to evaluate a subsequent If–Else condition (see section 20. just set the Enable property to True again.16.10.16.

The following characters are ignored if entered in this field: \ / : * ? ' < > | Directory property: The directory where logfiles produced by the script will be stored. 20.1.16.0 237 .8. Radio Access Technology Lock Locks the device to a particular radio access technology (RAT). see section 11. NT12-7002 ver 1. and Tags properties: These correspond to the identically named metadata fields that you can define when recording a logfile manually. device channels cannot be distinguished (for example.1.16. Start Recording Starts recording of a logfile. Filemark Enables automatic filemarks. Deactivate Deactivates the device so that it can no longer be used in TEMS Investigation until you activate it again (using Activate.16.1).Chapter 20.16. This activity has no unique properties.1.6. Prefix property: You can add a descriptive prefix to the default logfile name. Description. Subject.8) that concludes the recording and closes the logfile. Service Control 20.7) and closes the logfile.1. recording MS but not DC for a particular device).1. The selection is made at the EQ level. • Technology property: Specify the RAT to lock on.4.5. • • • 20. A Start Recording activity must be paired with a Stop Recording activity (see section 20.4.1.1.16. or else manually from the Navigator – see section 8.1.1. 20. See section 11. The choice “No Technology” releases a lock that has been previously applied.16.7. Stop Recording Concludes the recording of a logfile initiated by a Start Recording activity (see section 20. 20.1. • Equipment property: Here you select which devices to include in the recording. • Filemark property: Filemark text string. By default all EQs are selected.16.

If you want to avoid this. See section 11. as explained in section 11.16. however. If–Else This activity splits the workflow into two or more branches.1.10. Each condition (except the catch-all “Any”: see below) is based on the outcome of a previous activity. “startRecordingActivity1”).TEMS Investigation 14. those that have some device-specific activity assigned to them).1.2.2. For example. The automatic data buffering in TEMS Investigation may result in overlap between logfiles. set Condition Type to Activity Result.9. At the top level the If–Else activity does not have any unique properties. Notes on Script-controlled Logfile Recording Note that logfiles always record data from all activated devices. identified by its name (e.16. insert Wait activities (of duration 15 s) as needed in your script to separate Stop Recording activities from Start Recording activities that will follow immediately in the execution flow. in a loop that begins with Start Recording and ends with Stop Recording. 20. insert a Wait at the end. Other methods of recording are independent of scripted recording and do not affect a script that is executing. is constituted by an “if–else branch” activity which has the following property: • Condition Type property: To define a non-trivial condition. The following attributes are then visible: 238 . please turn to section 20. with a boolean condition attached to each branch.16. Evaluation of conditions proceeds from left to right. Control Flow Activities For a hands-on tutorial on how to use these activities.g. Each branch of the construct. 20. 20.4.1.e.1.1 User’s Manual • Recording Activity property: Here you select which Start Recording activity to stop. not only the devices that participate in the script (i.

20. One of: Succeeded. NT12-7002 ver 1. While loops can be nested arbitrarily. Service Control Activity: The activity (identified by its name in the workflow) whose outcome will determine the value of the boolean expression. There is no hard limit on the number of branches. While This activity constitutes a while loop.2.) Event: The while loop is terminated when any of the selected events is reported by the selected equipment.10. Stopped by Event. the while loop does not terminate immediately. This activity has no unique properties. Parallel This activity splits the workflow unconditionally into two or more branches.2.16. Each of the parallel branches is encapsulated within a Sequence activity (see section 20. Time: Fixed execution time. Operator: Boolean operator: “Equals” or “NotEquals”. This value should always be used as a catch-all condition for the rightmost if–else branch.0 239 . see section 20.3. see section 20.16.) For an example of usage.5). Stopped by Timeout. provided that the device supports concurrent execution of the services involved (or several sessions using the same service).16. Setting Condition Type to “Any” creates a condition that always evaluates to true.Chapter 20. For an example of usage.2. rather.2. Stopped by User. Result: The activity result that you want to match. 20.10. When this duration expires. (The running time is compared to the limit before a new turn begins. (The If–Else construct is set up in that way by default. A device can participate in more than one branch.3.2. Failed. • Condition Type property: Count: Fixed number of iterations. the current turn is completed first.

6. see section 20. Furthermore. 20.16.16.10.1 User’s Manual For usage examples. See also section 20. For usage examples.8. 20. (For example. It has no unique properties. see sections 20. 240 .tsc) that you want to call.5. the Wait activity comes in useful whenever some other tasks need to be separated in time.. Sequence This control structure formally defines a sequence of activities as a unit. Wait The Wait activity basically does nothing at all.10. 20.7. allowing it to be treated as such.TEMS Investigation 14.4.16. Terminate This activity terminates the entire script immediately. After the wait time has expired.4.2. Run Script This activity calls another script and is equivalent to inserting the whole of that script in its place.10..) This activity has no unique properties. the Wait has the apparent effect of giving duration to the call. and 20.2.2.3. Wait For This is a conditional wait which lasts until a given condition is satisfied. The Duration property governs how long to wait.10.2. the entire sequence can be enabled or disabled in a single action.4.1. and this construction is the most convenient method of controlling the call length. see section 20. 20.1. as exemplified in section 20. the execution proceeds to the next activity. 20.2.10.5. 20.16. When following a (voice) Dial or Video Dial activity. It should be stored in the same directory as the calling script.10. The situation with Start .16. For an example of usage. and in effect it temporarily halts the execution of the workflow branch where it is located.16. Scan activities is similar. 20.9.8.2. • Script to Run property: Browse for the script file (*.7.

Time. Start = Time of Day: Wait for a specified time of day (Time). Repeat.10. Start = On The Hour: Wait for a new hour to begin. and Repeat Interval appear where you set up the schedule. What it does is to reiterate the “wait for” procedure at regular intervals whose length is defined by Repeat Interval. Equivalent to Time of Day with Time = hh:00:00. stated in the format hh:mm:ss. • Start = Immediately: No wait. • • • NT12-7002 ver 1.10. Repeat: This option is intended to be used in loops and has an effect only within such a structure.6. Additional fields Start. Its use is best illustrated by an example.10. This option is intended to be used in loops together with the Repeat option. see below. Service Control • Trigger property: This property determines what to wait for.Chapter 20. See the example in section 20. Event: Wait for an event to occur.1.0 241 .6. Additional fields Equipment and Events appear where you specify the desired event(s) and the device(s) that should report it. the wait will end as soon as any of the devices reports any of the events. An example is given in section 20. see section 20.2. An implicit OR relationship holds among devices as well as among events. If Repeat is set to No. Schedule: Wait for a point in time determined by a schedule (which is unrelated to any device activity).1.6. That is. there will be no repetitions. if you specify multiple devices and/or multiple events.

again.17. Result = Stopped by User: The activity was stopped by the user clicking the Stop Script button. Operator. 242 . 1. Result = Failed: The activity failed for whatever reason (other than termination by the TEMS Investigation user). Result appear where you detail the required outcome: for example. see section 20.10.2.TEMS Investigation 14.6. Result = Stopped by Event: The activity was aborted because a specific event occurred (Abort property set to On Event. • You must yourself ensure that the monitored activity has a position in the work flow where it will in fact complete to terminate the Wait For activity.2).1 User’s Manual Activity Result: Wait for a particular outcome of another activity in the script. • • • • Result = Succeeded: The activity completed normally. “Stopped by User” equates to the user right-clicking the activity in the Navigator and choosing Stop. Additional fields Activity. “ftpDownloadActivity1 Equals Failed”. If the activity is executed manually from the Navigator as described in chapter 9. This can happen only if the activity has its Abort property set to On Timeout: see section 20.17. For usage examples. This is not considered during validation.1 Result = Stopped by Duration: The activity was aborted because its maximum duration expired. see section 20.

) NT12-7002 ver 1.) If your data collecting device is unable to perform the IP sniffing. a Network Connection Lost event is generated. Service Control 20.Chapter 20. If an Network Connect has previously succeeded but the connection goes down later on. the phone works like an ordinary modem and performs a dial-up. Whether NDIS or RAS is used is governed by the Mode parameter. as detailed under Configuration below.1. Ericsson Fixed Wireless Terminals must use an NDIS data connection.16. IP Activities 20. – Some LTE devices must be connected to the network manually. a PDP context is activated (UMTS) or a PPP session established (CDMA). or you can ignore failure to start IP sniffing and go ahead with the execution anyway: ignoreIPSniffError="true".config. in the circuit-switched case. whereas RAS can be used with both PS and CS. no KPI data can be collected.3. setting up an NDIS connection requires prior configuration using a software application delivered with the device. (This IP sniffing collects only data needed for KPIs and is distinct from the full-scale variety which is initiated by the Start IP Sniffing activity. Network Connect Establishes a data service connection. you must still include a Network Connect activity in your script. Please note that in either case.3. you can work around that problem by editing a line in the file <TEMS Investigation install dir>\Application\Investigation.1. – For other LTE devices. using their connection manager applications.3. Note: For certain devices. NDIS can be chosen for packetswitched only.16. rather than automatically in the Service Control script. the connection manager must be started to enable the Network Connect activity in scripts.0 243 . (NDIS only. A side-effect of the Network Connect activity is to start a restricted form of IP sniffing that is performed continuously for the sake of collecting input to KPI calculations. In the packet-switched case.16. See section 20.1 below for specifics in this regard on various devices and device categories.exe. which by default reads: <dataServicesConfiguration ipSniffEnabled="true" ignoreIPSniffError="false" /> You can either disable IP sniffing by setting ipSniffEnabled="false". Be aware that in these cases.

6. section 10. see the Getting Started Manual.TEMS Investigation 14. For an NDIS connection to be establishable. NDIS CID: The CID (Connection Identifier) to connect with when NDIS is used. the second Network Connect will fail. If “Best available” is chosen. • If set to True. NDIS is first and RAS is second priority. and on the Summary tab of the Service Control Monitor it will be noted that a connection was already available. • No matter how this parameter is set. For UMTS this is usually *99#. UMTS/LTE APN: The Access Point Name to use for UMTS and LTE networks. Succeed If Already Connected: This parameter governs what will happen if the device already has a network connection (a valid IP address) set up by other means when the Network Connect activity is run. if a CID other than 1 is to be used you need to specify that value.1 User’s Manual • Configuration property: Mode: Technology to use for connecting to the network: NDIS or RAS. the Network Connect activity will count as successful anyway. as follows: *99***n#. For TD-SCDMA.1. Leave this field empty if an APN is specified in the device (always needed for NDIS) or for the modem in Windows. RAS Phone Number: Phone number to use when performing a RAS dial. If you do. This setting is useful if you want to be able to run Network Connect without full knowledge of the device’s previous activities. 244 . Regarding devices for which the APN must be configured differently. The parameter is not applicable to other cellular technologies. you cannot run the Network Connect activity twice without an intervening Network Disconnect. the Network Connect activity will count as a failure. enter *98*1#. however. the device must of course support NDIS. for example using an external connection manager. For CDMA/EV-DO. and you wish to avoid triggering a failure just because the device was already connected. enter #777. If set to False.

Password: Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection.0 245 . (Property of PS bearer.) Not applicable to circuit-switched. • NT12-7002 ver 1.16. MS910. do not use a CM. and preconnected Network Connect will be used. 20. The Network Connect activity that is run in TEMS Investigation in cases where the connection setup needs assistance from outside the application is referred to below as “preconnected Network Connect”.1. For “connection manager”. enter user and password here. Use Header Compression: Use of header compression for packetswitched. Network Connect performed from within TEMS Investigation is referred to as “scripted Network Connect”.3. G13. (Property of PS bearer.Chapter 20. the connection must be set up either from a CM or from the device menu system. the shorthand “CM” is used below for convenience. Primary DNS: IP address of the primary domain name server. LG LTE Devices • • For LG LTE USB modems. Leave blank if the IP address is provided automatically by the operator. Network Connect Prerequisites for Various Devices This subsection details the behavior and requirements of a variety of devices with respect to the Network Connect (and Network Disconnect) activities. Secondary DNS: IP address of the secondary domain name server. Service Control User Name. LD611. LG Android LTE smartphones using an NDIS connection require tethered network connection setup from the device menu system and preconnected Network Connect. MS840. P936. IP Address: Local IP address. Doing so will cause a port conflict. Leave blank if this is provided automatically by the operator.1. LG Generic: If the device is detected as “LG Generic”. Use Data Compression: Use of data compression for packetswitched. G7. VL600. If this is the case for you. Examples of models: LS840. Leave blank if this is provided automatically by the operator. Examples of models: AD600. FM300.) Not applicable to circuit-switched.

Novatel MC996D. If no AT port is available. then start the CM or enable tethering from the device menu system. R910. GT-B3710: Some older firmware of this device without an AT port requires that the CM should be running. no CM should be used with any such devices. TEMS Investigation then communicates with the CM to control the connection. GT-B3730. With newer firmware. ZTE Z006Z. TEMS Investigation will use that port to perform a scripted Network Connect. If the device firmware exposes an AT port. R920. You cannot have the CM running when executing the Network Connect and Network Disconnect activities. GT-B3740: Samsung GT-B3730 and Samsung devices with AT support on the LTE Control Port (such as GT-B3740) have support for scripted Network Connect.1 User’s Manual Qualcomm LTE Devices (MDM9x00 Chipsets) • • • Normally. Samsung Android LTE smartphones do not have a CM accompanying them. provided they are detected as Sierra Wireless devices in TEMS Investigation.TEMS Investigation 14. Huawei E353. TEMS Investigation will try to open that port and use it to control the network connection. then the device must be configured using a CM. 246 . If scripted Network Connect fails. R900. Qualcomm Android LTE smartphones generally require preconnected Network Connect. If no AT port is present in the operating system. or if the port is blocked. since a port conflict will then occur (both TEMS Investigation and the CM communicate with AT commands over the LTE Control Port). the device behaves like GT-B3730/3740: see next paragraph. and TEMS Investigation will use preconnected Network Connect instead. • • • Qualcomm HSPA+ Devices and Other Devices • • Sierra Wireless devices should not need to have a CM running. R820. or tethering must be enabled in the device menu system (preconnected Network Connect performed in either case). Samsung LTE Devices • General procedure: If an AT port exists for the device. ZTE N910. Huawei M920. No CM should then be used. a tethered connection must be set up. R940. Examples of models: I510. These NDIS devices should likewise not require use of a CM: Huawei E1820. and a preconnected Network Connect will be performed.

3. PS Detach Performs a packet service detach. 20.16. Note that this activity may not be needed since the device may have automatically attached to a PS network when powered on. This activity has no unique properties. This activity has no unique properties. this activity has no effect. no CM should ever be needed. it is still necessary to include a Network Disconnect activity in the script. (Same behavior as for Network Connect with Succeed If Already Connected set to True.3.2. • • For Qualcomm devices using a RAS connection. an NDIS connection must be terminated using the PC application accompanying the device (compare the Network Connect activity. you can start the CM or enable tethering from the device menu system. Network Disconnect Terminates a data service connection. and scripted Network Connect should work fine.3. but it still counts as successful on the Summary tab of the Service Control Monitor.4.1).Chapter 20.16. 20.3. Devices not mentioned in the foregoing generally require preconnected Network Connect. 20. in the circuit-switched case the phone performs a hang-up.16. If the device is already disconnected. PS Attach Performs a packet service attach. For certain NDIS-capable devices. NT12-7002 ver 1. Service Control If scripted Network Connect fails.16. In the packet-switched case a PDP context is deactivated (UMTS) or a PPP session ended (CDMA).) This activity has no unique properties.3.0 247 . Note that in such cases. This activity may be useful to make sure that the phone is not attached to the packet service when starting a measurement (for example. if it has attached automatically at power-on). section 20. and TEMS Investigation will use preconnected Network Connect instead.

5.1 User’s Manual 20. SIP Register Causes the device to register with a SIP or IMS server.16. This is a necessary preparation for a VoIP call.TEMS Investigation 14. May be omitted.7.16. Password: Password for the server account. Start IP Sniffing Starts capture of IP packets. Note that you do not have to use this command to obtain the data required for KPIs. 20.16. User Name: User name of account on the server.3. see sections 20. a valid server name must be entered here. 248 .16. SIP Unregister Causes the device to unregister from a SIP or IMS server used for VoIP. Compare chapter 33.7. A user account must exist on the server. 20.6.3.3.6. This activity has no unique properties.16.7. Domain: The domain to register with. 20.5. such data is collected automatically. If Proxy is not used. • Configuration property: Proxy: The proxy server to use.

20.9. Stop IP Sniffing Stops capture of IP packets initiated by the Start IP Sniffing activity. protocol [TCP/UDP].Chapter 20. If you choose a fixed packet size. • Optimized Performance: Capture of IP packets is reduced to the minimum needed to compute KPIs.16. Filter: Type of filtering to apply to IP packets. any further bytes in the message will be truncated.0 249 .3. (Packets are filtered with respect to IP address.16.) • • The information element TCP Packet Loss and the event IP Interruption Time require that the Filter parameter not be set to “Optimized Performance”.3. NT12-7002 ver 1. and port. This activity has no unique properties. 20.16. FTP Download Downloads a file from an FTP server. If you choose Full packet size.8. Please be aware that paths and file names must have correct case throughout. (Packets are filtered with respect to IP address only. all messages are presented in full and the entire header is always decoded. Service Control • Configuration property: Packet Size: Determines how many bytes of each message will be presented. Note: This means that all packets belonging to any service used by the PC will be captured.) Headers Only: The first 54 bytes of every IP packet are captured.15). None: No filtering of IP packets. Note also that you can conduct TCP load tests with the Network Bandwidth activity (see section 20. This is frequently the preferable setting.3.

Server Port: The port on which the FTP server listens for requests. Firewall Mode: PASV or PORT.: 0targfile. enabling or disabling passive FTP as defined in  IETF RFC 959. Valid only when Firewall Mode = PORT. srcdir/srcfile. if the file is in the root directory.dat.dat. The address may not contain a path to a subdirectory. if required.dat. The default port number is 21. If the Target File field is left blank. and file name describing where to store the file on your computer. 1targfile. 20. Note that the correct orientation of the slashes is dependent on the FTP server operating system. Password: User password on the FTP server. FTP Upload Uploads a file to an FTP server. Please be aware that paths and file names must have correct case throughout. If multiple FTP Download activities execute in parallel. A session ID (integer) is prefixed to the file name. e. 250 . if required. e. no files are stored. C:\targdir\targfile. this is the default setting. multiple files are created. Local Data Port: The data port the client will use for FTP download.TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual • Configuration property: Source File: The path and name of the file residing on the FTP server.16. No ftp:// prefix is to be used. The drive letter must be included. Account: Account name on the FTP server. e. Note that it is essential to set this correctly.3. each with a unique session ID prefixed to prevent conflicts. User: User name on the FTP server.dat. Server Address: The IP address or host name of the FTP server.g. Target File: Drive letter.10. No explicit root symbol is used (no leading slash).g. if applicable. path. type the file name only.g.

e. if required. A session ID (integer) is prefixed to the file name. Note that it is essential to set this correctly. C:\srcdir\srcfile. Alternatively. NT12-7002 ver 1. K = kilobyte. If you do not specify a unit. Server Port: The port on which the FTP server listens for requests. if applicable. Size to Upload: Size of the file to upload (only valid if Use Temporary File = True).0 251 . 1targfile.dat. path. e.g. if you type a file name only. the number you enter is interpreted as a byte count. if required. each instance must use a unique target file name. No ftp:// prefix is to be used. G = gigabyte.dat. User: User name on the FTP server.: 0targfile. each with a unique session ID prefixed to prevent conflicts. and file name identifying the file to be uploaded.g. enabling or disabling passive FTP as defined in  IETF RFC 959. that if multiple instances of TEMS Investigation installed on different PCs are uploading to the same server. a temporary file is created holding the data to upload. Password: User password on the FTP server. however. The drive letter must be included. multiple files are created. T = terabyte. No explicit root symbol is used. Firewall Mode: PASV or PORT.Chapter 20. Note. The address may not contain a path to a subdirectory. lowercase letters can be used with no difference in meaning. M = megabyte. Server Address: The IP address or host name of the FTP server. Note that the correct orientation of the slashes is dependent on the FTP server operating system. Service Control • Configuration property: Target File: Path and file name describing where and how to store the file on the FTP server. no file is created. Valid only when Firewall Mode = PORT. If set to False. Use Temporary File: If set to True.dat.dat. The default port number is 21. Local Data Port: The data port the client will use for FTP upload.g. Source File: Drive letter. Account: Account name on the FTP server. the file will be written to the root directory. It is possible to specify the unit as follows: B = byte. targdir/targfile. If multiple FTP Upload activities execute in parallel. e.

Internet Explorer: Internet Explorer 9 is used. Proxy Server Port: Proxy server port. Note that the main URL (specified under URL) is downloaded only once.16. • Configuration property: Browser Client: Web browser used to conduct HTTP sessions.1 User’s Manual 20. This is supported under Windows 7 and Vista. TEMS Investigation can only make use of a single Internet Explorer session running on the PC. regardless of the number of threads. The time is counted from the moment the first HTTP packet is received from the server. Regarding concurrency limitations.TEMS Investigation 14. Use Proxy Server: Select whether to use a proxy server for this connection. HTTP Get Downloads a URL from an HTTP server. Enter the number of bytes to download in the Payload Size field that appears. An additional field Time appears for entering the desired session duration. that is. that device cannot execute any other HTTP Get activities at all. see below. but not under Windows XP. in a Service Control script. • • TEMS Browser: The internal Web browser in TEMS Investigation is used. 252 . Proxy Server Address: Proxy server address. While using Internet Explorer. URL: Main URL to download.11. Other devices can however employ the TEMS browser to run HTTP Get while Internet Explorer is in use. Therefore. not even with the TEMS browser. End Session After Payload Size: The HTTP session is ended automatically after a user-specified amount of data has been downloaded. End Session After Time: The HTTP session is ended automatically after a user-specified length of time. Limitations on HTTP Session Concurrency At any given time.3. Client Threads: Number of concurrent threads to be used by the client in handling the HTTP session. Internet Explorer use is limited to one device at a time running one HTTP Get activity.

CL (Connectionless). or WP-HTTP (Wireless Profiled HTTP).Chapter 20. 9200 (CL). Note that WAP pages that redirect the user to a different page cannot be downloaded. • Gateway Address: (Appears when Connection Mode = CO or CL) The IP address of the operator’s WAP gateway. whereas with CL this is not done. The difference between the modes is essentially this: With CO.12. The default is 8080. WP-HTTP is used by WAP 2. Proxy Port: (Appears when Connection Mode = WP-HTTP. neither for a single device nor for multiple devices. but this is optional. This WAP version may use a WAP proxy. Connection Mode: One of CO (Connection-oriented). 20.x and require a WAP gateway. optional) The WAP proxy port number. The default port numbers are 9201 (CO). WAP Get Downloads a page from a WAP server. Gateway Port: (Appears when Connection Mode = CO or CL) The WSP port on the server. optional) The IP address of the WAP proxy. The WAP server can be specified as an IP address or host name. Service Control When the TEMS browser alone is used.0. the http:// prefix is optional.16.0 253 . NT12-7002 ver 1. • CO and CL are used by WAP 1.3. the phone first contacts and performs a handshake with the WAP gateway before starting to request WAP pages. there are no restrictions on HTTP session concurrency. • Configuration property: URL: URL of WAP page to download. Proxy Address: (Appears when Connection Mode = WP-HTTP.

1 20.3. You can let TEMS Investigation run the UDP test in an automated fashion.1 Configuration/CLDC-1.1 User’s Manual User Agent: This is a string indicating. How to install and configure this software is described in the document “TEMS UDP Server User’s Manual”.4. Ping Initiates a sequence of pings. . found on the installation CD in 254 . Max Response Time: Maximum time to wait for each ping response. UDP testing is done against a PC that is running the application TEMS UDP Server. The application will then start out at a low throughput rate and gradually increase the throughput until the packet loss becomes excessive. Number of Pings: The number of pings to send. Interval Time: Time between consecutive pings. (Some WAP portals adapt their contents to the devices accessing them.14.TEMS Investigation 14. the make and model of the device and what WAP software it has installed.1 JavaPlatform/JP-8. Packet Size: Size in bytes of the packet sent with the Ping activity.. even if the service does not require these safeguards. Given in the format hh:mm:ss. UDP Data transfer tests using the UDP protocol is a good way to determine the optimum data throughput rate for services that tolerate a given degree of data loss. .13. There is no upper limit..4 Profile/ MIDP-2.16.3.) Example of User Agent string (for Sony Ericsson W995): User-Agent: SonyEricssonW995/R1DB Browser/NetFront/3. among other things.ddd.ddd. UDP is more suitable than TCP for this purpose.. 20..16. The maximum size is 2000 bytes. Given in the format hh:mm:ss. since the rigorous acknowledgement and retransmission mechanisms of TCP (designed to guarantee full data integrity) will always slow down data throughput. • Configuration property: Remote Address: The IP address or host name of the server to be pinged.

• Configuration property: Remote Address: The IP address or host name of the UDP server. this is the packet rate in each direction. However. Please note that you cannot test Full Duplex in automatic mode. Service Control the subdirectory Documents. you specify the parameter values yourself.0 255 . If you select manual mode. Specify the TCP control port to use here. using the parameters below. when you change one parameter the others will be adjusted so that the above equation still holds true. The packet and throughput parameters work as follows. In this case. Receive: The server sends UDP data to the client. The TEMS Investigation application has a UDP client built into it which interacts with this server. Full Duplex: Data is sent in both directions concurrently. TCP Control Port: The TCP protocol is used in setting up the UDP session and also to communicate the test results after the session has concluded.Chapter 20. Packet Size: The UDP packet size (in bytes) that will be used. the parameters from Packets Per Second onward (see below) are set automatically and are not editable. NT12-7002 ver 1. see the introductory text above. Packets per Second: Number of UDP packets to send or receive per second. Manual: You specify the data rate and packet rate yourself. all parameters are set by the application and cannot be edited. Duration (sec): The duration of the UDP session. UDP Mode: • Automatic: The TEMS Investigation UDP client will automatically determine the optimum data rate. If you select automatic mode. since the parameters are constrained by the relation (packets per second)  (packet size) = throughput. For Full Duplex mode. Throughput (kbit/s): The UDP throughput rate that will be used. • Direction: • • • Send: The client sends UDP data to the server.

They do not indicate the amount successfully transferred to the server.16.4. is comparable to assigning multiple concurrent FTP activities to a device.3.3.3. It must be kept in mind that the uplink UDP information elements in the category Data. In contrast. UDP testing with the Network Bandwidth activity is similar to the UDP activity. see the example in section 20. on the other hand. See section 20. section 5. Therefore. see section 20.3. • Configuration property: 256 . section 3.15. Network Bandwidth (Iperf Testing) This activity measures maximum TCP and UDP bandwidth performance by interacting with an Iperf server. you must download the Iperf software and install it on the desired machine.1 User’s Manual Further Notes on UDP Testing Statistics on completed UDP sessions are output on the Summary tab of the Service Control Monitor. just as for other service sessions.16. which are updated continuously in the course of the UDP session (see Information Elements and Events.6 for details. Before you can use this activity. To find out what percentage of packets was actually received by the UDP server.15. The client uses TCP to obtain this information from the server after the UDP session has concluded.10. you need to check the summary statistics in the Service Control Monitor.8) only indicate the amount of data sent. 20.TEMS Investigation 14. when the packet loss rate becomes nonnegligible. See the Getting Started Manual. the UDP Download Throughput is always accurate. Measuring over TCP. the UDP Upload Throughput information element is no longer reliable.2.14.

Telnet/SSH2 section Connection Client: Either Telnet or SSH2 can be used as protocol. Listen Port: See above. UDP section (used for UDP only) Bandwidth: UDP bandwidth (throughput) in Mbit/s. Service Control General section Remote Address: The IP address or host name of the remote server. no such port is specified. Use Listen Port: True or False. set this parameter to True and enter the port under Listen Port. Buffer Size: UDP buffer size in kilobytes. Receive: The server sends data to the client. Port: Port on the remote server. Please note that SSH2 requires a special TEMS Investigation license option.6. User: User name on the remote server. section 5.0 257 . see the Getting Started Manual. Password: Password on the remote server. Direction: • • • Send: The client sends data to the server. Protocol: The protocol to use for Iperf testing: TCP or UDP. Port: The port on which the Iperf server listens for requests. Path: Path to Iperf on the remote server. Duration: The duration of the Iperf testing session (hh:mm:ss). If you want to specify a port on which TEMS Investigation should listen for data (not required).Chapter 20. If you set the parameter to False. NT12-7002 ver 1. Full Duplex: Data is sent in both directions concurrently. Packet Size: UDP packet size in bytes.2.

16. To: E-mail address of recipient. • Configuration property: From: E-mail address of sender.4.16.16. Attachment: (Optional) Name of file to enclose with the e-mail as attachment. SSL/TLS: SSL or TLS is used during the whole e-mail session. 20. User: User name of e-mail account. Password: Password for e-mail account. Messaging Activities 20. E-mail Send Sends an e-mail to an SMTP server. but a STARTTLS command is issued later on to set up a secure session.16.3. Security: • • • None: No security is applied. Server Port: The port on which the SMTP server listens for requests. STARTTLS: The initial communication is not encrypted. Body Text File: Name of file containing e-mail body text. all with the following structure: PS Detach  PS Attach  Network Connect  <data service activity>  Network Disconnect.1. it is best to use a sequence structure with a waiting period: E-mail Send  Wait  E-mail Receive. Subject: Content of e-mail Subject field.4. Predefined Snippets for IP One snippet is provided for each data service related activity. When composing an e-mail script controlling both sender and receiver.TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual 20. 258 . Server Address: The IP address or host name of the SMTP server.

All e-mail contents are written to a single file: header fields.16.4.4. 20. User: User name of e-mail account.16. SSL/TLS: SSL or TLS is used during the whole e-mail session. NT12-7002 ver 1. the same as for the WAP Get activity. MMS Send Sends an MMS. but a STARTTLS command is issued later on to set up a secure session. and attachments (if any).3. When composing an e-mail script controlling both sender and receiver. Service Control 20. see section 20.16.12. Security: • • • None: No security is applied. Server Port: The port on which the POP3 server listens for requests.16. STARTTLS: The initial communication is not encrypted. • Configuration property: Gateway section These are WAP settings.Chapter 20.3.3. When composing an MMS script controlling both sender and receiver. See sections 20. it is best to use a Parallel structure.0 259 . body text. Store Location: Full path to directory in which to store e-mails. • Configuration property: Server Address: The IP address or host name of the POP3 server. E-mail Receive Receives an e-mail from a POP3 server.10. it is best to use a sequence structure with a waiting period: E-mail Send  Wait  E-mail Receive.4 and 20.2.2. Password: Password for e-mail account.

Multiple recipients can be specified. Note that the phone acting as recipient must not have automatic MMS download turned on (where the phone retrieves the MMS message from the MMS Center automatically as soon as it receives a notification). MMS Message Center section URL: The URL of the MMS Center (usually beginning with http://).4.1 User’s Manual MMS Content section To: The phone number(s) or e-mail address(es) to send the MMS to. 20. is supported. 260 . see section 20. Gateway section: These are WAP settings.TEMS Investigation 14. see section 20. Please note that operators generally impose a limit on the MMS file size. • Configuration property: Connection Parameters section: Same as for Network Connect. try sending very small files to find out whether the size limit is causing the problem.1.4. The MMS Receive activity needs its own connection parameters since logging in to the MMS Center frequently requires connecting to a different APN. MMS Receive Receives an MMS. A file with an extension unknown to TEMS Investigation will be sent as an attachment to the MMS (content type “application/octet-stream”). separated by semicolons. If you encounter problems sending MMS messages.3. including plain-text files and frequently used image file formats. A wide variety of file types. The receiving device can be identical with the sender. Attachment: The file to send.3.16. Password: Login credentials for MMS Center. if required.16. the same as for the WAP Get activity.12.16. Message: Free text field containing the text message of the MMS (if any). User.

16. Delivery Report Timeout: Time to wait for the delivery report. Service Control 20. AT+CMGW. CDMA: AT+MODE. the phone must therefore support the following AT commands: • • • UMTS: AT+CMGF with format 0 or 1 and AT-CMGS. NT12-7002 ver 1. Request Delivery Report: Set this to True if you want the device to request a delivery report from the SMS Center.5. SMS Send Sends an SMS.Chapter 20. The SMS service is implemented with AT commands. Configuration property: Receiving Device: The phone number or e-mail address to send the SMS to. set this parameter to False.4. and AT+CMSS. Use Custom SMS Center: Set this to True if you want to make use of an SMS Center other than the one specified on the SIM. The receiving device may be identical with the sender. SMS Center: Phone number to SMS Center. For SMS Send activities to work. SMS Message: SMS message string.0 261 . To stick with the SMS Center indicated on the SIM.

and no configurations have yet been defined for that activity type. 262 . • • Message Match Pattern: The pattern to use for matching incoming or stored messages. all with the following structure: PS Detach  PS Attach  Network Connect  <data service activity>  Network Disconnect. Reference:  msdn. Scan Activities A scan activity starts or stops a scan task of a specified type. Use a Wait activity between Start and Stop to specify the duration of the scan. Search Text Messages in Device: If set to True.4.16. If no match is found. The syntax is that of . SMS Receive Receives an SMS. the activity waits for a matching message to arrive.90).6.com/en-us/library/hs600312(v=VS. • Configuration property: Match Type: • Regular expression: Enter regular expression under Message Match Pattern to match whole message text.microsoft. If the field is left empty. The point of doing this is to catch a message already received by the device before it performs the SMS Receive activity. 20.TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual 20. • Scanner property: Here you select the type of scanner to use.aspx Starts with: Enter string under Message Match Pattern to match beginning of message text.5. Ends with: Enter string under Message Match Pattern to match end of message text. then you need to make a selection in the Scanner drop-down box to enable the Configuration Sets pane. Please note that if you add a scan activity to the workflow. The choice made here determines the contents of the Configuration property.16.NET Framework regular expressions. SMS messages stored in the device will be searched for matching messages.4. any message will match.7.16. Predefined Snippets for Messaging One snippet is provided for each messaging activity. 20.

4 18. Descr. These are all described in chapters 14–19.5 16.2 14.Chapter 20. Below is a full list of the scan activities.6 19.4 19.4 16.3 15.3 18. 15.5 18.3 Scan Activity Start/Stop CPICH Scan Start/Stop Enhanced Power Scan Start/Stop Narrowband Interference Scan Start/Stop Network Scan Start/Stop Pilot Scan Start/Stop PN Scan Start/Stop Preamble Scan Start/Stop RS Scan Start/Stop RSSI Scan Technology WCDMA LTE CDMA WCDMA TD-SCDMA CDMA WiMAX LTE GSM WCDMA LTE TD-SCDMA CDMA WiMAX Start/Stop Spectrum Scan GSM WCDMA LTE CDMA WiMAX Start/Stop Timeslot Scan WCDMA NT12-7002 ver 1.3 17.5 15.3 16.2 15. Service Control • Configuration property: Scan configuration.4 14.2 16.4 18. to Config.5 15. identical to that for a manually initiated scan.6 17.0 263 .3 19. keyed to their configuration descriptions: Ref.

This activity has no unique properties. All of these have the following structure: Start .1.16. If this event does not occur. the device waits for the event Call Established. Streaming Download streaming video from a streaming server and play it in TEMS Investigation. • Configuration property: Phone Number: The complete phone number (including country code) to call..16. #. Predefined Snippets for Scanning One snippet is provided for each scan type..6. 20. Video Dial Dials a phone number and sets up a video call. 9..17. see section 20. see chapter 27.1.6. *.16. The retry behavior is governed by the On Failure property. Scan. 20.2. 0.. For a general discussion of video streaming testing.5.16. 20. Scan  Wait  Stop . Answer Waits for an incoming video call to arrive and answers it when it arrives.TEMS Investigation 14.16.2.6. After dialing.2..4.16.6. . Video Activities 20. This activity has no unique properties. 264 .1 User’s Manual 20.3..7. Hang Up Hangs up a video call.6.16.. and p (for pause). The call duration is most conveniently specified by means of a subsequent Wait activity. see section 20. 20. the device may retry the call. Valid characters are: +.

Streaming Duration: For Streaming Mode = “Live”. File To Stream: The file name of the video clip or streaming session description to be downloaded from the streaming server. NT12-7002 ver 1.6. “Live” means tapping into a live stream or repeating playlist delivered by a streaming server. Streaming Server: The IP address or host name of the streaming server. the activity terminates. Rebuffer Length: Length (in seconds) of segment to buffer during rebuffering.5. RTP Port: Here you specify ports to use for RTP on your PC.Chapter 20. The format is . Prebuffer Length: Length (in seconds) of segment to buffer during initial buffering. The port entered and the three following ports will be allocated to RTP data. WAP Streaming This activity is used to do streaming via a WAP page. Min: 1 s. Streaming Mode: “Normal” means downloading a video clip of known length (on-demand streaming).0 265 . Service Control • Configuration property: RTSP Port: The RTSP port on the streaming server. By default ports 5004–5007 are used. 20. When this time has expired. specify the duration of the streaming session here.16. Max: 20 s. Proxy Address: The IP address or host name of the RTSP proxy. The default port number is 554. Min: 1 s. Use Proxy Server: Specify whether to access the streaming server through an RTSP proxy server.3gp. Max: 20 s. Target File: Name and storage location for received streaming file.

you may instruct the device to retry the call.. this should be the number to the Call Generator or MRU: see section 36.. After dialing. The call duration is most conveniently specified by means of a subsequent Wait activity. 9. URL . see section 20.16..6. This activity has no unique properties. • Configuration property: Phone Number: The complete phone number (including country code) to call. section 20.12. For AQM measurement.3. section 20.1 User’s Manual • Configuration property: Streaming Link: The text string of the WAP page RTSP link to the stream that is to be downloaded. the device waits for the event Call Established.7.. User Agent: See the WAP Get activity.6. Valid characters are: +.7. Streaming Mode: See the Streaming activity. 20. 20. RTSP Port .. and p (for pause). The retry behavior is governed by the On Failure property.3. 0.2. Dial Dials a phone number and sets up a circuit-switched voice call.2.4..3.. 20. Predefined Snippets for Video • • Video Call snippet: Video Dial  Wait  Hang Up.16. 266 . *.TEMS Investigation 14. Answer Waits for an incoming CS voice call to arrive and answers it when it arrives.7.16.17. If this event does not occur. WAP Streaming snippet: PS Detach  PS Attach  Network Connect  WAP Streaming  Network Disconnect.1.7. see section 20. #.2.6.16.16. .16. Voice Activities 20.16.

Audio Channel (only used for M2M DL + UL.0 267 . AQM Duration: The length of time for which to collect audio quality measurements (hh:mm:ss).3. during a CS voice call. Hang Up Hangs up a CS voice call. Channel3: Channel for phone connected to LINE IN 3/ LINE OUT 3. 20. Channel4: Channel for phone connected to LINE IN 4/ LINE OUT 4. Service Control 20. Channel2: Channel for phone connected to LINE IN 2/ LINE OUT 2. Please note that POLQA can only be measured in the ACU configuration (Measurement Type = “M2M DL + UL”). • Configuration property: Algorithm: One of PESQ. NT12-7002 ver 1. See chapters 35–37. and POLQA SWB. including PESQ/POLQA.4.16.16. M2M DL + UL: Mobile-to-mobile audio quality measurement using Audio Capturing Unit (ACU).Chapter 20. This activity has no unique properties. POLQA NB. Measurement Type: • • • M2F DL + UL: Mobile-to-fixed audio quality measurement using Call Generator. M2M DL: Mobile-to-mobile audio quality measurement using Mobile Receiving Unit (MRU).7. AQM Measurement Performs audio quality measurement (AQM).7. otherwise has the value “None”): • • • • Channel1: Choose this channel for the phone connected to LINE IN 1/LINE OUT 1 on the ACU.

or AMR-NB.16. Codec Rate: Voice codec rate.16.7. VoIP Dial Dials a voice-over-IP call.16. • Configuration property: Phone Number: The phone number to call.7. Note that the measurements are found in the Media Quality information element category: see Information Elements and Events.8.1\PESQ\Recordings.9.pcm) with an AQM value worse than this threshold value will be stored under My Documents\TEMS Product Files\TEMS Investigation 14. AMR-WB. or AMR-NB. The point of this mechanism is to have poor quality files automatically saved for further study.16.711 A-law. 20. 20. one of: G.16.16. See chapter 38.7. 268 .7.5.9.TEMS Investigation 14. See also section 20. Codec: Voice codec. VoIP Voice Quality Performs audio quality measurement (AQM) including PESQ/POLQA.7.711 A-law. VoIP Hang Up Hangs up a voice-over-IP call. This activity has no unique properties. See also section 20.9. 20.7. • Configuration property: Codec: Voice codec. AMR-WB.1 User’s Manual Recording Threshold (only used for M2M DL + UL): All audio files (*.7. one of: G. section 3. 20. Codec Rate: Voice codec rate.6. VoIP Answer Waits for an incoming voice-over-IP call to arrive and answers it when it arrives.

How to Set Up VoIP Testing A number of things must be observed when setting up and running VoIP scripts.Chapter 20. Both caller and callee must register with the SIP or IMS server to be used for VoIP. This setup is necessary to enable audio quality measurement for VoIP. The callee script must therefore complete its SIP Register activity before the caller script reaches VoIP Dial. Predefined Snippets for Voice • Voice Call snippet (CS): Dial  Wait  Hang Up. one for the caller and one for the callee.9. Below is a summary of the salient points. both fixed and wireless. the callee must be registered before the caller places the call.16. For a full tutorial on testing VoIP. nor any other internet connections in parallel. • The calling device and called device must be connected to different PCs. MOS limit: If the MOS value for an audio file is lower than or equal to this threshold. You cannot have an Ethernet cable connected either.10. Two scripts must be prepared. • • • • • 20. Store AQM files: Yes or No. see the technical paper “VoIP Testing with TEMS Investigation”.7. Predefined VoIP snippets are provided. 20. Service Control • Configuration property: Duration: The length of time for which to collect voice quality measurements. Caller and callee must use the same speech codec. found on the installation CD in the subdirectory Documents. The Duration parameter should be set differently for caller and callee. the audio file will be saved under [My] Documents\TEMS Product Files\TEMS Investigation 14. see section 20. so that it can be controlled which side hangs up the call. NT12-7002 ver 1. All network interfaces except the testing device must be disabled.0 269 .10.7.16. Furthermore.16. You must not have any other measurement devices plugged into either PC when doing VoIP testing. each running an instance of TEMS Investigation.1\PESQ.7.

Stop Script Execution: If an activity fails.1.16 in connection with their respective activities.2. Activity-specific properties are covered in section 20. – Continue Script Execution: If an activity fails. General Activity Properties These properties are common to all or many activity types. Enabled: True or False.17.TEMS Investigation 14. VoIP Answer snippet: Network Connect  SIP Register  VoIP Answer  VoIP Voice Quality  SIP Unregister  Network Disconnect.17. Activity Section • • Name: Name given to the activity. the activity is abandoned. the activity is abandoned. and the whole script is terminated. the activity is disabled and will not be performed when the script is run. and the execution proceeds to the next activity in the workflow branch in question. The combo box is populated with all existing configuration sets that fit the activity. (Only appears for certain non-editable activities such as the “root” activity at the top and bottom of the workflow. you need to create one in the Configuration Sets pane. 20. if no such configuration set exists.1 User’s Manual • VoIP Dial snippet: Network Connect  SIP Register  VoIP Dial  VoIP Voice Quality  VoIP Hang Up  SIP Unregister  Network Disconnect.17. If set to False. • • 20. Equipment: The EQ to which the activity is assigned. an FTP server configuration set needs to be selected here. This is indicated by the activity being dimmed by a semi-transparent greenish box in the flowchart. For example. – 270 .) Configuration: Reference to a configuration set of the type associated with this activity. for FTP Download. Failure Handling Section • On Failure: This property determines what will happen if an activity fails (when first attempted). • 20.

otherwise it will run to completion. unless it has already completed before that time. which aborts the whole script with immediate effect. What you indicate here is thus a maximum duration for the activity. On Event: The activity will be aborted if and when one of the specified events occurs.16 in conjunction with the activity or activities that use it. Managing Configuration Sets You can manage configuration sets using the Settings Manager utility. • To launch the Settings Manager utility.1.Chapter 20. – Note that this property is also possessed by the root activity. 20. Delay – the time to wait before each retry. Compare the Terminate activity. Service Control – Retry: If an activity fails.1. When you choose this option.18.18. – – Never: The activity will execute as long as it takes to complete. see section 20. On Failure – what action to take if all retries fail (continue or stop script). • Abort: This property determines under what conditions the activity will be aborted. Configuration Sets 20. in which case it applies to the entire script. For a tutorial on how to use these functions in conjunction with script saving/loading in order to port scripts between PCs. For that reason each configuration set is described in section 20. choose File  Manage Settings. a set of further parameters appear: Retries – the number of retries. 20.2. it will be retried. On Timeout: The activity will be aborted after a fixed period of time.0 271 . NT12-7002 ver 1. Descriptions of Configuration Sets All types of configuration set are associated with a particular service.19.18.

All configuration sets currently known to the application are listed in the window. • Click the Source button and browse to the directory you want to import from. click the Export button. To perform the export. The window is populated with all configuration sets found in that directory. • • 20.>. Select the configuration sets you want to import by clicking them in the list.18.2. right-click in the list and choose Select All/Unselect All.. Now select where to export the configuration sets. • 272 .1 Service Settings. To select/unselect all sets. Importing Configuration Sets To import previously exported configuration sets. • Select the configuration sets you want to export by clicking them in the list.Settings.2. Click the Target button and point to the desired directory.Services.. Exporting Configuration Sets To export configuration sets you use the Export tab.1 User’s Manual Alternatively.<. in Windows.18. you use the Import tab.<service name>Settings. To select/deselect all sets. choose Start  [All] Programs  Ascom  TEMS Products  Utilities  TEMS Investigation 14.2. This window appears: 20. Shift + click and Ctrl + click can also be used. in standard Windows fashion. Shift + click and Ctrl + click can also be used.1.TEMS Investigation 14. Each configuration set is now exported as a file named according to the format TEMS. in standard Windows fashion. right-click in the list and choose Select All/Unselect All.config.

2. • 20. select it and click Clear. 20. Service Control • To perform the import. Note that configuration sets can also be saved separately: see section 20. click the Save button on the Service Control Designer toolbar. click the Import button. The Save Script dialog contains the following options: • • Description: Free-text field where you can optionally enter a description of the script. From the Tools menu you can delete all configuration sets by choosing Clear Settings.tsc (for “TEMS Service Control”).18. Saving and Loading Scripts To save a script to file. • To restore configuration sets from a backup. choose Tools  Manage Backups. and click the Restore button.18. Format: You can save the script either with or without the configuration sets it uses. Deleting Configuration Sets You can delete a configuration set from TEMS Investigation by selecting it on the Export tab and clicking the Delete button.0 273 . NT12-7002 ver 1. If the Enable Backup option is selected.2. a backup of the configuration sets will be created whenever you use the Clear Settings command. To delete a backup.3.Chapter 20. select the backup of interest from the list. The file will receive the extension .19.

) Redistributable: All configuration sets referenced in a script are saved with the script. choose File  Save As Image in the Service Control window and select the desired image file format. making the TSC file a self-contained and independent entity that can be immediately reused on a different PC. Saving Workflow as Image • You can also save the contents of the workflow pane as an image. 20. Choose this option if you are going to use the script on several computers. The script can now be not only run but also freely modified on the receiver PC.2.1 User’s Manual – Standard: No configuration sets are saved with the script. Open the sender’s workspace. click the Load button on the Service Control Designer toolbar. Choose this option if you are going to use the script on one PC only.1.19. – 20. This means that changes to a configuration set will automatically propagate to all scripts that reference it.19. On the “receiver” PC (with the above data from the sender available on some suitable storage medium): – – – – Import the configuration sets exported from the sender. To open an existing script stored on file. Tutorial on Porting Scripts between PCs Follow these steps to share a script and its related configuration sets between two computers: • On the “sender” PC: – – – • Save your workspace. (This is the default setting. Open the sender’s script. 274 .TEMS Investigation 14. Start TEMS Investigation. Export your configuration sets. Save your script with Format set to Redistributable. To this end.

After you click the Zoom In button on the window toolbar. This is most conveniently done from the context menu: • Select all of the activities you want to modify by dragging the mouse pointer or by Ctrl + click. Activity Filter The Activity Filter combo box at the top of the Activity pane can be used to filter the list of activities so that it shows only the activity types supported by a particular device. where mouse pointing actions have the effect of zooming the workflow pane in or out. The rest is standard Windows functionality. mouse clicks in the workflow pane will magnify its contents in predefined steps.3. Zooming the Workflow Pane In the workflow pane. Further Functionality in the Service Control Designer Window 20. then right-click the selection and choose the desired command from the context menu. except the Move Left and Move Right commands which you can use to change the ordering of activities in a workflow. 20.2.20. the mouse pointer by default has the usual point-andclick function. Service Control 20. Context Menu in Workflow Pane The context menu that appears when you right-click in the workflow pane has functionality that is mostly mirrored in other places: in the regular window menu and in the Properties pane. on-failure behavior) of several activities at once.20. 20. The context menu is especially useful for changing properties (EQ assignment. You NT12-7002 ver 1. You can however switch the mouse to zoom mode.1.20.20. By default all activities are shown (“All”).Chapter 20.0 275 . The Refresh button to the right of the Activity Filter combo box updates the activity list with any new user-defined snippets that have been created since the list was last refreshed.

1 User’s Manual can also click and drag to select a portion of the workflow pane that you want to enlarge.TEMS Investigation 14. To reverse the mouse-click zoom function. 276 . click the Zoom Out button on the window toolbar. To return the mouse to pointing mode. click the Pointer button.

Overview of Properties by Device This overview covers certain Sony Ericsson. these instances are marked with an “N” (for “Navigator”) in the table below. To access the property dialog of a device.8) are labeled “CL” in the table.Chapter 21. For clarity.0 277 .1. and Samsung phones. Regarding control functions applied from the Navigator. Some devices have Navigator control functions that correspond to device properties for other devices.1. Nokia. see section 9. NT12-7002 ver 1. Device properties that correspond to aspects of the Cell Lock control function in the Navigator (described in section 9. Other supported devices share little or none of the control functionality listed here.1. do as follows: • • Right-click on the device on the Navigator’s Equipment tab. 21. Device Properties 21. Choose Properties from the context menu. Device Properties From TEMS Investigation you can view and modify certain properties of devices.

access control Speech codec control3 TxPower control (GSM) 1. prevent handover to specified cells.) Control Function Samsung Infuse 4G TM506/Z750i Access class control Barred cells. 2 N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N RRC WCDMA capability control N 2. Changing order of priority between codecs is supported for C905*/ W995* only. See chapter 43. 278 Nokia NTM3 K790i/a W600i K800i K600i .1 User’s Manual Sony Ericsson C702/C905*/W760i/W995* Sams. That is.TEMS Investigation 14. discard/ignore Lock on ARFCN CL Lock on BSIC CL Lock on PLMN Lock on SC CL Lock on UARFCN CL Prevent handover CL Reserved cells. access control BLER target control (WCDMA) C/A measurements (GSM) Channel verification (GSM)1 Disable handover CL EDGE capability control L3 messages. Samsung Galaxy S 4G Xperia arc S* (Qualc. 3. No.

the phone retrieves all settings you have specified for it. without exiting the dialog. like OK. you must switch the corresponding “Default/Modified” field to Modified (can be done by double-clicking the value).1. Any changes to the properties will apply as long as the phone remains activated in TEMS Investigation. At the outset this field has the value Default everywhere. the Properties dialog contains the buttons Restore Defaults and Apply. Properties of ST-Ericsson Chipset Based Phones This section deals with viewable and editable properties of ST-Ericsson chipset based phones: Sony Ericsson phones except Xperia arc S. Common Controls Each of the nodes in the property grid contains a field Default/Modified. and the Samsung Galaxy S 4G and Infuse 4G models. but without exiting the dialog. section 6. which means no alteration of regular phone behavior.2. Functions of Dialog Buttons Besides OK and Cancel.Chapter 21.0 279 . NT12-7002 ver 1. 21.2. then proceed to set the other parameters as desired according to the subsections below. Note the following: • • “Path Searcher Report (A2)” must be checked for the Finger Info information elements (WCDMA) to be valid.2. You can turn the reporting on and off for each item listed. Regarding “TPC Info Per Cell”.2.1. 21. These buttons have the following functions: • • Apply saves all changes made to settings. Restore Defaults resets all settings to their defaults. To activate a control function. When you activate the phone in the application. Extended Reports This item appears for certain Sony Ericsson phones. It is also applicable to the subset of those properties exhibited by the Samsung Galaxy S 4G. listing messages and mode reports delivered by the phone. see Information Elements and Events. Device Properties 21.

” button in the right-hand field listing codecs. If you lock on a PLMN that is not available..1 User’s Manual 21.2.1.TEMS Investigation 14... Classes 0 . CAS Lock on PLMN You can lock the phone on a PLMN.. 9 Every phone is by default allocated randomly to one of these classes.2. CAS Speech Codec For certain phone models (indicated in section 21.3. 21. the user interface shown below appears.. Classes 10 .. Membership of these classes entitles a phone to make access attempts in various special situations.2.2. 15 21. Check the classes that you want the phone to be a member of. CAS Access Class Here you can manipulate access class settings ( 3GPP 22.011. You can change the default allocation here. the phone will go into limited service mode.2. specified by an MCC and MNC combination. 280 . MNC Define the target PLMN here. Speech codecs When you click the “.1) you can both define a subset of codecs that should be enabled and change the default order of priority between the selected codecs. chapter 4).2.2. Note that this function can be meaningfully applied only if the SIM supports multiple PLMNs. MCC.

By default all codecs are enabled. this is done in a regular property grid. Then use the arrow buttons on the right to adjust the order of priority for the selected codecs.4.0 281 . • For other phone models you can only select which codecs should be enabled. 21. Device Properties • Use the arrow buttons in the middle to move any codecs you want to disable from the Selected box to the Available box.2. Those that you leave in the Selected box will remain enabled. GSM Adjacent Scan Phones capable of C/A measurements on hopping channels can be set to measure either one channel or two channels on each side of the carrier.Chapter 21. see above.2. Number of adjacent channels Specify one or two channels. NT12-7002 ver 1.

The inverted operation is also possible.1. Lock: The phone will be locked to the set of channels checked under ARFCNs. GSM Barred Cells Here you can alter the phone’s behavior in GSM idle mode with respect to barred cells.1 User’s Manual 21.5). All cells allowed: The phone will camp on any cell. this normally prevents the phone from accessing it. Note: To apply this kind of lock. ignoring cell barring. Normal: No effect on default behavior.1. 21.2.12) and to a GSM band (see section 9. you must first lock the phone to the GSM RAT (see section 9. namely to prevent reselection to a specified channel set. Mode Normal: The phone will not camp on barred cells.2.6. Prevent: The phone will be prevented from camping on the channels checked under ARFCNs.TEMS Investigation 14. 282 .2. regardless of the signal strength and quality of neighboring cells. GSM Cell Selection When the phone is in idle mode. ARFCNs Control mode Check the channels you want to lock on or exclude.5. it can be locked to one channel or to a set of channels. If the “barred” flag is set for a cell. Only barred cells allowed: The phone will camp only on barred cells.2. This inhibits all reselections to other channels.

you can manipulate its handover behavior. Disable handover: The phone will be prevented from performing any handovers at all. The phone will then report no RxLev for these channels. a very low RxLev for the serving cell.2. Device Properties 21.0 283 . Force handover to a specified channel. 21.8.2. • NT12-7002 ver 1. you can do one of the following: • • Prevent handover to specified channels. GSM Handover When the phone is in dedicated mode. The phone will then report a very high RxLev for any such cell.Chapter 21. GSM EDGE Capability For EDGE-capable phones you can choose to disable the EDGE capability. Disable handover altogether. No: EDGE disabled. and no RxLev for other neighboring cells. Prevent: The phone will be prevented from performing handover to the channels checked under ARFCNs. EDGE allowed Yes: EDGE enabled.2.7. Specifically. Lock: The phone will be able perform handover only to the set of channels checked under ARFCNs.2. ARFCNs Control mode Check the channels you want to prevent handover to or restrict handover to. Normal: No effect on default behavior. Selecting a single channel forces handover to that channel. This function can be used to force data transfer over GPRS rather than EDGE. or restrict handovers to a chosen channel set.

9. 284 . select Discard here..2. In the dialog that appears.2.2. Regarding the latter. GSM Tx Power For each GSM frequency band you can specify a Tx Power value which will override the network allocated Tx Power. Discarded messages are colored red in the Layer 3 Messages window and tagged with a special note in the plain-text decoding.1. Layer 3 Messages For certain Sony Ericsson UEs you can discard Layer 3 messages of specified types.2.10. see section 26.11. The phone can store up to 10 message types in its memory.005.TEMS Investigation 14. 21. see  3GPP 45.2.”). Default/Discard Loaded Message types To enable the function. 21. Number of Layer 3 message types selected under Message types.3.) Enter the desired new Tx Power in dBm for the GSM 850 MHz band. and other cells: Normal No change from normal cell barring behavior. Click the browse button (marked “.. Note: The UE must have been activated at least once for the full tree of Layer 3 message types to appear here. section 4. reserved.1 User’s Manual 21. Tx Power GSM 850 (dBm) (etc. check the types of Layer 3 message that you want to discard. WCDMA Barred Cells Here you can modify the phone’s behavior with respect to accessing of barred.2.

WCDMA Cell Selection Here you can lock the UE to selected UARFCNs or scrambling codes in WCDMA.12.331.0 285 . in idle mode as well as connected mode. Only barred or reserved: The phone will only access cells that are barred or reserved. Lock: The phone will be locked to the set of UARFCNs/scrambling codes that you select in the UARFCNs and Scrambling codes fields. Only reserved for future use: The phone will only access cells that are reserved for future use. Regarding the format of this value.2. 21. Only reserved: The phone will only access reserved cells.2.2.13. WCDMA BLER Target For certain Sony Ericsson UEs you can override the BLER target set for the UE by the network. BLER Target value The BLER target for the UE will change to the value you set here. Only barred: The phone will only access barred cells. also barred and reserved ones. Control mode Normal: No effect on default behavior. Device Properties Mode All cells allowed: The phone will access any cell. see  3GPP 25.Chapter 21. Only reserved for operator use: The phone will only access cells that are reserved for operator use.2. NT12-7002 ver 1. 21.

2. Up to 32 SCs can then be listed as targets.5).1 User’s Manual Scrambling codes Lists the scrambling codes to lock on.1. HSDPA + HSUPA: Both HSDPA and HSUPA are enabled. you must first have selected a single target UARFCN. Up to 32 target UARFCNs can be specified. HSDPA category If HSDPA is enabled. note that if you list more than one UARFCN. HSUPA category 286 . These categories are defined in  3GPP 25. you must first lock the phone to the WCDMA RAT (see section 9. or all of HSPA.14. WCDMA RRC Radio Capability For phones supporting HSDPA.306. UARFCNs Check the UARFCN you want to lock to. 21. Allowed technologies R99 only: Only WCDMA R99 is enabled.306.1. HSDPA: HSDPA is enabled (but not HSUPA.12) and to a WCDMA band (see section 9. If you have specified multiple target UARFCNs. However. To be able to specify target SCs. table 5.1g. you cannot also select scrambling codes as targets. Note: To apply this kind of lock. you cannot add any target SCs (the Scrambling codes field is grayed).1a. These categories are defined in  3GPP 25. you can enable or disable these capabilities.2.TEMS Investigation 14. you can set here what HSUPA (E-DCH) category the phone should report. table 5. If HSUPA is enabled. you can set here what HSDPA (HS-DSCH) category the phone should report. even if the phone supports it).

Chapter 21. Cell barring Normal: The phone will not camp on barred cells. Ignored: The phone will camp on any cell.2.3. you can lock the phone to a single ARFCN. 21. GSM Cell Barring Control This setting governs how the phone behaves with respect to barred cells in GSM. 21. ignoring cell barring.3. Specify the scrambling code to lock on. Enable channel lock Band ARFCN Set this to Yes to enable the channel lock function.3.3. Properties of Nokia Phones (NTM3) Channel Lock Control (GSM) In GSM mode. The channel lock function works in idle mode only. Sector Lock Control (WCDMA) These settings apply in WCDMA mode. Specify the UARFCN to lock on. The phone will be locked to the chosen UARFCN and scrambling code. NT12-7002 ver 1.1.3. Reversed: The phone will camp only on barred cells. 21. Enable sector lock UARFCN Scrambling code Set this to Yes to enable the sector lock function. Device Properties 21. Specify the ARFCN of the channel to lock on. Specify the band containing the channel you want to lock on.0 287 .

C/I is obtained only for circuit-switched. Properties Specific to Sony Ericsson Xperia arc S Sony Ericsson Xperia arc S has a log category “TEMS” containing some logs that affect the population of information elements: • The “GSM C/I” log must be turned on for the “C/I” family of elements in the GSM category to be populated.1. Regarding the NV (Nonvolatile) interface. for this device all control functions are applied from the Navigator. • • 288 . For speech codec information elements to be populated. The “WCDMA SIR Target” log must be turned on for the WCDMA SIR Target element to be populated. However. Please note that with this device.9.1. no RRC State is presented until the state changes. The “WCDMA RRC State” log must be turned on for the WCDMA RRC State element to receive a value at device connect/start of logfile. for certain devices such as Option data cards and Sierra Wireless UMTS data cards. This is true for the Sony Ericsson Xperia arc S as well. you must enable all logs with “Vocoder Packet” in their names. see section 9.4. If the log is turned off.TEMS Investigation 14.1. as explained in section 9. not for packet-switched data.4. Properties of Qualcomm Chipset Based Devices Properties of Qualcomm chipset based devices are mostly limited to enabling and disabling of various logs. 21. RAT lock and band lock functions are available.1 User’s Manual 21.

the following options exist: All enabled: All messages are enabled.Chapter 21. NT12-7002 ver 1.0 289 .5. which always means all messages without restriction. 21. further fields appear which allow you to enable or disable various subcategories of messages. Properties of GPS Units You can inspect and change some properties of a GPS unit. no reports from the MS device channel will be displayed in TEMS Investigation. Device Properties 21. What properties are editable depends on what product you are using. Common. (The settings you make here do not affect the scope of All enabled. Properties of Samsung LTE Modems For Samsung LTE modems.) Please note that if you disable everything here. Select messages: When this option is chosen. All disabled: All messages are disabled. LTE For each of these top-level message categories.6. various message categories can be enabled and disabled.

3. 290 . you can define events of your own. which trigger the event when they evaluate to true. in addition to these. Predefined and User-defined Events Definitions of all predefined events are found in Information Elements and Events.2. Click Add. 22. Events TEMS Investigation generates events to indicate noteworthy occurrences in the cellular network.1.8. see Information Elements and Events.TEMS Investigation 14. section 8. Presentation of Events Events that occur are listed in the Events window.5).5. These expressions can contain: • • • Layer 3 messages other events conditions involving information elements. Events can also be presented: • • • as symbols on the map (see section 31. 22. • Setting Up a User-defined Event Open the Event Definition window. 22.1 User’s Manual 22. Regarding this window. chapter 7.4) as symbols and vertical lines in line charts (see section 29. User-defined events are specified by logical expressions.4) as audio signals (see section 22. A number of events are predefined.

The choice in this combo box governs what will be selectable when you click the Add Element button. If you choose “Any”.0 291 . If you choose a specific external device in this combo box. The structure of the expression is displayed in the box beneath the Name field. the event can be triggered by any device. If Periodic is not checked.Chapter 22.4. This is especially useful for cell whitelist events: see section 22. Interval You build up the event expression by using the add buttons on the right. the event is generated only once when its condition becomes true. at intervals governed by the Interval parameter. Events Name System Mobile Enter a name for your user-defined event. NT12-7002 ver 1. If Periodic is checked. the event is generated repeatedly as long as its condition is true. Periodic. the event is triggered only when the event expression is true for this particular device.

“>”. exceeds.TEMS Investigation 14. or “<”). and set the threshold value. specify it here.3. 292 . • Adding a Layer 3 Message to the Event Expression Click Add Element and choose Layer 3 from the context menu.1. If the information element has an argument. Choose this to trigger the event whenever the value of the selected information element changes. Choose the desired message from the dialog that appears.1 User’s Manual 22.2. Choose a threshold operator (“=”.3. Choose this to trigger the event when the selected information element assumes. or drops below a certain value. Information element Argument Value: Changed Value: Threshold Choose an information element. • Adding an Information Element Criterion to the Event Expression Click Add Element and choose Information Element from the context menu. 22.

Adding an Operator/Delimiter to the Event Expression To build a composite logical expression.4. you will need logical operators and possibly delimiters (brackets).3. NOT. • In the Add User Defined Events dialog.5.3. OR.3.Chapter 22. 22. click Add Element and choose Event from the context menu. and NOT. the logfile must be reloaded for the events to become visible. Keep adding items to the event expression until it is complete. 22.6.0 293 . • Deleting User-defined Events Select the event you want to delete in the Event Definition window. click Add Operator and select an operator or delimiter from the context menu. Note: Events used in the expression for a user-defined event can be combined with the OR operator only (not with AND. In the new dialog that appears. or XOR). Events 22. The new event is now added to the list in the Event Definition window. See section 22. Available operators are AND.3. XOR. • • Editing User-defined Events Select the event you want to edit in the Event Definition window.3.3.7 below for an example of a logical expression. 22. choose an event from the combo box. NT12-7002 ver 1. Click Edit and make the desired changes. Note: If a user-defined event is added or modified after a logfile is loaded. Then click OK to exit the Add User Defined Events dialog. • • Adding an Event to the Event Expression In the Add User Defined Events dialog.

Click Add Operator and choose “AND”.e. Two common ones are co-channel and adjacent channel interference. the main problem is not interference from other callers. but the fact that the signal is overwhelmed by assorted random disturbances – i. This means thermal noise generated within the circuits of the phone as well as external background noise from a plethora of sources. 4. Click Add Element and choose “Information Element” from the context menu. In certain circumstances. Set Value to –99. The following event gives a rough indication that the poor C/I is probably due to a noise problem: the poor C/I coincides with a very low signal strength. The event expression should now look as follows: 294 . 7. 22.TEMS Investigation 14. 10. including other man-made signals so faint that they merely add up to a quasirandom disturbance. 12. and choose “<” from the combo box. 9. From the Add Information Element combo box. Under “Information Element” choose “RxLev Sub (dBm)”. choose “C/I Worst”. 11. 5. Click OK. however.1 User’s Manual • Click Delete. 3. Choose “Threshold” and choose “<” from the combo box. 13. Click Add. 6. 8. 14. There are many possible causes of poor C/I values. 1. Click Add Element and choose “Information Element”.3. Choose “Threshold”. Name the event “Noise Indication” (or whatever you like). 2.7. Example of User-defined Event This example is taken from GSM. From the Configuration folder in the Navigator. Set Value to 10. open the Event Definition window. what is usually called “noise”. Click OK.

chapter 6. enter your list of cells according to the format description given in the Technical Reference. Events C/I Worst < 10 AND RxLev Sub (dBm) < –99 15. Generating Cell Whitelist Events The Event Definition window has a special function for generating userdefined events based on cell lists.Chapter 22.0 295 . The input might look something like this: NT12-7002 ver 1. 22. Click OK to finish. This is useful in any scenario where testing is restricted to certain cells. The event is now added to the event list and can be used in the Map window and in other presentation windows.4. In the dialog that appears. The purpose of this function is to provide a convenient means of alerting the user when entering a cell that belongs to a specified set. A list of allowed cells is referred to in TEMS Investigation as a “whitelist”. proceed as follows: Click the Cell Whitelist button. emergency calls would be put through normally and are therefore forbidden. For example. Outside of these cells. testing of an emergency service might be performed in cells which have been temporarily reconfigured to divert emergency calls to a different number (so that they do not interfere with genuine emergency calls). To construct your whitelist.

click OK. However.TEMS Investigation 14. it is represented there by the string “<Compiled Whitelist Expression>”. the appropriate event will be triggered. you can view the event expression in the same format as in the Cell Whitelist Generator dialog.1 User’s Manual • • You can change the event name if you wish. The resulting event expression is not reproduced explicitly in the Event Definition window. if you select the event and click the Edit button. 296 . When you are done. From the cell whitelist TEMS Investigation now constructs a set of userdefined events: one for each RAT occurring in the whitelist. Whenever a connected device enters one of the cells on the list.1 1. a RAT designation will be appended (see below). To the Event Name string. Please note that the whitelist event expression cannot be modified from here. The name and the periodicity (Interval setting) of a previously defined whitelist event can be changed when the event is inspected.

so that they can provide continuous updates on whether or not the user is camping on a white cell. Events Whitelist events are automatically made periodic (Periodic option checked). its contents are converted to an event and cannot subsequently be reverted to the whitelist format.5. NT12-7002 ver 1. but skip the task otherwise.10.3 for further guidance on how to compose such scripts. when opened. you use the Audio Indications window found in the Configuration folder in the Navigator. 22.5. the Cell Whitelist Generator dialog does retain the contents it held when last closed. Adding Audio Indications Click Add in the Audio Indications window.6. This information can be utilized by a script to perform a certain task if the device is in a white cell. This is useful if you are performing a drive test on your own and need to keep your eyes on the road.) 22.Chapter 22. Please keep in mind that the Cell Whitelist Generator functions as a “oneway” editing aid.1. To associate events with audio signals. (However.0 297 . Audio Indications for Events For each event you can specify an audio signal to be played when the event occurs. After you click OK in the Cell Whitelist Generator dialog. See section 20.

Click OK when you are done adding audio indications. 298 . or click Browse and select the file. Choose an event. The events that are now associated with sounds are listed in the Audio Indications window. Click Apply to add the current audio indication and keep the dialog open.1 User’s Manual Mobile Event Sound Use PC speaker Test • • Choose an external device. Enter the path to the WAV file you want to use. Listen to the selected sound file.TEMS Investigation 14. Check to use the internal speaker of your PC.

5. NT12-7002 ver 1. They may however be deactivated (see section 22.Chapter 22.5. 22.4. Click Edit and make the desired changes. Muting All Audio Indications To disable all audio indications. • Deactivating Audio Indications To deactivate an audio indication: Select the audio indication. 22.5.5.6. The status of the audio indications will remain the same as before you clicked Mute All: active audio indications will start playing again. From now on. Events 22. independently of their status (active or deactivated): Click Mute All. Activating Audio Indications Audio indications are by default active. Click Deactivate Sound.5. and deactivated ones will remain deactivated. • Editing Audio Indications Select the audio indication to be edited. 22.0 299 . To activate a deactivated audio indication: • Select the audio indication. You might find this attractive when doing post-processing.5. To re-enable all audio indications: Click Undo Mute All.4 below). • Saving and Loading Audio Indications Select the audio indication you want to save.2. Click Activate Sound.5. no audio indications will be played until you decide to enable them again. 22.3.

Click Delete.TEMS Investigation 14. Click Open to load an *.5.1 User’s Manual Click Save and enter a file name (extension .svt file in the Audio Indications window. • Deleting Audio Indications Select the audio indication to be deleted. 22. 300 .svt).7.

chapter 2. chapter 7. Types of Presentation Window The following presentation windows are available in TEMS Investigation: Window Type Status window Event Counter window Message window Video Monitor GPS window Line chart Bar chart Chapter Ref. 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 NT12-7002 ver 1.2.1. Presentation: Basics This chapter covers the fundamentals of data presentation.Chapter 23. Presentation: Basics 23. Regarding predefined events. Data is presented in fundamentally the same way in both cases. For an overview of information element categories. and messages. 23. events. differences are noted whenever relevant in the chapters that follow. 23. see Information Elements and Events.0 301 . either in real time or during logfile analysis. Full details on information elements follow in chapters 3 and 4 of that volume. see Information Elements and Events. Presented Data The presentation windows are used to present information elements.

23. Event Counter windows). 302 . From the Worksheet menu. 31 23. and choose the same item from the context menu. Device Channels: MS/DC/PS In presentation windows. right-click any empty part of the worksheet.1 User’s Manual Window Type Map window Chapter Ref. “Set Equipment Number” Function There is a shortcut for changing which device to present data from in an entire worksheet: • • Bring the worksheet of interest forward by clicking it. The EQ designations currently do not appear in presentation windows. Select the equipment (EQ/MS/DC) number in the dialog. Alternatively. as opposed to the Navigator and Service Control components. devices are represented by their channels: • • • MS for radio measurements DC for data service measurements PS for positioning equipment. for example.TEMS Investigation 14.1.3. • • The change will affect all presentation windows that display data from a specified device (as opposed to.3. choose Set Equipment Number.

things are somewhat different: it is still possible to inspect previously recorded data.Chapter 23. custom color ranges for information elements can be defined. Video Monitor) “history” windows. or has no color defined for its current value. For example. In drive-testing mode. it is possible to visualize numeric information element values by means of a range of colors. for use in that window only. but in many window types. see section 26. line charts.5. These colors are defined in the Navigator.0 303 . however. When you select a point in time in a history window. which show the situation at one instant in time and are constantly refreshed in drive testing mode (status windows. message windows. other history windows highlight the same time instant. NT12-7002 ver 1. the line chart plots two points every second. Color Ranges In many types of presentation windows.5. and • All windows are synchronized. Event Counter windows). • Window Updating and Synchronization A fundamental distinction can be made between “snapshot” windows. Presentation: Basics 23. or statistics on it (maps. see section 5. it is drawn in black in graphical presentations and left out in textual presentations. The map plots a maximum of two new theme markers every second. GPS window. the presentation automatically reverts to the present time. whereas the snapshot windows are updated to show the data that was current at this time. Note: The above applies without qualifications in analysis mode. The exactness of the synchronization is limited by the time resolutions of the various presentations. which accumulate information and display the whole history of the testing session. In status windows. as soon as a new message arrives from the phone. Whenever an information element is invalid.3 for details. bar charts.4. 23. Regarding synchronization between message windows and other windows. You can always turn off the color coding and use a fixed color for drawing.

7. Export/Import of Presentation Windows Status windows. • • • Import To import a saved presentation window. 23. line charts. proceed as follows: Select the window.) From the File menu. choose Import.7. saved along with all their current settings in a file separate from the workspace.2. • • • Export To export a presentation window.TEMS Investigation 14.1. Type a file name and click Save. 304 . choose Export. From the File menu. 23. You can later import the window into the application again by opening the file. (Open a new window if necessary. that is.7. which are accessed by right-clicking in the window and choosing Properties from the context menu. see appendix B. 23. and click it. proceed as follows: Focus a presentation window of the same type as the one you want to import. and message windows can be exported. The extension depends on the window type. Other Window Properties The appearance of any presentation window can be changed by altering the window properties.6.1 User’s Manual 23. maps. Select the desired file and click Open.

Chapter 24. Status Windows 24.3. For these purposes you must use the Properties dialog. A number of ready-made windows are provided for presenting particular categories of information.2. In addition. you cannot enter text in the status window using this tool. General The status windows present information elements in tabular form. The setup wizard is intended to be run only once. a blank template is available which you can use to compose your own status windows.1. 24. Also. you can modify the window using the Properties dialog. 24. Status Windows This chapter explains the workings of status windows. NT12-7002 ver 1. Note: Setting the number of columns and rows in the status window cannot be done with the setup wizard. See section 24. use the setup wizard (section 24. Later on. To set up a status window. Setting Up Status Window Contents The contents of a status window are conveniently set up using the setup wizard. chapter 8.2).0 305 .3. these are listed in Information Elements and Events. which is described in section 24.

Name Name the new status window. This dialog opens: 306 .1 User’s Manual • Right-click in the status window and choose Setup Wizard.TEMS Investigation 14. click Add. Font • • Click Next to proceed to step 2 of the setup wizard. and the contents of the current window will be lost. Click Browse and select a font. Note that changing the name later will create a new status window. To add an information element.

Chapter 24. chapter 2. See Information Elements and Events. Choose an information element category.0 307 . Status Windows Mobile System Information element Argument Choose which device to pick the information element from. NT12-7002 ver 1. • Select the View tab. Choose an information element. Enter an argument for the information element (if it needs one).

Choose alignment for the displayed values. 308 .TEMS Investigation 14.2. Draw the bar with constant length. and can only assume a limited number of values. In that window.6. This checkbox with accompanying combo boxes is enabled only for the CDMA window Finger Info.1 User’s Manual Value Left. Keep track of the all-time-low and all-time-high values by means of vertical lines. Right Bar Constant length Check to display values alphanumerically. you can visualize the thresholds “T-Add (dB)” and “T-Drop (dB)” as vertical black lines drawn on top of the bars in the Energy column. Min/Max indicator Associated information elements Information Element 1 Information Element 2 • Select the Color tab to customize colors and color ranges. Check to display numeric values as colored bars. Center. This is useful for information elements that represent states. etc. See screenshot in section 24.

3 for details on how to do this). Click OK when you are done adding information elements. Then exit the setup wizard by clicking Finish. • Changing Status Window Properties Right-click in the status window and choose Properties from the context menu. 24. The Mode tab governs the layout and appearance of the window: NT12-7002 ver 1. • • Click Apply to add more information elements. uncheck the box and specify the range (see section 5. If you want to define a special color range here. Status Windows Use common color ranges Check the box if you want to use the default color range of the information element.Chapter 24.3.0 309 .

Check if you want a header in the window. use the Cell Content tab. 310 .TEMS Investigation 14.) Columns Rows Font Mobile • To edit the contents of the status window. If you choose a device in this box. Set the number of rows. all the information elements currently shown in the window will be taken from that device. select the Cell Content tab. (To pick individual information elements from a different device. See below.1 User’s Manual Name Header Enter a new name if desired.) Set the number of columns. (The contents of the header are defined on the Cell Content tab. Click Browse and select a font. regardless of earlier settings.

Status Windows • Double-click on a row and select an information element from the list. Then click Edit.2 above). except that it has an extra field for entering text: NT12-7002 ver 1.Chapter 24. The dialog that appears is identical with the Add dialog in the setup wizard (see section 24.0 311 .

4. To do this. 24.5.TEMS Investigation 14. Repeating Columns in Multiple Groups In status windows with a small number of columns (up to four).1 User’s Manual In a status window. you might want to show the same information element for several devices. then selecting the desired percentage of the current font size. This feature is handy when the default window layout has a large number of rows. you can optionally rearrange the data by dividing the rows into several groups (up to three) and displaying these groups side by side horizontally. multiple column groups reduce or eliminate the need for vertical scrolling. Use the In and Out options to step the font size up and 312 . Changing the Status Window Font Size You can adjust the font size in the status window by right-clicking in the window and selecting Zoom. then select the desired number of column groups. All columns are then repeated once or twice in the window. create new columns as needed on the Mode tab. and modify headers and insert information elements on the Cell Content tab. 24. • Right-click in the status window and select Column Group from the context menu.

and columns represent the leaves of the channelization code tree for the DPCH (i. If a code straddles multiple columns. • • In the top left corner is displayed the current Work UARFCN. The numbers are to be read as follows: x  y = channelization code no. this means that the spreading factor for that timeslot is reduced.1. 24. The size of the window itself is not affected by these operations. down arrow (yellow) = downlink. x out of the total number of channelization codes y in that timeslot (the latter being conditioned by the value of the spreading factor). Status Windows down. – A code in use in a timeslot is indicated by an entry in the corresponding row and column(s) in the grid.Chapter 24.e. the spreading factor is 16/m.6. the number of codes available when the maximum spreading factor is used).0 313 .6. Repetition period: This is the DPCH repetition period on the downlink and uplink respectively. expressed as a number of radio subframes (5 ms). Non-standard Status Windows TD-SCDMA Physical Channel Monitor This window has a unique design and presents data on TD-SCDMA Dedicated Physical Channels (DPCHs). 24. In the grid. The arrow shows the direction of transmission: up arrow (blue) = uplink. rows represent timeslots. A repetition period p means that the DPCH is transmitted in every pth subframe. • – – NT12-7002 ver 1. Specifically. respectively. if the code takes up m columns.

24. i.6. For the setup. 314 . The color gray means that no valid ISCP measurement is available (which is always the case on the uplink). Window Properties You can right-click in this window to select which devices to display data from. In this case.1.TEMS Investigation 14. the interference signal code power for the timeslot.e.6.2 (View tab). T-Add = –13 dB and T-Drop = –15 dB. CDMA Finger Info This window indicates the T-Add and T-Drop thresholds by means of a window-specific feature.1.2. 24.1 User’s Manual – Codes are colored according to the same rules as the information element “Timeslot ISCP (dBm)”. as shown in the screenshot below. CDMA Finger Info window with T-Add and T-Drop thresholds drawn as dashed vertical lines in the Energy column. see section 24.

In the Event Counter window provided under Presentation  Analysis. Window Tabs Tabs are provided in this window to allow grouping of events into categories.1. 25. Event Counter Windows An Event Counter window keeps track of the number of times a set of events have occurred. See section 25. • • • To add a new tab. To rename a tab. right-click in the window and choose Remove Tab from the context menu. Event Counter Windows 25.Chapter 25. NT12-7002 ver 1.0 315 . Copying Window Contents You can copy the entire contents of a tab in an Event Counter window to the Windows clipboard.1.4. right-click in the window and choose New Tab from the context menu. a number of tabs are preconfigured. What events to show is user-configurable. To remove an existing tab. 25.2. This way it can be transferred to a spreadsheet application or other suitable program. right-click it to open its Properties dialog.

This resets all counters in all open Event Counter windows. A Total column is also provided which adds up the number of events from all selected devices. 25. move the events you want to display to the Selected Events list box.1 User’s Manual • • Right-click the tab and choose Copy to Clipboard from the context menu.3.4. • Using the arrow buttons.4. • Changing Event Counter Window Contents and Properties Right-click in the Event Counter window and choose Properties from the context menu. The event counting in the window is done in a separate column for each selected device.4.1.2. Counters are reset automatically. 25. 316 . 25.TEMS Investigation 14. in both drive testing mode and analysis mode: • • when a new logfile is opened when a logfile is closed. General Tab On this tab you choose which devices to show events from. which is user-editable. Events Tab Here you choose which event types to display on the currently active tab (the tab from which you access the Properties dialog). Paste the copied selection into the desired application. The General tab also holds the window title. 25. Resetting Event Counter Windows The counters in an Event Counter window can be reset by the user at any time by right-clicking in the window and choosing Reset Event Counter Windows.

They are also used to present events generated by TEMS Investigation. Message Windows The message windows are used to list messages and reports received or transmitted by external devices (Layer 2 and Layer 3 messages. 26. chapter 8. and error reports). The tab also holds the window title. Preconfigured message windows are listed in Information Elements and Events.0 317 .Chapter 26. NT12-7002 ver 1. which is user-editable. right-click in the window and choose Properties. 26.1. General Tab On this tab you choose which devices to show messages from.1. mode reports. MS and DC channels are distinguished. • Changing Message Window Contents and Properties To access the message window Properties dialog. Message Windows 26.1.

2.1. Any type of event can always be shown. • • • • • • • • Columns Tab Here you decide which columns to include in the message window: Equipment: The device that delivered the message. Information Element: Value of a user-selected information element.3).1. Event & Message Symbols: Event icon or arrow showing message direction (both types of symbol being placed in the same column). Message Name: Name of message or event. you must select it on this tab in order for it to display in the message window. 26. then select this item and click Edit. 26.1. The ready-made windows are preconfigured in this regard. Messages Tab Here you choose which message categories to display in the window. If at least one item in a category has been deselected. Note that if you add a user-defined event (section 22. Mobile System: The wireless technology from which the message originates. The item Mode Reports  Sony Ericsson  Legacy Reports contains mode reports originating from certain older Sony Ericsson GSM phones that are no longer offered for sale with TEMS Investigation. Using the arrow buttons.1 User’s Manual 26.3. Event Symbols: Event icon. the checkbox next to the category is shaded gray. first move “Information Element” to the Selected Columns box. • Events Tab Here you choose which events to display in the message window. 318 . Message Symbols: Arrow showing message direction. To select the element.4. regardless of the nature of the messages. A new dialog now appears where you select what information element to display. move the events you want to display to the Selected Events list box.TEMS Investigation 14. Message Info: Message or event information.

To abort the reload procedure. To open a message in a new window. Suppose.4. for example. You can copy text from this window to the Windows clipboard by selecting the text. the second message will replace the first in the Layer 3 detail window. an explanatory string is added to the plain-text decoding of such messages. the new window will not load any messages (for performance reasons). However. right-click again and choose Cancel Reload. The old window will remain open. Message Window Catch-up If you open a new message window when in drive testing mode. Further.3. The new window now becomes the active one. but its contents will not change any further.10) are highlighted in red in the Layer 3 Messages window. right-click the message and choose New Detail Window. 26. you can make the window catch up by right-clicking it and choosing Reload. For example.5. if you double-click one Layer 3 message and then another.2. Each message window normally reuses a single detail window. that you just clicked somewhere in a line chart. then right-clicking in the window and choosing Copy from the context menu. Message Window Synchronization When message windows synchronize with each other and with other presentation windows. Message Windows • • Time: Timestamp of message.2.Chapter 26. The message windows are then updated according to the following rules: NT12-7002 ver 1. 26.2. 26. Presentation of Discarded Messages Layer 3 messages (from certain Sony Ericsson phones) that have been discarded according to the settings on the phone property page (see section 21. Plain-text Message Decoding In all message windows.0 319 . Protocol: The protocol to which the message belongs. 26. you can double-click a message to open a new window detailing the contents of the message. when you have deactivated all external devices. one or more rows are selected (colored) in each message window.

all these rows are selected. You can unfreeze the window in any of the following ways: • • • by dragging its scroll bar by right-clicking the scroll bar and choosing Bottom by pressing the End key on the keyboard.7. 26. (If no such rows exist. If the user-selected item and the message window selection belong to the same air interface message.) • 26. the row or rows immediately preceding the user-selected item are selected and colored gray. You can freeze a message window by clicking an arbitrary message. and Highlighting in Message Windows A number of functions for filtering. If several rows match equally well (for example. Freezing a Message Window This section applies to drive testing mode only. and its message flow is halted. Filtering Functions These are found under Show/Hide in the context menu. nothing is selected in the window. Searching. The freeze affects only the message window you clicked in.1 User’s Manual • If one message window row matches the user-selected item better than any other. a message and one or several events triggered by that message).TEMS Investigation 14.6. the message window selection is colored blue. that row alone will be selected.1. searching. not any other windows. 26. Filtering. and highlighting message window contents are available from the message window context menu.7. If there is no such exact correspondence. The window will then stop updating. 320 .

Find next message of this type: Finds the next message of the same type as the one selected (going forward in time). hiding all messages with the same log code/name as the selected message. • • • • Search Functions These are found under Search in the context menu.7. Hide messages of this type: Reloads window contents. 26. Undo: Undoes a “show only” or “hide” command that is currently in force and reverts to unfiltered presentation. Search again: Repeats the search last performed in the Message Search dialog.2. Message Windows • • • Show only messages of this type: Reloads window contents to show only messages with the same log code/name as the selected message. Find previous message of this type: Finds the previous message of the same type as the one selected (going backward in time).Chapter 26.0 321 . Search for message: Opens a dialog Message Search which is explained below. NT12-7002 ver 1.

Only match items with casing that exactly matches the search string. This action is equivalent to the Search again command on the context menu. Match case Match whole word Search up Also search message contents • Click Find Next (or press the right arrow key) to go to the next message matching the search criteria. Only match items where the search string occurs as a whole word.1 User’s Manual Message Search Dialog Find what String to match in message header (and also in its contents. 26. if the Also search message contents option is checked).7.TEMS Investigation 14. The latter is the default. a dropdown is continuously updated with matching message names. 322 . Also look for matches in (plain-text decoded) the message contents. Highlighting Functions These are found under Highlight in the context menu. As you type text in this field. Search backward (up) instead of forward (down) in the message flow. By default only the message header is searched. “UL” matches “ULDCCH” but not “Scheduling”.3. from which you can optionally make a selection. For example.

Window-specific Features Mode Reports Window In the General window.1.0 323 . Message Windows • Color bars: Select a color in which to highlight all messages of the same type as the selected message. • 26.8. NT12-7002 ver 1. under WCDMA.Chapter 26. 26. you can adjust the updating frequency (in the TEMS Investigation application) for List Search reports from Qualcomm-based terminals. None: Removes the highlighting (if any) for all messages of the selected type. with different colors representing different message types. Multiple highlights can be applied.8. See the example below.

the VSQI algorithm (see chapter 40) will use a bit rate value received from the server. you need a phone capable of handling this service. If multiple numeric values are given in the file name. and various forms of live streaming (such as tapping into a live stream or repeating playlist delivered by a streaming server). the first is used. The application supports both on-demand streaming.1 User’s Manual 27. where a video clip of known length is downloaded. Video Streaming and the Video Monitor TEMS Investigation supports streaming of video recordings via suitable connected devices. the file names should contain a numeric value followed by “kbps”. If the file name does not contain a numeric value.1. How to Test Video Streaming To test the video streaming service. 27. but the VSQI score will then be less accurate. If you are using files of your own for testing streaming.6. Video clips suitable for testing are supplied on the installation CD in the subdirectory Video Clips. 324 . This value should indicate the bit rate of the stream (video + audio). not counting overhead.4.TEMS Investigation 14.16. The mechanics of setting up and conducting a streaming session are handled by the Streaming activity in scripts: see section 20. The application is equipped with a built-in streaming video client which has been designed to imitate as closely as possible the corresponding client software found in phones. where the duration of the streaming session is specified by the user. A readme file in this directory explains the file name syntax used and gives reference VSQI values obtained for these video clips in clean conditions.1 possess this capability. All phones sold with TEMS Investigation 14.

you use the Video Monitor window: Only one instance of the Video Monitor can be open. The Video Monitor To display the streamed video clip.Chapter 27. • Properties of the Video Monitor Right-click in the Video Monitor to access its Properties dialog: Device Enable audio Here you select the device that delivers the video stream. NT12-7002 ver 1.0 325 .2. Video Streaming and the Video Monitor 27. (On the other hand. so only one video stream can be replayed at a time. it is perfectly possible to do streaming with several phones simultaneously and monitor information elements and events for all these sessions in other presentation windows. Check this box to play the streamed audio through the PC speakers.2.) 27.1.

2. section 3. See Information Elements and Events. section 7. The function cannot be used if RTP or UDP traffic to and from the Internet is blocked (intentionally by the operator. Evaluating Video Streaming Performance Throughput and other performance measures for video streaming are presented in the “Streaming” information elements belonging to the Data category. “Video Streaming Quality Measurement with VSQI”. Information element Streaming VSQI and events Streaming Quality VSQI. VSQI is also the subject of a technical paper which includes general discussions of video streaming as well as video quality measurement. you can monitor the message traffic over the RTP.8. It is described in more detail in chapter 40.8.4. This paper. See Information Elements and Events.4. • 326 . See the Getting Started Manual. For close-up scrutiny and troubleshooting of the video streaming service. Data on which video streaming KPIs are based is delivered in the form of KPI events. Event Streaming State: This event is provided for monitoring the activities of the streaming video client. RTSP. • • • 27. section 8.TEMS Investigation 14. Testing of video streaming with TEMS Investigation requires that RTP/ UDP traffic can be run with the phone used as modem. see Information Elements and Events. Streaming Intermediate VSQI: VSQI (Video Streaming Quality Index) is a quality measure developed specifically for estimating the viewerperceived video and audio quality of a video streaming session. It appraises video quality only. Information element Streaming MTQI and event Streaming Quality MTQI: MTQI (Mobile TV Quality Index) is a refinement of VSQI which is discussed in chapter 41. section 8. Some of these data items deserve special comment: • Information element Streaming Packet Loss: Packet loss is of particular interest for streaming. is found on the installation CD in the subdirectory Documents. or for whatever reason).1 User’s Manual 27. and RTCP protocols in the IP Protocol Reports window.3.8. since the received signal is presented in real time in TEMS Investigation. • • Troubleshooting Video Streaming UDP ports for video streaming must be free.

Exactly what data is displayed depends on the type of GPS.Chapter 28. The GPS Window 28. The GPS Window This window shows data from the GPS unit. below is an example: The fix source is one of the following: • • • • • • • • • 2D 2D with DGPS (Differential GPS) 2D: SPS Mode (Standard Positioning Service) 2D: PPS Mode (Precise Positioning Service) 3D 3D with DGPS 3D: SPS Mode 3D: PPS Mode DR (Dead Reckoning) 28.1.0 327 .5). the window shows data from the one currently selected as “Preferred” (see section 8. If several GPS units have been detected by TEMS Investigation. Changing GPS Window Properties The GPS window can be configured to show only the parameters that interest you: NT12-7002 ver 1.

the fix source. Choose meters or feet. Check to show the direction of travel. and the number of satellites seen. altitude and speed of the GPS unit. Check to also plot samples whose position is labeled as invalid by the GPS unit.TEMS Investigation 14.1 Choose km/h or mph. graphically and numerically. This option exists to allow presentation of positions incorrectly regarded by the GPS as invalid. longitude. 328 . in degrees clockwise from north.1 User’s Manual Units Tab Speed Altitude View Tab Basic Check to show the latitude. Heading Show invalid positions 1.

0 329 . Preconfigured line charts are listed in Information Elements and Events. 29. Line Charts In line charts you can plot numeric information elements in order to visualize how their values evolve over time. Line charts can also present events.1. Organization of the Line Chart Window Chart pane Chart pane Legend pane Additional Information pane Y-axis pane The Line Chart is subdivided into the following panes: • • one or several Chart panes. chapter 8. Line Charts 29. containing the charts themselves a Y-axis pane for each chart. showing the scales for the plotted information elements NT12-7002 ver 1.Chapter 29.

The relative sizes of the panes can be freely adjusted by dragging the interior frame handles. To see the names of the events. a thick vertical line indicates the point in time currently selected in the presentation. along with their associated Y-axis panes. The legend can only gloss one chart at a time. 29. During logfile analysis. 330 . open an Events window.4). In the chart. Contents of the Line Chart Panes The Chart Pane The information elements that can be plotted in a line chart are chiefly measurements of physical quantities. You can also move backwards and forwards in a logfiles segment with the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. While recording. displaying arbitrary information elements in textual format. so neither the text panes nor other presentation windows will be updated. chapter 7. Clicking the button once more (now labeled Release) makes the chart catch up with the presentation in the other windows. describing the nature and origin of the information elements shown.TEMS Investigation 14. To select a new point in time.1 User’s Manual • • a Legend pane. The Chart pane is synchronized with the Legend and Additional Information panes (as well as with all other open presentation windows. The symbols used for predefined events are given in Information Elements and Events. and indicating their values at a single point in time an Additional Information pane. as explained in section 23. A maximum of four charts can be accommodated. just click in the chart. Events are indicated by thin vertical lines accompanied by a symbol identifying the event type. Scrolling the chart by means of the scroll bar does not change the time instant selected. you can freeze the line chart by clicking the Hold button. clicking in the Chart pane displays details on the selected time instant in the two text panes.2. The plotting can be done either as a curve or in the form of successive vertical bars.

3. The scales can be changed.Chapter 29. in which case the scale is black. except when several elements share the same scale. etc. However. and so is not labeled with a unit of time. You can choose different contents in this pane for different charts. as long as contents have only been defined for one single chart.3 (“Upper visible limit”. right-click anywhere in the Line Chart window and choose the desired Legend Chart item from the context menu. Time Scale The horizontal axis of the line chart does not have an exact time scale. as described in section 29. If the pane is too narrow to show all scales at once. you can scroll between scales using the arrow buttons. this data will be shown in the pane regardless of which chart the legend currently refers to. PN) associated with elements are given in columns of their own wherever possible. as a rule of thumb. elements which cannot be plotted).). If the phone spends some time in GSM no service mode. The Additional Information Pane This is a sort of status window where an arbitrary set of information elements can be displayed (for example. Line Charts The Y-axis Pane The Y-axis pane associated with a chart shows the scales of the information elements plotted there. Parameters (SC/BSIC. At the extreme left in the legend. Each scale is drawn in the same color as the information element. 29. see section 29.0 331 . NT12-7002 ver 1. To focus the legend on a different chart. two points are plotted each second both in idle and dedicated mode. there will be a gap in the chart to show this. However.4. the color coding of the chart is explained. but the length of this gap might not be equivalent to the period of time with no service. [U]ARFCN.4 under Additional Information Tab. The Legend Pane In the legend full details are provided (for one chart at a time) on the information elements plotted for the currently selected time instant.

4.1.4. Editing General Properties of a Chart On the General tab of the Line Chart Properties dialog.1 User’s Manual 29.2. 29. Changing Line Chart Contents and Properties To edit the contents of the line chart and their presentation.3. Adding Charts • To add a new chart in the Line Chart window. This dialog appears: 332 .4.TEMS Investigation 14. 29. you can edit the line chart window name and deselect the horizontal grid lines which by default are drawn in the background. 29. right-click anywhere in the Line Chart window and choose Properties. • • Editing the Contents of a Chart Select the chart you want to edit in the list box. click Add Chart.4. Click Edit Chart.

and the value with the next higher argument is shown. it is taken from the same device as before. Line Charts Information Elements Tab Here you edit the set of information elements to plot and how to present them. Flags. otherwise. and the like cannot be plotted. From elements with an argument the value with the lowest argument is picked. scrambling code indices. See Information Elements and Events. the element is taken from the next device.g. one of two things will happen: • • if the element has an argument. frequency and channel numbers. If you move the same element to Selected IEs again. NT12-7002 ver 1. for the Line Chart template it is MS1). You can use the Ctrl and Shift keys to select multiple items in the boxes. A maximum of seven elements can be presented. The information elements that can be plotted are chiefly those that represent or are derived from measured physical quantities (e. The first time you move an information element to Selected IEs. chapter 2.Chapter 29. timeslot indicators.0 333 . • • First select information element category in the System combo box. Using the arrow buttons. move the elements you want to present from the Available IEs to the Selected IEs list box. signal strength). it will be picked from the device the line chart is drawn for (see the title bar.

Color: Fixed 334 . the neighbor ranking) changes. This option is available for all elements. This is done by clicking the Edit IE button.TEMS Investigation 14. If it is chosen. scanned channels). neighbors. See section 29.g. You can adjust the line width.4.g. Note that it is possible to change the device for all chosen elements at once. the MS and argument can also be edited directly at any time. one and the same color is used throughout for a given channel. the application automatically assigns a color on the basis of what channel is shown. IE Argument Style: Bar Style: Line Color: Assigned to channel The argument (if any) of the information element. As far as possible. Choose this if you want the element to be plotted as successive. In the ensuing dialog you also customize the presentation of the information element: Mobile The device to pick the information element from. and consists simply in your selecting one fixed color yourself. tightly packed vertical bars.1 User’s Manual Naturally. The point of this is to ensure that you can easily see when the sort order of the list (e. This option is available only for elements made up of sorted channel lists (e.4. Choose this if you want the element to be plotted as a line.

Chapter 29. Clicking the Edit Event button pops up the following dialog: Mobile Symbol The device to pick the event from. it will be picked from the device the line chart is drawn for (see the title bar). and the brighter color chosen in the Color box is reserved for idle mode. it is taken from the next device. For complex information elements. The image file used to label the vertical line indicating the event.) Lower visible limit for IE Draw threshold line at Change color in dedicated mode Events Tab Here you decide which events should appear in the line chart presentation.0 335 . move the event you want to present to the Selected Events list box. • Using the arrow buttons. The first time you move an element to Selected Events. If you move the same element to Selected Events again. Line Charts Upper visible limit for IE Upper limit of the value range shown for this information element. NT12-7002 ver 1. the limit is automatically changed for all other arguments as well. That is. Check this if you want to compare the plotted values with a threshold line drawn at a specified value. the plot color turns deeper when the phone enters dedicated mode. (The dedicated mode color is not usercustomizable. this setting adjusts the range in the Y-axis pane. If you check this box. Lower limit of the value range shown for this information element. This setting works the same way as Upper visible limit for IE.

it is impractical to edit the MS field for each information element separately as described in section 29. 336 . choose Change MS: • For each chart. From the context menu. except that here any information element can be selected.4. This tab works exactly like the Information Elements tab. See section 23. 29.TEMS Investigation 14.4. (The information elements and events selected in the charts will be unchanged. Exporting the Line Chart Window The line chart window can be exported separately to a file with extension . • Right-click in the Line Chart window. A shortcut is therefore provided for this operation. • Deleting a Chart In the Line Chart Properties dialog. select the chart you want to delete and click the Delete Chart button.5.1 User’s Manual Additional Information Tab Here you choose the information elements to view in the Additional Information pane. Clicking the Edit IE button in this case only enables you to change the device and argument. select the device to pick data from.7.lch.5.4. since the additional information is presented only as text and not graphically. 29.4.3.) 29. Presenting Data from a Different Device If you want to present the same data as before in a chart but from a different device.

NT12-7002 ver 1. Preconfigured bar charts are listed in Information Elements and Events. The bar chart has a number of presentation modes.Chapter 30.0 337 . but the chart itself is generic and can present any measurement data. The bar chart is especially suited to the presentation of frequency scans. One of these is a parallel coordinates presentation. which is strictly speaking a different means of visualization but is integrated into the bar chart window. Bar Charts Bar charts are used to view successive snapshots in time of a selected set of information elements. chapter 8. Bar Charts 30.

1. displaying labels for the bars drawn a Y-axis pane for each chart. showing the scales for the displayed information elements a Legend pane. containing the charts themselves a X-axis pane. displaying arbitrary information elements in textual format. The relative sizes of the panes can be freely adjusted by dragging the interior frame handles. and indicating their current values an Additional Information pane. 338 .TEMS Investigation 14. A maximum of four charts can be accommodated. along with their associated Y-axis panes. The legend can only gloss one chart at a time.1 User’s Manual 30. Organization of the Bar Chart Window Chart pane X-axis pane Legend pane Additional Information pane Y-axis pane The bar chart is subdivided into the following panes: • • • • • one or several Chart panes. describing the nature and origin of the information elements shown.

Each scale is drawn in the same color as the information element. which will from then on keep track of the maximum and minimum values assumed by this parameter since the bar was clicked. If the pane is too narrow to show all scales at once.1 (Visible limit for IE). The X-axis Pane The X-axis pane provides labels for the data distributed on the x-axis (for one chart at a time). At the extreme left in the legend. Clicking a bar displays max and min indicators. as well as with all other open presentation windows.Chapter 30. See section 30. in which case the scale is black. section 30.2. Contents of the Bar Chart Panes The Chart Pane The information elements that can be plotted in a bar chart are chiefly measurements of physical quantities.0 339 .4. The Legend Pane In the legend full details are provided (for one chart at a time) on the information elements displayed in that chart. just click once more on the bar.4. as explained in section 23. Bar Charts 30. To refocus the legend on a different chart. for instance. you can scroll between scales using the arrow buttons. except when several elements share the same scale. the color coding of the chart is explained. The value range visible on the y-axis can be changed. The Chart pane is synchronized with the Legend and Additional Information panes.g. To reset the max and min indicators.2. but they can also show the value of an information element or consist of arbitrary text. NT12-7002 ver 1.4. one indicating transmit power). By default the labels are simply consecutive numbers. just click in that chart.1. The Y-axis Pane Along the y-axis of a chart are shown the scales of the information elements plotted there. The (U)ARFCN and SC/BSIC are left out if they are not directly relevant to an element (e. see.

select the chart you want to delete and click the Delete button. 30.2.1 User’s Manual The Additional Information Pane This is a sort of status window where an arbitrary set of information elements can be displayed (for example.4. as described in section 30. 340 . Adding Charts To add a new chart in the bar chart window: • Click Add. rightclick anywhere in the bar chart window and choose Properties.3. You can choose different contents in this pane for different charts.3. 30. Setting Up General Bar Chart Properties To set up some general properties of the bar chart and its presentation.1.3. • Deleting a Chart To delete a chart: In the Bar Chart Properties dialog.3. 30. elements which cannot be drawn in a bar chart).TEMS Investigation 14.

Click Edit.4.5. Examples of bar chart presentations are found in section 30.3. You will now work through a sequence of three dialogs. what data to plot in the chart.4. The procedures are gone through in detail in sections 30.4.3. and how to present it 2. Bar Charts 30. and how to label it 3.1–30. select the chart you want to set up in the list box. what data to display in the Additional Information pane. The first dialog that appears is this: NT12-7002 ver 1. Editing General Properties of a Chart On the General tab of the Bar Chart Properties dialog.0 341 . In doing so you specify 1.Chapter 30. 30. what interval to show on the x-axis.3. you can edit the bar chart window name and specify that horizontal grid lines should be drawn in the background. • • Setting Up Bar Chart Contents In the Bar Chart Properties dialog.

channel numbers. The information elements that can be displayed are chiefly those that represent or are derived from measured physical quantities (e. window-specific colors.) The default color range is defined in the Navigator and is dependent on the information element value (see section 5.1. signal strength. Presentation Mode. Colors: You can always keep the default color range for the information elements.g. The bar chart is very flexible in that it can be configured in a variety of ways. or a set of components of complex information elements. Flags. quality measures). there is one other option: either to define your own colors for use in the bar chart. timeslot indicators. fixed. These fundamental presentation modes are offered: – – – • Bar chart: Single IE with multiple components Bar chart: Components from multiple IEs (fixed set) Parallel coordinates presentation/Stacked bar chart Data: One or several information elements. Colors In this step you select the following (full details on subsequent pages): • Presentation mode.1 User’s Manual 30. • 342 . are chosen. Data. and the like cannot be displayed. (Which choice is available depends on the presentation mode. or to use predefined.TEMS Investigation 14. Besides.4.3).

Single IE Presentation Mode In this mode a single information element is displayed. Max The visible range of the information element.Chapter 30. If you want to change these settings: • Double-click the item (or click the Edit button): Visible limit for IE: Min. by making it dependent on another (suitably chosen) information element: see section 30.e. one which consists of several components. and whether the scale will be flipped with the lowest value at the top.4. NT12-7002 ver 1.1. • • In the Edit Chart dialog.4. i. Bar Charts 30.0 343 .1. By default this range is equal to the native range of the element (as stated in the Range/Unit column in Information Elements and Events). The element must be one with arguments. select Bar chart: Single IE with multiple components. It is possible to dynamically adjust the number of components to show.2. Click Choose IE to select an information element: The item contained in each element indicates what the visible range of the element will be in the bar chart.

Check this if you want to flip the y-axis for this information element so that the lowest value is at the top and the highest at the bottom. Select Bar chart: Multiple IE components (fixed set). see section 30. Back in the Edit Chart dialog. To keep the default colors. 30. check the Use common colors box.4. check the Use common colors box in the Edit Chart dialog. Multiple IE Components Presentation Mode This mode displays an arbitrary fixed set of information element components. Click Choose IEs to select your data. You have two options: – – Keep the default color range for the information element. uncheck Use common colors and select a color in the box next to the information element. For an example of a Single IE presentation.1. then click OK.5. You will then be prompted to define colors later on. Define one fixed color to be used throughout in this chart. disregarding the default color range.1 User’s Manual MS Flip scale The device from which to pick the information element. • Now click Next to proceed to the next step. decide what colors should be used in the chart. • • • Make your changes.TEMS Investigation 14. To this end. uncheck it. This dialog appears: • • 344 . To set up this presentation. To do this. proceed as follows: • First decide whether you want to use the default color ranges of the information elements or define a fixed color for each element. Click OK in the Choose Information Element dialog.2. Otherwise.

the Color column will be absent from this dialog. a varying number of information elements may already be listed.e.). For each index you select one piece of data: an information element with no arguments. In either case. an index on the x-axis). A new row will then be inserted at the bottom of the table once the contents of the bar have been specified.Chapter 30. or one component of an element having arguments.0 345 . in the relevant table row. • To specify the data that should be represented by a bar (i. If you have checked Use common colors. depending on the type of bar chart concerned (template or predefined. etc. NT12-7002 ver 1. To add a new bar. click the Add button. Bar Charts Here. click the button in the IE column. the Choose Information Element dialog appears: • Select an information element.

When you are done specifying the bar chart contents.1. Click OK in the Choose Information Element dialog. Click Next to proceed to the next step. but when you exit the dialog all items will be renumbered starting at 1.4. click OK to return to the Edit Chart dialog. If you have unchecked Use common colors. Pick a color and click OK. 346 . The indices of the removed rows disappear from the table.1). • • For an example of a Multiple IE Components presentation. see section 30.1 User’s Manual • Double-click the item (or click the Edit button): • • • • • Specify range and scale properties. and click Remove. The table will look something like this: • To remove items from the bar chart. You can select all rows with Ctrl + A. select the corresponding rows in the table. The standard Windows color dialog appears. pick an argument. you are now prompted to define a color for this data item.TEMS Investigation 14. as described for the Single IE presentation mode (see section 30. To the IE for Fixed Layout dialog is now added the data item and color defined for the selected index.5. Click OK to exit the Edit IE dialog. If the information element is one with arguments.

Each information element may have arguments. The information elements are distributed on the x-axis. and an arbitrary number of components of each element may be shown at the same time. all its components being stacked on top of each other: arg 2 arg 1 arg 0 IEs Optionally. it plots all components of each information element on the y-axis. • In the stacked bar chart. and connects with a line each set of components that have the same argument: arg 0 arg 1 arg 2 IEs NT12-7002 ver 1. Bar Charts 30. The parallel coordinates presentation does not use bars and is thus not a bar chart in the literal sense. this arrangement may be reversed (one bar for each argument.4. at a fixed x-axis coordinate. and arguments are displayed in the y-direction. There are two graphical representations of the above (conceptually quite distinct): a stacked bar chart and a parallel coordinates presentation.1.0 347 . information elements stacked).Chapter 30. Rather.3. Parallel Coordinates/Stacked Bar Chart Presentation Mode This presentation mode is the most complex one. It has the following fundamental properties: • • A set of information elements is shown. one composite bar is drawn for each information element.

If you want a stacked bar chart instead. This dialog appears: Here.TEMS Investigation 14. rather than information elements. If you want a parallel coordinates presentation. such a presentation is possible but hardly has any natural interpretation within the TEMS Investigation framework. arguments stacked if you want to reverse the roles of the axes so that arguments. are distributed on the x-axis. proceed as follows: • Select Parallel coordinates (default) / Stacked bar chart.). depending on the type of bar chart concerned (template or predefined. arguments stacked. Selecting Data After deciding the basic properties of the presentation: • Click Choose IEs to select your data. make these settings: Do not uncheck IEs on x-axis. Setting Up Basic Properties of the Presentation To set up this presentation. 348 . etc.1 User’s Manual The parallel coordinates presentation is selected by default in this mode. check the Stacked bar chart box: • Uncheck IEs on x-axis. a varying number of information elements may already be listed.

A new row will then be inserted at the bottom of the table once the details have been specified. click the corresponding button. • • Select an information element.4. In either case. • • Click OK to exit the Edit IE dialog.1. click Add. NT12-7002 ver 1. as described for the Single IE presentation mode (see section 30. Double-click the item (or click the Edit button): • Specify range and scale properties. Bar Charts • To specify the details of how an information element should be presented.0 349 .Chapter 30. despite the fact that the bar segments (except the bottom one) will be displaced in relation to the scale bar. To add a new information element. Note: The y-axis scales look the same also for stacked bar charts. Click OK in the Choose Information Element dialog. the Choose Information Element dialog appears.1).

When you are done: • For an example of a Parallel Coordinates/Stacked Bar Chart presentation. For example: • To remove information elements from the bar chart.. When you are done specifying the bar chart contents. Click Next to proceed to the next step. Coord. Choose this option by unchecking Use common colors. You can select all rows with Ctrl + A. select the corresponding rows in the table and click Remove. Use fixed colors. you need to decide what colors should be used in the chart. The colors are chosen by the application and cannot be edited. • Finally. one for each argument. . dialog is now added the data item defined for the selected index.1 User’s Manual To the IEs for Par. but when you exit the dialog all items will be renumbered starting at 1. To this end.TEMS Investigation 14. You have two options: • • Keep the default color ranges for the information elements. check the Use common colors box.5. The indices of the removed rows disappear from the table. 350 .. see section 30. click OK to return to the Edit Chart dialog.

(Optional) Specifying text labels on the x-axis instead of the default numeric indices. Bar Charts 30. e.2. and only such elements are selectable. Interval and Labeling In this step you take care of the following: • • Indicating the interval to show on the x-axis.0 351 .g. Interval The interval selected here governs what portion of the x-axis will be visible in the bar chart.Chapter 30.4. Then the number of indices on the axis will always be • NT12-7002 ver 1. Scanned RxLev. This element must denote the current number of something in order to make sense. Note that this is done independently of the data selected in the preceding step. so that accepting the defaults will cause all data to be shown. Choose Set by IE to have the interval dynamically governed by an information element. it may be a good idea to have the interval governed by Scanned Channels No Of. The default values in the boxes are dependent on the data selected in the previous step. • Choose Fixed to set an unchanging interval. Example: If you want to display scan data.

3).. 30.1 User’s Manual equal to the number of channels currently scanned. Note: The Set by IE option is disabled for the Multiple IE Components presentation. . check Text labels on axis. • • any information element can be selected clicking the Edit IE button only enables you to change the device and argument. Presenting Data from a Different Device If you want to present the same data as before in a chart but from a different device. it is impractical to edit the MS field for each information element 352 . Example: If you want to display data on neighbors. but since the additional information is presented only as text and not graphically. Additional Information Here you choose the information elements to view in the Additional Information pane.4. either those given under Fixed or the arguments of the information element chosen under Set by IE. Labeling By default the x-axis is labeled simply with numbers.4. Select User-defined text labels to specify arbitrary text as labels. and the space available in the chart will be fully utilized at all times. you can replace the numbering with text labels.3. the bar width being adapted continuously.. since this by itself stipulates a fixed number of x-axis indices. • • To enable user-defined text labels. There are two options: • 30.TEMS Investigation 14.4. found in the information element Neighbor Cell Name.4. Select Text strings from IE to pick labels from a text-format information element. A dialog appears where you enter a string for each index. This dialog works like the Information Elements tab in the line chart properties (see section 29. Click the Compose button. you might want to label the x-axis with the neighbor cell names. Alternatively.

4.) 30. Single IE Single IE presentation: Neighbor RxLev (Sorted). (The information elements selected in the charts will be unchanged.1. From the context menu.5.0 353 . Therefore.1. Examples of Bar Chart Presentations Here are a couple of examples of how the presentation modes can be used. • Right-click in the bar chart window. select the device to pick data from. NT12-7002 ver 1. there is a shortcut for this operation. choose Change MS: • For each chart. Bar Charts separately as described in section 30.Chapter 30.

1 User’s Manual Multiple IE Components Multiple IE Components presentation displaying an assortment of single-value IEs and selected components of multivalue IEs. 354 . Note that only half of the legend is visible in the picture. and with user-defined text labels added on the x-axis.TEMS Investigation 14.

6. Parallel Coordinates Parallel coordinates presentation (the predefined Radio Parameters Parallel Bar Chart for WCDMA). NT12-7002 ver 1. Each point on the horizontal axis represents a network parameter. and the colored line. This arrangement allows the user to spot instantaneously any pattern that is out of the ordinary (that is.Chapter 30. any unexpected line shape).7. connecting a set of parameter values. 30. represents a moment in time. Bar Charts Stacked Bar Chart. See section 23.bch.0 355 . Exporting the Bar Chart Window The bar chart window can be exported separately to a file with extension .

31. Map windows are fully user-configurable. Data on cells.5. The following sections. and you might not have use for all of it. A map usually consists of several map layers (see Layer) and is presented in a Map window. A map of the world is provided with the installation. use this section as a reference. TEMS Investigation must have access to positioning data. Highlights of This Chapter This chapter contains a great deal of information. are central: • • First. events.TEMS Investigation 14. numeric values can also be easily accessed. Map files used in TEMS Investigation must be in MapInfo. Like the other presentation windows. to be able to use a map file in TEMS Investigation. If you have loaded a cell file and want to view cell information. 356 . and information elements are shown along the route in symbolic form. The concepts are explained again as they are brought up later in the chapter. 31. bitmap.1 User’s Manual 31.5. some central concepts relating to Map windows are defined. Map Concepts In this section. you must work through some preliminaries which are described in sections 31. You might want to skim this section the first time around to make yourself familiar with the concepts.1. Then you can proceed to set up what data you want to present on the map.2. Map Windows Map windows are used to display a map of your testing area and present your drive test route graphically on this map.3–31. Note also that to be able to plot measurements on a map. turn to section 31. however. or uncompressed TIF format. Map A map is a set of geographical features which are treated as a unit. How to do this is explained in section 31.5.4.

Each layer is stored in five different files with the extensions . . all of the same main type (see Theme below). Theme A theme is a component of a presentation layer. A map layer may.tab. consist of all the roads or all the water areas on the map. A presentation layer contains one or several themes.Chapter 31. Label A label is a text string that belongs to a map and can be displayed on it. A GeoSet contains settings regarding layer order. for example. GeoSet A GeoSet (file extension .map. you should construct a GeoSet file for it to be able to save changes to the map later on. This file can then be opened in a Map window. If you have a new map that you want to use in TEMS Investigation. 31. Map Windows TEMS Investigation supports the following map formats: MapInfo. which make up the map itself. it consists of a number of map layers and a workspace which ties them together.ind. colors. One presentation layer is predefined for each main type of theme. . projections.3. which contain information relating to the cellular network. and presentation layers. If your map is in MapInfo format. labels.3).dat. bitmap. an information element or a type of event.1. . and TIF (uncompressed only). a further layer is provided for pinpoint markers (see section 11. These files are from now on collectively referred to as TAB files.0 357 .gst) is a special type of workspace used for map layers. NT12-7002 ver 1. There are two types of layer: map layers. etc. for example. Constructing a GeoSet from Map Files A Map window in TEMS Investigation works with a GeoSet instead of an ordinary workspace. zoom levels. and . displaying.id. Additional layers can be defined by the user. Layer A layer is a set of data from a particular category which is displayed in a Map window.

Note: The GeoSet Manager will ask you to open a GeoSet. On the Map window toolbar. 358 . you must generate TAB files for it. • Name your new GeoSet in the edit box of the toolbar. Click Save. • Select your newly created GeoSet file and click Open. You are ready to start presenting data: see section 31.2. • • • • • Click Add.5. You are prompted to name the GeoSet. Click OK. but then any changes made using the Layer Control will be lost.TEMS Investigation 14. Choose File  Exit to close the GeoSet Manager. Select the TAB files you copied to your map directory and click Open.4. The map is now displayed with all its layers. Once you have your TAB files.bmp). Note: It is possible to load TAB files in a Map window directly. avoid using 24-bit bitmap images as maps. • Copy the map’s TAB files to your map directory. click the Start GeoSet Manager button.1 User’s Manual If your map is in bitmap format (extension . This is done by positioning the map as described in section 31. If possible. This will save your new GeoSet file under the name you entered in the GeoSet Name edit box. Click Cancel to ignore this. All the selected layers are added to the Layer Control. Click Layer Control. • The map should now be displayed in the Map window. Click Open Map Files.7. The GeoSet file must be in the same directory as the TAB files. See section 31. you can construct a GeoSet. without constructing a GeoSet. Choose File  Save GeoSet.

0 359 .4.1. Positioning Bitmap and TIF Maps If you open a map in bitmap or uncompressed TIF format that has not yet been assigned geographical coordinates and scale information. enter the coordinates (in decimal degrees) of the point you wish to use.Chapter 31. 31. you must supply this data yourself.4. In the Reference Point section. click the point that has the given coordinates.2. in the Latitude and Longitude fields. Specifying the Map Scale In this step you indicate the distance between some two points on the map. 31. • • • Specifying the Map Position In this step you input the coordinates of a point on the map. NT12-7002 ver 1. so that the map scale can be calculated. Click the Pick button in the Reference Point section. • In the Distance section. Click Position Map. Map Windows 31. On the map. click the Pick button.4.

In the Distance field. you use presentation layers and fill these with themes. The offset lies between –180° and +180°.5. However.5.4 360 .TEMS Investigation 14. in order to present data. a positive number indicating a clockwise offset. see section 31. you do not need to worry about handling presentation layers. 31. In short. Release the mouse button at the second point. in the North Offset Angle field.4.5. each presenting a different kind of data: • • information element (IE) themes.1 User’s Manual • On the map. Click OK. A file with the same name as the image but with the extension . For example. • Setting the Map’s North Direction What remains is to indicate the north direction of the map. presenting an event. Themes and Theme Types A theme is basically a bundle of settings describing how to present a set of data. you can also modify presentation layers and create new ones. When you move the mouse. These are the main types of theme.7. 31. all your work is to do with themes and is covered in the present section. How to do this is described in section 31. to get started with presenting data. see section 31. In the Direction section.tab is created. presenting a set of information elements (at most three). A set of presentation layers is already supplied in the application.5. a dashed blue line appears. enter the offset between the map’s x-axis and its direction of north. enter 90°.3 event themes.tab file is the map file you will use from now on.3. The coordinates of the chosen points appear in the X_Y fields. The *. Presenting Data: Themes This section describes how to present cellular network data on the map. • Your map is now positioned. if the map is oriented with north pointing up. click the first point and keep the mouse button down. • 31.1. enter the actual distance between the two points. Therefore.

5. How to manipulate layers is the subject of section 31. There are several subtypes of cell theme. along with a number of themes. Certain presentation layers are predefined. RF Quality. Map Windows • • cell themes.0 361 . as is seen in this screenshot (where some layers have been expanded). NT12-7002 ver 1. You can add new presentation layers if desired.6. the Pinpoint theme. and AMR layers event themes in the Event layer cell themes in the Cell layer the pinpoint theme in the Pinpoint layer. 31. presenting cell information. see section 31.2. The various types of theme are put in different layers: • • • • IE themes in the Coverage.5. see section 31.5.5. you always put it in a presentation layer. Click Add/Edit Themes to view the current presentation layers and the themes within them. presenting pinpointing information. Presentation Layers When you create a theme.Chapter 31.7.

size.1 User’s Manual 31. dedicated mode. sizes. select one of the layers (or create a new layer to put the theme in: see section 31.3. For example. The colors.TEMS Investigation 14. and use different symbols when the phone is in idle mode.3. the marker can code the values of up to three numeric information elements. and to use a suite of symbols for such things as status parameters having a small set of possible values. you create information element themes (hereafter called IE themes).7). Presenting Information Elements To present information elements. To create a new IE theme: • • In the Theme Settings dialog. you can have the marker color governed by RxLev and the marker size by RxQual. Click Add Theme: 362 . It is not possible to define these attributes differently in the map. and shape. By varying its color. and symbols used in the map are always the default ones for each information element. as set on the Info Element tab of the Navigator: see section 5. it is appropriate to use the color and size attributes for information elements with a continuous value range. and so on: More generally. These govern the appearance of a marker that is plotted on the map.5.

Using offsets enables you to display several routes side by side. NT12-7002 ver 1. Choose Fixed to use a fixed color.Chapter 31.0 363 . Color • Size In this section you specify a rule for the theme marker size. This means. See Information Elements and Events. Choose the device from which to pick the information element. Map Windows System Mobile Offset (pixels) Choose an information element category. Select an element. This setting decides how far from its true position on the map the theme marker will be drawn. that the color will not carry any information. chapter 2. The offset direction is at right angles to the direction of travel. a positive offset is to the right relative to the direction of travel. See above. In this section you specify a rule for the theme marker color: • Choose Range to have the color governed by an information element. and select an argument if applicable. in the same way as for the color. of course.

Note also that certain information elements are not updated regularly at all but only on special occasions (for example. Another basic fact to keep in mind is that the position of a theme marker does not necessarily correspond exactly to a pair of GPS or pinpointing coordinates. for instance circles. Arrival of new measurement data. A new theme marker is plotted only if a message with fresh data has been delivered by the measurement device. whether delivered by a GPS or pinpointed. However.1. See below. If GPS data is lost for an extended period of time (for instance while driving through a tunnel) but GPS coverage is eventually regained. The Fixed options are useful if you want to use an IE theme just for plotting the route. and not for showing measurement data. positions will still be interpolated and plotted throughout the gap. it appears in the box in the Theme Settings dialog under the layer it belongs to.5. A general rule is that new theme markers are drawn at most twice a second. Updates will thus be less frequent in idle mode than in dedicated mode. Loss of positioning data. pick a font in the first combo box. are constantly interpolated (linearly) to enable plotting at half-second intervals.3.5. interpolation is of course impossible. Uniform markers. If you want to plot such an IE with high frequency.1 User’s Manual Symbol In this section you specify a rule for choosing the shape of the theme marker. On the other hand.1 below). 31. and no extrapolation of the route is attempted by TEMS Investigation. if no more positioning data is obtained.3. If you choose Fixed. Map positions. when the phone switches to a different RAB). • • 364 . will then be plotted along the route at the shortest possible time intervals (about factors influencing this updating rate. Notes on Route Plotting and Updating The updating frequency for IE themes is governed by a number of factors.TEMS Investigation 14. Here is a summary of the factors that affect theme plotting and updating: • Interpolation. see section 31. include another IE that is frequently updated in the same theme. in the same way as for the color. whether markers are actually plotted at this rate depends on other circumstances. then pick a symbol in the second. Note that some information elements are not updated this often. Once the IE theme has been defined.

Presenting Events To present an event. Specifically. Choose the device from which to pick this type of event. Map Windows • Map zoom.0 365 . NT12-7002 ver 1. when you zoom out. The plotting density on the map is dependent on the current zoom of the Map window.5. Click Add Theme: Event Mobile Choose an event type. a new theme object (whether a symbol or a line) is drawn next to the latest one if the centers of the two objects will be more than 5 pixels apart on the screen. When you zoom in. 31.4. you create an event theme. markers are drawn more sparsely. more markers are filled in to show the route in more detail. select the layer named Event Layer. • • In the Theme Settings dialog. you must reload the logfile to make this event theme visible. Note: If you create a new event theme for a user-defined event after loading a logfile.Chapter 31.

e.3. The themes can be defined at any time. you do not have to load a cell file first.1 User’s Manual Offset (pixels) Set the offset. i. It is possible to have more than one cell file loaded. Note that this requires a bitmap with a white background. with the obvious exception of GSM-specific information such as the Cell ARFCN theme. This presentation also applies to WiMAX cells and Wi-Fi access points defined in an XML cell file (see the Technical Reference.5. It has the same meaning as for information elements.5. How to load cell files is described in section 6.10). a couple of cell themes are predefined. sections 4. Presenting Cell Information1 To present cell information. all white pixels in the bitmap become transparent. • If this is checked. For events it is appropriate to use a non-zero offset (for instance 20 pixels) so that event theme symbols are not hidden by the IE theme markers plotted on the route. See section 31. Where the presentation differs between cellular technologies. It is also possible to draw cell information for multiple technologies in the same theme. with a separate theme for each. you create cell themes.2. see section 31.5.) Cell information for different technologies can be kept apart in the presentation.5.5. and set its size.3. Select your image. the bitmap is drawn exactly as-is. then pick a symbol and set its size and color. If this is not checked. Furthermore. individual cells can be tagged with a type. Select the font. Bitmap Transparent Select this to use a bitmap image as event symbol. the underlying layer shines through.9 and 4.TEMS Investigation 14.1 below. 366 .5. otherwise no transparency is achieved. Wi-Fi and WiMAX both follow GSM.7.7. 1. This enables the creation of cell themes displaying arbitrary groups of cells. as is evident from section 31. (In fact. • Font Select this to pick an event symbol from a font. 31. in the XML cell file format.

To create a new cell theme. Choose a cell theme type. Presentation on Map Three-sector site (three cells) Omni cell The zoom of the Map window does not affect this theme.5.4 In the Theme Settings dialog.0 367 .5. However. which by default hide the Cell theme.5. Map Windows The following kinds of cell theme exist: • • • • Basic plotting of cell sites (Cell theme): section 31.5. see sections 31. Note that certain cells are filled with other colors by other cell themes.5.5.5. The Cell Theme This theme is concerned with basic plotting of cell sites. select Cell Layer.5.Chapter 31. text labels have been turned off in all of the remaining illustrations in section 31.3 (GSM:) Indication of cells using the same ARFCN as a given cell (Cell ARFCN theme): section 31. NT12-7002 ver 1. All cell sites are always plotted.1 Indication of serving cell and handover (Cell Line theme): section 31.5.5.5.1.5.3 and 31. proceed as follows: • • • 31. regardless of the zoom. The Select Theme Type dialog appears.4.5.5. Click Add Theme.2 Visualization of neighbor relations (Cell Color theme): section 31.5.5. Each cell is tagged with a text label if you turn on the Cell labels option (see below). to avoid clutter.

Choose ALL to plot cells from all technologies. chapters 3 and 4. In XML cell files this is identical with the CELL_TYPE element: see the Technical Reference.) Cell type Type of cell indicated in cell file.13. section 4. GSM and WCDMA cells are told apart by inspection of what type of channel is defined (ARFCN or UARFCN). In CEL files. Choose a cellular technology to plot only cells from that technology. Cell presentation 368 .1 User’s Manual Setup Dialog Cells to plot System This section governs which of the cells defined in the cell file will be plotted.TEMS Investigation 14. This section governs how cells are drawn.7. (Regarding cellular technology support in the CEL and XML cell file formats. see the Technical Reference. You might want to create one Cell theme for each technology.

Chapter 31. see the illustration in section 31.5. provided that the cell is completely described in the cell file.0 369 .3 and 31. • Cell labels If you check this option. it is set to zero degrees in the plot (sector centered on “twelve o’clock”). The color to be used for the border of the cell symbol.4). Uncheck to make the symbol transparent.6. If you uncheck this option. The color to be used for the interior of the cell symbol. Incomplete cells The default color to be used for cells that are incompletely described in the cell file. it turns red. incompletely described cells will not be marked as such in any way. In either case. this highlighting ceases to be visible if a Cell Color or Cell ARFCN theme is also displayed: see sections 31.5. taken from the cell file. When you select a cell. a text label will be printed next to each cell. Map Windows Radius (pixels) Border color Fill color The radius of each cell symbol (circle/sector of circle) in pixels. is as follows: • • • • • GSM: Cell name WCDMA: Cell name and SC LTE: Cell name TD-SCDMA: Cell name CDMA: Cell name NT12-7002 ver 1.5.5. If the beam width is not stated. it is set to 360º in the plot (omni cell. full circle). The displayed information. the following plotting rules apply: • If the antenna direction is not stated in the cell file. (However.

This points out the cell that uses the currently strongest signal as measured by the scanning device. LTE. provided that cells from both cellular technologies are visible in the Cell theme (section 31. no interaction with base stations is involved during scanning. GPS data and the contents of a signal strength information element are correlated with the coordinates in the cell file. rather. GSM.TEMS Investigation 14.1).5. Technology-specific information: Parameters used to measure signal strength • • • • • • • GSM: RxLev WCDMA: Aggregate Ec LTE: RSRQ TD-SCDMA: Ec/Io CDMA: Aggregate Ec WiMAX: Channel RSSI Wi-Fi: WLAN RSSI 370 . this theme is used to indicate • • the serving cell (WCDMA/CDMA idle mode.2.5. TD-SCDMA) active set members (WCDMA connected mode/CDMA traffic mode) (The user interface uses only the term “serving cell”. the theme indicates positions where handovers have taken place. The Cell Line Theme This theme is used to indicate serving cells and positions where handovers have taken place. Inter-system handovers are visualized in the same way as intrasystem handovers. the Cell Line theme gives a best server indication.1 User’s Manual 31.) Additionally. The Cell Line theme has different meanings depending on the data source: phone or scanner. Use with Phone Data For a phone.5. Of course. and the cell is identified which a user terminal at the same position would be most likely to use. Use with Scan Data With scan data.5.

1). cell lines are plotted with a variable density.Chapter 31. Map Windows Presentation on Map route line to current serving cell Like IE theme markers (section 31. all that is said of serving cells/active set also applies to best server indications.0 371 . This density is governed among other things by the zoom of the Map window. ensuring that large swaths of the map are not completely covered by such lines when the Leave trail option is checked.5. Setup Dialog Below. NT12-7002 ver 1.3.

TEMS Investigation 14. Before choosing the information element (and an argument if applicable). a line is drawn from the position where the new serving cell or active set member is first used. although no actual handover is involved. These settings refer to indication of handovers. The line remains after the phone has moved on. See Color governed by IE below. Set the offset for the starting point of the line. The line width is adjustable. choose the desired category in the System combo box.5. Choose the phone whose serving cells are to be displayed. Check this to leave all serving cell lines on the map. At handover.3). i. The line will remain on the map.1 User’s Manual System Mobile Offset (pixels) Governs what IEs are selectable. Select this to have the serving cell line drawn in a fixed color. Serving cell Serving cell line Fixed color Color governed by IE Leave trail Serving cell list changed Line to added cell Line to removed cell 372 . It has the same meaning as for information elements (see section 31.e. Pick a color in the combo box. although no actual handover is involved. Note that they are independent of the Serving cell settings. These settings govern the indication of current and past serving cells/active set members. At handover. Check this to continually display a line connecting the current position along the route with the current serving cell/active set members. Select this to have the color of the connecting line(s) governed by an information element. the line is shifted in the same way as an IE theme marker. This feature is available also for best server indications. a line is drawn from the position where the old serving cell or active set member is last used. This feature is available also for best server indications.

5. the theme will be displayed with that cell as serving cell instead. NT12-7002 ver 1.5. The neighbor relations shown are those indicated in the loaded cell file. the neighbor presentation is not affected by the phone’s neighbor reporting. independently of the phone’s interaction with the network. active set WCDMA example: Cell Color and Cell Line themes. Active set members pointed out by solid lines (black). By default. Presentation on Map yellow color from Cell theme GSM example: Cell Color theme (no route).0 373 . the cell drawn in green will be the phone’s current serving cell. in the realtime presentation as well as during logfile analysis. The Cell Color Theme This theme is used to visualize the neighbor relations of the current serving cell/active set members or of an arbitrary user-selected cell (only one cell at a time).Chapter 31. therefore. if you click an arbitrary cell. The only phone data fed into this theme is the serving cell data. Map Windows 31. Neighbors indicated for all active set members (dashed red lines). However.3.

TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual

• •

The presentation for LTE and TD-SCDMA is similar to that for GSM. The presentation for CDMA is similar to that for WCDMA.

By default the Cell Color theme is drawn on top of the Cell theme (section 31.5.5.1). That is, cells drawn in yellow (or highlighted in red) in the Cell theme will be overlaid with the differently colored cells of the Cell Color theme, as in the above figures. Setup Dialog

System Mobile Colors: Serving cell

Not used; the choice does not matter. Choose the phone whose serving cell is to be displayed. The fill color to use for the serving cell. If you uncheck this box, the cell is not drawn (and, by default, the version of it displayed in the underlying Cell theme will be visible instead). The fill color to use for neighbors of the serving cell. If you uncheck this box, the neighbor cells are not drawn in this theme.

Colors: Neighbor cells

374

Chapter 31. Map Windows

Colors: Servingto-neighbor lines

If single serving cell in use: Check this to display dashed lines connecting the serving cell with each of its neighbors. If multi-cell active set in use: Check this to display, for each active set member, dashed lines connecting the active set member with each of its neighbors.

31.5.5.4.

The Cell ARFCN Theme (GSM)

This theme is used to point out other cells that use a specified BCCH or TCH of a selected cell. It is intended as an aid in GSM interferer identification, a function no longer supported in TEMS Investigation. The theme is retained since loading of old logfiles containing interferer identification data is still supported. To display the theme, do as follows: • Right-click the cell of interest. A context menu appears, listing the BCCH and the TCHs that it uses. Choose the ARFCN that you want to search for among other cells:

By default, matching cells are colored as follows: • • Cells that use the selected ARFCN as BCCH are colored cyan (light greenish blue). Cells that use the selected ARFCN as TCH are colored blue.

NT12-7002 ver 1.0

375

TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual

Presentation on Map

selected cell; BCCH selected in context menu other cell using same ARFCN as TCH
Cell ARFCN theme.

other cell using same ARFCN as BCCH

By default the Cell ARFCN theme is drawn on top of the Cell theme but beneath the Cell Color theme, so you may need to hide the latter or change the ordering of the themes. Setup Dialog

System Same BCCH ARFCN Same TCH ARFCN

Not used; the choice does not matter. The fill color to use for cells that use the selected ARFCN as BCCH. The fill color to use for cells that use the selected ARFCN as TCH.

376

Chapter 31. Map Windows

31.5.6.

Presenting Pinpointing

The Pinpoint theme presents the markers that you create when positioning data by pinpointing in the Map window (see section 11.1.3). Note: The Pinpoint theme is needed in order for the Map window pinpointing mechanism itself to work. Therefore, this theme should never be removed. The following properties can be edited for the Pinpoint theme:

Symbol Line

Type, size, and color of waypoint symbols. Color and width of lines connecting waypoints.

31.5.7.
• •

Editing Themes

To edit a theme: In the Theme Settings dialog, select the theme you want to edit. Click Edit.

31.5.8.

Visibility of Themes

In the Theme Settings dialog, the checkbox next to each layer and theme governs whether or not it is visible.

NT12-7002 ver 1.0

377

TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual

• •

To show a theme, check the box. To hide a theme, uncheck the box.

The same also applies to layers (section 31.7).

31.5.9.
• • •

Reordering Themes

To change the order in which themes are superimposed within a layer: In the Theme Settings dialog, select the theme you want to move. To move the theme upwards, click Up. To move the theme downwards, click Down.

The ordering is of particular relevance for cell-related themes (section 31.5.5).

31.5.10. Deleting Themes
To delete a theme: • • In the Theme Settings dialog, select the theme you want to delete. Click Delete.

31.6.
31.6.1.

The Right-hand Pane
Information on Single Theme Markers (Info Tab)

When you select a single theme marker on the map, the marker is highlighted in red,1 and the Info tab shows (some of) the data represented by this marker.

1. Exception: If a Cell Color theme is active, the selected cell is presented as a serving cell and is colored green.

378

Chapter 31. Map Windows

IE marker

Event marker

For cells, a selection of cell and channel parameters are shown, along with the cell’s defined neighbors (the red cell is highlighted):

Cell markers

For Wi-Fi access points, the cell parameters are replaced by a set of Wi-Fi parameters. There is further interplay between the map and the Info tab. For example, if you click a neighbor of the cell described in the Cells section of the Info tab, the neighbor will take over the role of serving cell in the Cell Color theme, so that its own neighbors are displayed instead. If a group of theme markers is selected, the Info tab instead shows statistics on the selected data: see section 31.6.2.

NT12-7002 ver 1.0

379

TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual

31.6.2.

Theme Statistics (Info and Graph Tabs)

You can view some basic statistics for a set of theme markers selected on the map. Textual information is then presented on the Info tab, and graphs are drawn on the Graph tab. There are two ways to select a set of theme markers: To select all objects within a rectangular area, use the Area Statistics Tool. Click and drag in the map pane to mark the rectangle. To select a segment of a route, use the Selection Tool. Click the marker where you want the segment to begin. Press and hold Ctrl, then click the marker that is to be the endpoint of the segment. (It is not possible to select an arbitrary set of objects.) When you release the mouse, statistics for the chosen marker set are computed and shown on the Info tab: • The Information Elements box holds the information elements contained in the selected theme markers. Next to the name of an element is shown the mean value of the element calculated over the selected markers. (Averaging of signal strength values takes place in the mW domain.) Expand the information element to view the full set of statistics: mean, minimum, maximum, and number of samples. The Events box shows the number of occurrences of every event that has a theme defined for it (not just those actually found among the selected theme markers). The Cells box shows all cells that have been used as serving cells at the positions included in the marker set. For the Area Statistics tool, cells that are within the rectangle but have never been serving cells are not shown.

On the Graph tab, a histogram is drawn for each information element contained in the selected theme markers. A green curve indicates the cumulative distribution. Statistics can be computed in both recording and analysis mode. It should be noted that the map plotting may be more or less thinned out (see section 31.5.3.1), so that more data goes into the statistics than actually appears on the map.

380

Chapter 31. Map Windows

31.6.3.

Theme Legend (Legend Tab)

The Legend tab gives an overview of all presentation themes, or selected ones, displaying full details of theme settings. Use the combo box at the top to select what to show.

31.7.

Layers

Section 31.5 introduced the concept of presentation layer. This section treats layers in more detail. Generally speaking, layers are sets of data which together make up the contents of a Map window. Besides the presentation layer, there are also map layers, which make up the map itself and cannot be edited. In both types of layers, however, it is possible to make a number of settings that do not affect the contents of the layers, for instance to set the visibility of each layer. These settings are detailed below.

31.7.1.

Adding Presentation Layers

Normally there is no need to add new presentation layers, since predefined layers are provided for the various types of theme. However, if you should want to define a set of data that you want to manage separately in a convenient way (for instance turn the visibility on and off), then you should put that data in a separate presentation layer. To create a new presentation layer, proceed as follows: Click Add/Edit Themes. • In the dialog that appears, click Add Layer:

Layer name

Name the new presentation layer.

NT12-7002 ver 1.0

381

TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual

Layer type

Choose a layer type, corresponding to the theme types listed in section 31.5.1.

31.7.2.

Layer Control

The Layer Control dialog is used to edit various properties of layers. Note: The Layer Control can be accessed either from a Map window or from the GeoSet Manager. Changes made from a Map window affect only that window and cannot be saved. If you want to make changes that can be saved, use the Layer Control of the GeoSet Manager (see section 31.10). • To open the Layer Control: Click the Layer Control button.

Up, Down

Change the order in which layers are superimposed on the screen. (The top layer is first in the list.) To move a layer upwards, select it and click Up. To move a layer downwards, select it and click Down.

382

Note that the visibility of presentation layers can also be set in the Theme Settings dialog (see section 31. the layer they belong to must be visible. Note that the visibility of labels may be conditioned by the zoom range. See Labels below. The unit of distance is governed from the Control Panel in Windows (e. Select a TAB file and click Open. Disabled for presentation layers. Disabled for presentation layers. Check to make the labels of the selected layer visible. 31. Check to make the selected layer in the list visible.Chapter 31. should be turned off for map layers.8). The Scale Bar This command shows and hides a scale bar showing distance in kilometers or miles.2.g. Selectable Automatic Labels Not used.0 383 . Map Windows Add Remove Visible Add a layer. 31. should be turned off for map layers. 31. Set display properties for the selected layer.8.5. Previous View This command returns you to the previous map view. Editable Display Labels Not used. Remove the selected layer. Regional Options  NumbersMeasurement System).1.8. (No further history of views is maintained. For labels to be visible. a context menu appears with choices as described below. Disabled for presentation layers. Map Context Menu When you right-click in the map.) NT12-7002 ver 1. Set label properties for the selected layer.8.

8.1 User’s Manual 31. but many others relate to map handling and have not previously been mentioned. GeoSet Manager: Start the GeoSet Manager which is used for creating new GeoSet files and for changing the properties of a GeoSet. 31. View Entire Layer This commands zooms out to show the whole of the chosen layer. To make changes to the GeoSet. See sections 31.6. Position Map: Position a map which is in bitmap or uncompressed TIF format.10. Some of these activate functions described earlier in this chapter. Press and hold Ctrl to select a segment of a route (see section 31. or add. Layer Control: Manage layers or change displaying or labeling properties.2).TEMS Investigation 14. Setting the Map Projection This command allows you to set the map projection.10.2.2).9. See section 31. use the layer control in the GeoSet Manager. choose an information element layer to view the whole of your route. see section 31. Open Map: Open a map. It should be the same as in the cell file. Changes are only temporary and cannot be saved. Zoom In: Enlarge a portion of the map to view it in more detail. edit or remove themes. 31. Area Statistics Tool: Click and drag to view statistics for presentation layer objects within a rectangle (see section 31.3.1. See section 31.8. The Map Window Toolbar This section gives a description of the Map window toolbar buttons.7.4.3 and 31. Selection Tool: Click a presentation layer object to select it. For example.4. See section 31.6. Doubleclick the object to inspect what information it contains. Add/Edit Themes: Add or remove presentation layers. 384 .5.

Chapter 31. However. 31.0 385 . except cell site information. choose View. If you have zoomed in and want to view the entire route again. and specify one of the presentation layers. To change the unit of distance.10. right-click in the map. Ruler: Measure the distance of a route on the map consisting of straight line segments. and select the Defaults tab. changes made using NT12-7002 ver 1. Holding down the Ctrl key swaps the zoom operations. Pan Tool: Move the map by clicking and dragging. Previous Item: Select the previous object of the same type.1. then click at each turn. right-click in the map. see section 11. Map Windows Zoom Out: View a larger area than the current map view. Clear Map: Remove all the information in presentation layers from the map. Pinpoint: Mark waypoints on the map. Next Item: Select the next object of the same type. Last Item: Select the last object of the same type.3. The following buttons are enabled only when an object belonging to a theme has been selected: First Item: Select the first object of the same type. choose Entire Layer. Click in the map to indicate a starting point. Double-click at the endpoint. Regarding positioning of logfile data by pinpointing in the Map window. while changes made in a Map window cannot be saved. GeoSet Manager The GeoSet Manager looks and works much like a Map window. choose Map Properties. The distance of the last segment and the total distance are shown on the status bar at the bottom of the Map window. Center Map: Click a spot in the map to center it around this spot.

31.10. • To change the projection. To start the GeoSet Manager.1.gst) file associated with the map. 31.10.7.TEMS Investigation 14. 386 . If your GeoSet contains multiple layers with different projections.2. click the Start GeoSetManager button on the Map window toolbar. See section 31. Layer Control The Layer Control works the same way as in Map windows.1 User’s Manual the GeoSet Manager can be saved to the GeoSet (*.2. choose Map  Projections. make sure you choose the projection of the layer you usually work with. Projections It is possible to set which projection to use for a GeoSet.

are collected miscellaneous settings that affect the behavior of the TEMS Investigation application. These settings are covered elsewhere in this manual in the appropriate contexts. The General Window In the General window. The General Window 32.0 387 . NT12-7002 ver 1.Chapter 32. found on the Navigator’s Menu tab in the Configuration folder.

all data needed for KPIs is recorded in TEMS Investigation logfiles. however. In the present version of TEMS Investigation. to measure accessibility. A number of KPIs are not present in the ETSI specification. Key Performance Indicators – KPIs (UMTS) KPIs (Key Performance Indicators) are offered in TEMS products for measuring the user-perceived performance of a number of circuit-switched and packet-switched services. these are tagged “not in ETSI” in the Technical Reference. that is.TEMS Investigation 14. Purpose of KPIs Most of the KPIs have been designed according to ETSI TS 102 250-2 V1. where a “KPI Report” function was provided. and integrity. chapter 11.1 The present chapter gives an general discussion of KPIs as well as an overview of how to obtain them with TEMS products. Note that this is different from certain previous TEMS Investigation versions.4. Listings and brief definitions of the KPIs are found in the Technical Reference. retainability.1 for performance measurements. KPIs are not computed in TEMS Investigation or handled explicitly in the application in any way. chapter 11. Full detail on technical matters is given in separate documents which are found on the installation CD in the subdirectory Documents. TEMS Discovery or TEMS Automatic are the products to use for explicitly generating KPIs and reports that present them. 33.1. 388 .1 User’s Manual 33. KPI data can be collected for GSM and WCDMA. 1.

33. 33. in order for a service to be accessible in a packet-switched network. 33. 33.1. such as (in the packet-switched case) manual reactivation of the PDP context. accessing an IP service (for WAP and MMS) activating a WAP session. Compose a TEMS Investigation script that executes one or several services. Even if a service was accessed successfully. Retainability of a service or session also implies that the user does not have to perform any manual operations that are not necessary under stable network conditions.3.1.2. The script structure should be modeled on the predefined snippets that are provided for each service type in order to ensure that all aspects of the data collection are in accordance with ETSI KPI definitions. from very good to unacceptably bad. Accessibility Accessibility is the ability of the user to obtain a service within specified tolerances and under other given conditions.1.2.e. perform the following steps: 1. Key Performance Indicators – KPIs (UMTS) 33. For example.2. Furthermore.0 389 . under given conditions for a requested period of time.1. Retainability Retainability is the ability of the user to keep a service. the user must be able to execute a chain of operations: • • • accessing the packet-switched network as such. performing an attach and a PDP context activation within an active PDP context. Obtaining KPIs with TEMS Products General Procedure To obtain KPIs. once it has been accessed.1. i. the service testing should be enclosed by the NT12-7002 ver 1. Integrity Integrity indicates the degree to which a service is maintained without major disturbances once it has been accessed. the user’s perception of the performance may vary greatly.Chapter 33. Integrity KPIs show the performance of successful service attempts.

“Events of KPI Type” When you test services in TEMS Investigation.2.9 on snippets.2. please consult the documentation accompanying the relevant product.4. special KPI events are displayed in the window Events Of KPI Type. and generate KPI reports using one of these products. Obtaining Significant KPI Statistics To obtain reliable KPI statistics you need to collect sufficient amounts of data. These events underlie the computation of KPIs. 3.3. “Data Events”. 390 . see Information Elements and Events volume. For details. found on the installation CD in the subdirectory Documents. Open the logfile(s) produced by the script in TEMS Discovery or TEMS Automatic. See chapter 20. and particularly section 20. The mathematical relationships between sample size and statistical accuracy are given in a separate document.TEMS Investigation 14. Run the script in TEMS Investigation. 2. 33. 33. section 7.2.1 User’s Manual control activities Start Recording and Stop Recording. “Statistical Guidelines for Collecting KPI Data”.

34. or CDMA cellular network as perceived by a human listener.3). but no comprehensive point-by-point comparison is made. SQI for CDMA can be based on data from any CDMA phone that is connectable in TEMS Investigation. WCDMA. See also the document “Speech Quality Measurement with SQI” which is included on the TEMS Investigation installation CD in the subdirectory Documents. although its fundamental function remains similar to that of the old algorithm (the output of which is still available in TEMS Investigation). 34.1. and attention is drawn to certain important differences between the algorithms. in TEMS Investigation 9.1. the SQI algorithm was completely reworked.1. This chapter examines the workings of the SQI algorithm. see section 34.2.1.0 391 . NT12-7002 ver 1. SQI for CDMA currently does not support wideband. Reference is made to the previously used algorithm (the “old SQI”). However. The focus of this chapter is to describe the new algorithm (called “SQI-MOS” in the application.0.Chapter 34. Background SQI for UMTS SQI for GSM and WCDMA is a long-standing feature of TEMS products. the SQI-MOS algorithm includes a model for rating wideband speech. As wideband speech codecs are now being deployed in mobile phones and networks. 34. Computing SQI for GSM and WCDMA requires data collected with Sony Ericsson phones. SQI for CDMA SQI for CDMA uses an SQI-MOS algorithm similar to those for GSM and WCDMA. Speech Quality Index – SQI 34. Speech Quality Index – SQI TEMS products offer the quality measure SQI (Speech Quality Index) for estimating the downlink speech quality in a GSM.

1 User’s Manual 34. the percentage of radio frames/blocks that are lost on their way to the receiving party.75 FR/HR.2.2 FR. 8. Moreover. 392 .2 FR. 5.1.95 FR/HR. It should be noted that in WCDMA. In GSM. 7. usually because of bad radio conditions. 6. on the other hand.4 FR/HR. 7. each speech codec has its own strengths and weaknesses with regard to input properties and channel conditions.1 More generally. 4. handover block errors can usually be avoided thanks to the soft handover mechanism.2.TEMS Investigation 14. i.e. 34. every handover causes a number of frames to be lost. 5. 6.15 FR/HR. The speech codec used.85. SQI-MOS for UMTS is implemented for the following codecs: • • GSM EFR. GSM FR. GSM) or block error rate (BLER. • Input to the SQI-MOS Algorithm UMTS SQI-MOS for UMTS takes the following parameters as input: The frame error rate (FER.65 1. for wideband.9 FR/HR. 10. The same basic SQI-MOS model is used for all supported speech codecs.65 kbit/s: – – for narrowband. the old SQI algorithm includes a special “handover penalty” mechanism lowering the SQI score whenever a handover has occurred. WCDMA).7 FR/HR. but the model is tuned separately for each codec to capture its unique characteristics. the current algorithm also does not consider the distribution of frame/block errors over time. In contrast. • • The bit error rate (BER). The general speech quality level and the highest attainable quality vary widely between codecs. and 12.60. Frame/Block errors also occur in connection with handover. no such quantity is reported by UEs in WCDMA mode. and these are treated like any other frame/block errors by the SQI-MOS algorithm. This is available in GSM only. and GSM HR all GSM AMR-NB and AMR-WB modes up to 12. Handovers are not modeled independently in any way by SQI-MOS. and 12.

and 12.3. Input parameters are: • • Frame error rate Speech codec used. Speech Quality Index – SQI • all WCDMA AMR-NB and AMR-WB modes up to 12. 1. compare section 34.95. 34.1.1 applies equally to CDMA (with the term “handoff” substituted for “handover”). SQI-MOS for CDMA is implemented for the following codecs: • • • • QCELP13K EVRC SMV VMR-WB (narrowband input only) 34. 4. including bit rate information The general discussion of these parameters in section 34. 5. ACR stands for Absolute Category Rating: this is the “regular” MOS test where speech samples are rated without being compared to a reference. for wideband.2. CDMA SQI-MOS for CDMA closely resembles WCDMA SQI. The score is thus a value ranging from 1 to 5.2.60.2.85.2.75. and 12. 6. NT12-7002 ver 1. 10.7. The SQI-MOS algorithm produces a new quality estimate at intervals of • • (UMTS) approximately 0. 7.0 393 . 7. 8.4.65 kbit/s: – – for narrowband.2.9.65.2. SQI-MOS Output The output from the SQI-MOS calculation is a score on the ACR1 MOS scale which is widely used in listening tests and familiar to cellular operators. 5.15.Chapter 34. 6.5 s (CDMA) 2–4 s Such a high update rate is possible thanks to the low computational complexity of the algorithm.

SQI-MOS vs. 2. as benchmarks.1.org.1. no objective speech quality measure of the caliber of PESQ was yet commercially available. Wideband SQI-MOS (UMTS) It is necessary to point out that narrowband and wideband SQI-MOS scores are not directly comparable. This means that 1.2 The exception is the wideband modes. for reasons sketched in section 34. and no exact mapping exists in this case either. At the time that work was done. also taking the fixed side into account. The same MOS scale and range are used for both (as is the custom in the field of speech quality assessment).1 User’s Manual 34. Alignment of SQI-MOS and PESQ The SQI-MOS algorithm has been designed to correlate its output as closely as possible with the PESQ measure (Perceptual Evaluation of Speech Quality).TEMS Investigation 14. Note carefully that PESQ and SQI-MOS do not have the same scope. Regarding the latter. where adjustments to the models have been made using the results of external listening tests. It follows from this that when interpreting a figure such as SQI-MOS = 4. The highest attainable quality is therefore markedly better for wideband. 34. it is necessary to consider what speech bandwidth has been encoded. see section 34. It should be stressed that SQI-MOS cannot be derived from these dBQ scores.pesq.1. This is because wideband speech coding models a wider range of the speech frequency spectrum and is thus inherently superior to narrowband coding.0. rather than actual listening tests. in absolute terms. 34.3.4. the two algorithms are distinct (even if similar in general terms). that is. the SQI-MOS models have mostly been trimmed using PESQ scores. This is completely different from the old SQI algorithm.3. Old SQI (UMTS) The old SQI (still available in the application) is expressed in dBQ.1 In fact.2. whereas SQI reflects the radio link quality only. however. PESQ measures the quality end-to-end. See  www.4. A further complicating circumstance is that there is no simple mapping between wideband and narrowband SQI-MOS. Narrowband vs. a given MOS score indicates. which was trained using listening tests alone.4. a higher quality for wideband than for narrowband. 394 .

0 395 . One relevant fact is that.Chapter 34. since CDMA SQI currently does not extend to wideband. The use of PESQ as a benchmark therefore complicated the development of SQI-MOS for wideband. 1. a mapping could then be applied to align the wideband scores to narrowband.2). • Both methods try to assess to what degree the distortions in the received signal will be audible to the human ear. variation stemming from the characteristics of individual speakers. on the other hand.3. is a no-reference method that works with the received signal alone and extracts radio parameters from it (as described in section 34. PESQ scores need to be averaged over a range of speakers in order to eliminate speaker bias.e. but they do it in completely different ways.1 This difference in output range would not in itself be problematic if wideband PESQ behaved similarly to narrowband PESQ as a function of FER/BLER. Such averaging is not required in the case of SQI-MOS. in certain circumstances. even for clean speech. i. since the speaker-contingent variation is already built into the model (it has been trained with a large number of speakers). Below is a brief discussion of this topic. This is a phenomenon independent of the circumstances described in section 34.1. NT12-7002 ver 1.4. 34. Speech Quality Index – SQI PESQ and SQI values may differ while both being accurate in their respective domains. Also bear in mind that PESQ and SQI-MOS use fundamentally different approaches to quality measurement: • PESQ is a reference-based method which compares the received degraded speech signal with the same signal in original and undistorted form. SQI-MOS. Notes on PESQ for Wideband (UMTS) (This subsection is relevant for UMTS only. wideband PESQ has been found to produce lower scores than narrowband PESQ.) The PESQ algorithm for wideband (8 kHz) speech coding – as opposed to that for narrowband (4 kHz) – is afflicted with certain recognized shortcomings.

TEMS Investigation 14.5. this variability is limited to a few tenths of a MOS point.) For the reasons explained above it was necessary to resort to other reference material besides PESQ scores in order to avoid biasing the wideband SQIMOS model. The upshot of this is that no straightforward mapping between wideband and narrowband PESQ can be constructed. This tuning resulted in an adjustment of the SQI-MOS model that is linear as a function of FER/BLER. version 7. since PESQ (as is well known) sometimes judges severely disturbed speech in a misleading manner: certain very bad (almost muted) samples receive high PESQ scores. speech quality in GSM networks was often measured by means of the RxQual parameter (which is also available in TEMS products). Since RxQual is merely a mapping of time-averaged bit error rates into a scale from 0 to 7 ( 3GPP 45. Attempts have been made within ITU to develop such a mapping.4). wideband PESQ scores for different speakers show a spread of more than one point on the MOS scale. “Quality in Clean Speech and Error Conditions”.1 Only clean speech ratings from these tests were used. The material used was the results from listening tests conducted during standardization of the AMR speech codec. it cannot of course provide more than a rough indication of speech quality. (It is probable that the task of assessing wideband speech quality requires further refinement of the mathematical models used. Samples with FER > 60% were excluded from the SQI-MOS modeling. but so far with no satisfactory results. See  3GPP TR 26. attained at very high FERs/BLERs2) was left unchanged.975. FER = 60% was selected as endpoint. while the rock-bottom SQIMOS (the worst possible score. The largest correction was applied to the cleanspeech SQI-MOS score (i. Wideband PESQ is much more sensitive to speaker bias than is narrowband PESQ (compare the introduction of section 34.4): at a fixed FER/BLER.1 User’s Manual Unfortunately. 1. For narrowband.e. 396 .2.0. things are not that simple. and consequently outputs from the two are not directly comparable. 2. GSM Comparison with Other Radio Parameters In the past. 34. section 8. at zero FER/BLER).008.0.

and multimedia application services.1. it has been refined to eliminate known weaknesses of PESQ. One example is the effects of packet loss and of packet loss concealment. However. and CDMA networks. Audio Quality Measurement (AQM): General Audio quality measurement. 35. including PESQ and POLQA. being a reference-based method that compares the degraded speech with the undistorted original to assess quality. It can be performed in GSM. The PESQ algorithm is defined by the ITU-T standard P. The POLQA algorithm is designed along similar lines as PESQ. WCDMA. • NT12-7002 ver 1.int/ rec/T-REC-P. The POLQA Algorithm POLQA (Perceptual Objective Listening Quality Analysis). Performance for higher-bandwidth audio signals (wideband. data. is the successor of PESQ and has been specially developed for HD voice.862. can be purchased as an option with TEMS Investigation. Audio Quality Measurement (AQM): General 35.0 397 .863 standard. and VoIP.itu. The severity of the degradation as perceived by human listeners is assessed using highly refined models of the human ear and the brain’s processing of auditory input. defined in the ITU P. 3G and 4G/LTE. is an algorithm which measures end-to-end speech quality by comparing one party’s undistorted input signal (serving as reference) with the degraded version of the same signal received by the other party. short for Perceptual Evaluation of Speech Quality. particularly in these areas: • Handling of new and complex types of distortions that arise from today’s convergence and coexistence of voice. superwideband).Chapter 35.  www.862/en 35. The PESQ Algorithm PESQ.2.

Measurement Setups in TEMS Investigation Audio quality measurement (AQM) in TEMS Investigation can be done in a number of contexts and hardware configurations. CS voice Mobile to fixed Mobile to mobile Mobile to mobile Call Generator. A summary of the possibilities is given in the following table: PESQ Service POLQA Call Parties Auxiliary Components AQM Computed By Ref. 35. AQM modules Mobile Receiving Unit (MRU) Audio Capturing Unit (ACU) (2 PCs used) AQM modules AQM modules PC PCs 36.1 36.int/rec/T-RECP.863/en.itu.3.1 User’s Manual • Performance for CDMA speech codecs and hence for CDMA networks in general.2 37 38 VoIP Mobile to mobile 398 . More information about POLQA is available at  www.TEMS Investigation 14.

which is included on the TEMS Investigation installation CD in the subdirectory Documents.0 399 . AQM with Call Generator/MRU 36. The product version does however still support AQM with previously purchased MRUs. measurements are made mobile-originated voice calls. connected to the fixed telephone network (section 36. MRUs are not offered for sale with TEMS Investigation 14.2).1). The downlink AQM module can optionally be mounted along with the phone in an equipment case. Mobile-to-fixed Audio Quality Measurement with Call Generator This section describes the AQM setup where a Call Generator acts as the receiver of AQM calls.1.4). and one housed in the Call Generator. or by a Mobile Receiving Unit (MRU) housed in a mobile phone (section 36. A separate MRU User’s Manual is also available. Below is an overview of the measurement configuration. These modules contain DSP hardware. Please note that POLQA is not available with these configurations. It is referred to by the M2F DL + UL option in the PESQ Measurement activity of the Service Control script (see section 20. NT12-7002 ver 1. AQM with Call Generator/MRU In this AQM configuration.Chapter 36. 1. 36. handling the downlink.7. The computation of AQM scores is done in dedicated hardware units called AQM modules: one connected to the phone and to the PC. taking care of the uplink. The call may be received: • • by a stationary component known as the Call Generator.1 Further technical information about these methods of audio quality measurement is found in the document “AQM in TEMS Products (Including PESQ)”.16.1.

yielding uplink and downlink PESQ scores.1. section 3. logfile export Call Generator with uplink AQM module The measurement procedure can be summarized as follows: • • • The speech segments to be used as references are loaded into the AQM modules and into the test phone. The Call Generator responds by playing the same reference sentences. The downlink AQM data is written to regular TEMS Investigation logfiles. Service Control script Reference audio Downlink AQM module Transmitted audio Test terminal Downlink AQM Received degraded audio (from Call Generator) Voice calls Logfile containing downlink AQM data Reference audio Uplink AQM data in XML files (copying/ download) Logfile with uplink AQM data merged in and downlink AQM data timeadjusted TEMS Investigation.TEMS Investigation 14. See Information Elements and Events.1 User’s Manual TEMS Investigation. and volume. To merge uplink AQM data into the logfiles.7. echo attenuation. the logfile export function is used. where the signals are compared with the originals. • • 400 . The AQM modules also record a number of further audio quality measurements such as echo delay. The received (degraded) signals at either end are forwarded to the respective AQM modules. See section 11. The phone calls the Call Generator and plays the reference sentences. The uplink AQM data is stored in XML files.

7. Another important difference is that only downlink AQM scores are obtained with this method.2. Obtaining AQM Data Here is an overview of how to record and present audio quality measurements in practice.1 is that the fixed Call Generator is replaced by a Mobile Receiving Unit. Mobile-to-mobile Audio Quality Measurement with MRU The main difference between this setup and that described in section 36. This is the M2M DL option in the PESQ Measurement activity of the Service Control script (see section 20. MRU. as recipient of the AQM calls. the MRU does not have an AQM module.Chapter 36. Service Control script Reference audio Downlink AQM module Transmitted audio Test terminal Downlink AQM Logfile containing downlink AQM data Received degraded audio (from MRU) Voice calls Reference audio MRU (Mobile Receiving Unit) Logfile with AQM data timeadjusted TEMS Investigation.16. Measurement configuration: TEMS Investigation. It covers the both the Call Generator configuration and the MRU configuration. NT12-7002 ver 1. logfile export 36.4).0 401 . AQM with Call Generator/MRU 36.3.

16. • 36.1. 36.1 User’s Manual 36. For mobile-to-mobile AQM.7.3. Add a PESQ Measurement activity after the Dial. set Measurement Type to “M2F DL + UL”. • • • Prerequisites You need to possess the following: License for collecting AQM data: see the Getting Started Manual. Phone supporting audio quality measurement: one of those listed as AQM-capable in the Getting Started Manual.3. put the calls (i. The phone will then make voice calls to a Call Generator (identified by its phone number). See section 20. section 10. since that would distort the AQM output.e. Conclude with a Hang Up activity. One or several downlink AQM modules (either stand-alone units or DSP cards mounted in an equipment case).2. section 3. using a different AQM module with each phone.2. For mobile-to-fixed AQM.3. • Practical Considerations You can plug a headset into the AQM module during measurement to listen live to the received audio. Recording AQM Data The description below assumes that a single phone is used to make audio quality measurements. It is possible to perform such measurements with several phones at once. The AQM algorithms require a fixed preset volume.3. which governs how long to maintain the call and collect audio quality measurements.3.3. However. • Compose a script as follows (for details of all activities. set Measurement Type to “M2M DL” to designate an MRU as receiving party in the same manner.TEMS Investigation 14. If you wish to synchronize AQM calls from multiple phones.4. One AQM module is required for each phone that you want to measure AQM with. Call Generator or MRU. you must not adjust the volume using the headset.1. Finally. see chapter 20): – – Add a Dial activity. sequences of the form Dial  PESQ Measurement  Hang Up as just described) in separate branches in a Parallel – – 402 . set a value for PESQ Duration.

0 403 . AQM with Call Generator/MRU construct. See section 11.10.2. NT12-7002 ver 1. so that they can be included in any presentation. Make sure that the phone’s number is defined in TEMS Investigation and enter the number manually if necessary: see section 8. Note that this operation is necessary also for mobile-to-mobile AQM.1. To have the above procedure automatically repeated as many times as desired. however. use the logfile export function to merge the uplink AQM data (recorded by the Call Generator) into the logfile. Wait until the reports “Dsp Started Ver. 36.5.7. When using the AQM module for the first time after connecting it. Associate the phone with the AQM module on the Navigator’s Equipment tab: see section 9. 2” and “Pre Processing Ready” appear in the Mode Reports window. section 7. To also make all calls terminate at the same time. see section 11. 36. you must wait for the AQM module to start up its DSP and finish some preprocessing. – – • Book-end all of the above activities with Start Recording and Stop Recording to have the calls recorded in a logfile.7.4. enclose everything defined so far within a While construct. • • • • 36.7.2). Merging Uplink AQM Data into Logfiles After completing your measurements. If precise time alignment for AQM data is not of interest.1. although no uplink AQM data is recorded in that case. the logfile export can be skipped. simply use the same PESQ Duration for all calls. Presentation of AQM Data Information Elements All AQM data is available as information elements. which already contains the downlink AQM scores. This is because the logfile export procedure also corrects the time alignment for downlink data (again.3.5.Chapter 36. The same information elements are used regardless of the choice of AQM setup. Run the script and record your logfiles. Connect your AQM equipment case (or alternatively your phone and stand-alone AQM module) to the PC and point to the requisite driver files as described in the Getting Started Manual.2. The red LED on the AQM module should go out.

1.2. Downlink Frequent AQM is not displayed at all prior to merging. you must keep in mind that this data will lag behind other information elements because of the processing delay in the DSP.5. When viewing (downlink) AQM data in real time. See the Technical Reference.5. or one speech sentence. PESQ Key Performance Indicator A PESQ-based KPI is computable on the basis of TEMS Investigation data.2. see section 11. The offset is 5.) 36.5 s.7. or when analyzing a logfile where the uplink AQM data has not yet been merged in. section 11.1 User’s Manual Status windows named Speech Quality are provided where all AQM information elements (as well as some other data) are presented. the 5. (For full details. When you merge the uplink AQM data into the logfile. 404 .TEMS Investigation 14.5 s offset for downlink data is removed so that all data is correctly aligned.

0 405 . which call each other in pairs. AQM with Audio Capturing Unit (ACU) 37. TEMS Investigation. AQM with Audio Capturing Unit (ACU) In this AQM configuration. NT12-7002 ver 1.Chapter 37.7. This configuration is referred to by the M2M DL + UL option in the AQM Measurement activity of the Service Control script (see section 20.1. Obtaining AQM Data Here is an overview of how to set up the Audio Capturing Unit AQM configuration and how to record audio quality measurements. are connected to an Audio Capturing Unit (ACU) which relays the audio to the PC. Up to four mobile devices. all measurement is conducted during mobile-tomobile voice calls.4).16. Service Control script Voice calls Reference audio AQM calculation Audio Audio Capturing Unit Test terminals Relayed degraded audio Logfile with downlink and uplink AQM scores Voice calls 37.

2. Custom audio cables (these are phone model specific and need to be ordered separately): – – – • 2. refer to section 20. Audio Capturing Unit (TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB). Audio adaptor cables for connecting audio cables to the ACU (delivered with ACU).1. Regarding the AQM Measurement activity. Recording AQM Data This section assumes that all equipment has been prepared and interconnected as described in the Getting Started Manual. Nokia C7 Sony Ericsson W995 phones use the SE System Connector cable from the AQM module cable kit. use a Parallel activity with one branch for each phone.3.5 mm cable for Huawei C8600 3. 37. For each phone pair. chapter 16.1 below show the structure of the ready-made scripts.1. 37.3. USB hub for phones (delivered with ACU).1.3.2. section 3.1\Scripts. The diagrams in section 37.3. section 10.1. Run the script and record your logfiles.TEMS Investigation 14.4. chapter 16. • Compose a script similar to the sample script files which are provided in [My] Documents\TEMS Product Files\TEMS Investigation 14. Phone supporting audio quality measurement: one of those listed as AQM-capable in the Getting Started Manual.2. one dialing and the other answering.7.1 User’s Manual 37.5 mm cable for Sony Ericsson Xperia arc/arc S.16.1. • • • • • Prerequisites You need to possess the following: License for collecting AQM data: see the Getting Started Manual. Preparations See the Getting Started Manual. • 406 .

or in Windows.1. in the TerraTec PC user interface. incorrect AQM scores will result. on the TerraTec box using the physical controls.0 407 .Chapter 37.3. AQM with Audio Capturing Unit (ACU) Note: Be sure never to alter volume levels anywhere during measurement – whether in the phones.1. Recommended Structure of AQM Scripts AQM script for one pair of phones. 37. NT12-7002 ver 1. If the volume is not kept constant.

408 .2. so they are not populated in this mobile-to-mobile setup. however. Presentation of AQM Data Information Elements All computed AQM data is available as information elements.1 User’s Manual AQM script for two pairs of phones. Please note. are relevant only when interacting with a PSTN. 37.1. The same family of information elements is used as for the Call Generator and MRU AQM setups.TEMS Investigation 14. chapter 5. for example. 37. that for AQM with ACU the following holds: • • Downlink PESQ/POLQA scores for one phone in a pair are also presented as uplink scores for the other phone in that pair. so that they can be included in any presentation.2. Not all AQM information elements are obtained: see the Information Elements and Events volume. The “Echo” elements.

AQM with Audio Capturing Unit (ACU) Status windows named Speech Quality are provided where all AQM information elements (as well as some other data) are presented. the Huawei C8600 exhibits behavior similar to that of the Sony Ericsson Xperia arc. CDMA For CDMA. causing a lowering of PESQ/POLQA scores. PESQ and POLQA scores obtained with various phones using the setup described in this chapter generally correlate closely with PESQ as measured with AQM modules (chapter 36). with any of the supported UMTS phones as receiver. Tests consistently show markedly lower PESQ and POLQA scores with this configuration compared to other phone model pairings. – Please note again that the above does not apply to the Xperia arc S. There is one exception. a kind of filtering that is judged unfavorably by the AQM algorithms. NT12-7002 ver 1. By contrast. the AQM score is not affected. 37.Chapter 37. for audio samples received by the Xperia arc. namely when the Sony Ericsson Xperia arc (Note: not arc S) acts as sender.3. The described characteristics of the Xperia arc must be taken into account when evaluating AQM scores obtained with the device. The reason is believed to consist in the different filtering applied to the audio output in the Xperia arc phone. UMTS Notes on AQM Scores Obtained with Individual Phone Models For UMTS.0 409 .

no auxiliary hardware components are involved. A quick overview of the measurement setup follows below: TEMS Investigation: VoIP client controlled by Service Control script PC #1 Reference audio Received degraded audio VoIP server VoIP calls TEMS Investigation: VoIP client controlled by Service Control script Reference audio PC #2 AQM calculation #1 Test terminals #2 Received degraded audio AQM calculation Logfile containing downlink AQM for test terminal #1 Logfile containing downlink AQM for test terminal #2 410 . AQM for VoIP Audio quality measurement can also be performed during VoIP testing.TEMS Investigation 14. please turn to the document “VoIP Testing with TEMS Investigation”.1 User’s Manual 38.7. For a comprehensive treatment of VoIP testing. found on the TEMS Investigation installation CD in the subdirectory Documents. and the audio quality measurement is governed by the VoIP Voice Quality activity. In this measurement setup. VoIP testing is controlled by special Service Control activities. Everything about the Service Control mechanisms is covered in section 20. The AQM computation is done on the PCs. including AQM.16. but instead two PCs are used. each of which have a mobile phone connected.

1. in both directions but only in one direction at a time. section 3. which see. Obtaining AQM Data Full instructions are given in the document “VoIP Testing with TEMS Investigation”. Audio is sent in semi-duplex fashion between the parties. the VoIP clients thus reside in the PCs and not in the mobile devices.9. Presentation of AQM Data This too is covered exhaustively in the document “VoIP Testing with TEMS Investigation”. that is. The crucial information elements are the PESQ and POLQA IEs in the Media Quality category: see Information Elements and Events. Each instance of TEMS Investigation has a built-in VoIP client. AQM for VoIP The calling device is connected to one PC and the called device to the other. 38.0 411 . 38.2.Chapter 38. NT12-7002 ver 1.

• What VTQI Is Based On The VTQI score is based on the following non-perceptual input: The quality of the encoded (compressed) signal prior to transmission. without knowledge of the original.1 User’s Manual 39. There is no overall assessment of entire calls analogous to static VSQI computed for entire streaming clips (as described in section 40.4. 39. 39. This quality is straightforwardly a function of the codecs used and the bit rate. since the radio bearer currently used in UMTS for video 412 . Video Telephony Quality Index – VTQI The information element VTQI (Video Telephony Quality Index) estimates the viewer-perceived video and audio quality achieved during video telephony calls. The unit for VTQI is called “MOS-VTQI”. The output from the VTQI algorithm is expressed as a value between 1 and 5. The kind of subjective test which VTQI strives to imitate is one where viewers are instructed to assess both video and audio and combine their perception of each into an overall “multimedia quality” score. conforming to the MOS (Mean Opinion Score) scale which is frequently used in subjective quality tests. However.2.1). VTQI estimates the quality of the video call as perceived by the viewer at a moment in time. See also the document “Video Telephony Quality Measurement with VTQI” which is included on the installation CD in the subdirectory Documents. How this algorithm works is the subject of the present chapter. General Properties of VTQI Like SQI (chapter 34).TEMS Investigation 14. It is updated continuously during the call. VTQI is a no-reference method which judges the quality of the received signal on its own merits.1.

) The audio codec is assumed always to be AMR-NB operating at 12. What VTQI Does Not Consider VTQI does not directly consider the signal presented to the human viewer. Update Rate VTQI is reported as the information element VTQI Realtime Score.0 413 . on the other hand. – • BLER (block error rate). Bit error rate (BER). NT12-7002 ver 1. however. no analysis of perceptual input is performed to detect specific visible artifacts.263 and MPEG-4 video codecs. Each VTQI score is a time average taken over the last 8 seconds. Focusing on BLER means that VTQI will faithfully reflect the impact of air interface conditions on QoE. the video codec is assumed to be H. This element is updated regularly – at intervals of length 1–2 s depending on the phone model – throughout the video call. bit rate variation is in fact not an issue. 39. the first score is thus obtained 8 s into the video call.263. This windowing procedure prevents short block error bursts from impacting the VTQI score in a disproportionate manner. even slight degradations impacting video and audio perception will still be noticed by the algorithm and affect the VTQI score. is not reported by current WCDMA user terminals and so is not available for use in the VTQI model. 39. The transferred video is not analyzed frame by frame in any way. the “clean” quality in terms of VTQI has been computed in advance. This is the most important single cause of poor quality in video telephony.2 kbit/s. what codec is used in the video call is deduced from the signaling between server and client. but a VTQI model for MPEG-4 also exists. Thanks to the monitoring of BLER.3. This leaves the codecs: – For the H. (In the current implementation of VTQI in TEMS Investigation.Chapter 39.4. Video Telephony Quality Index – VTQI telephony is always a 64 kbit/s bearer. In practice. that is.

The “clean” quality has been computed in advance for the codecs listed in section 40. This chapter takes a look the VSQI algorithm.2. conforming to the MOS (Mean Opinion Score) scale which is frequently used in subjective quality tests. The unit for VSQI is called “MOSVSQI”. The output from the VSQI algorithm is expressed as a value between 1 and 5. 40. General Properties of VSQI Like SQI (chapter 34).1 User’s Manual 40.4. Compare chapter 41 on MTQI. The information actually used by the VSQI algorithm is the video codec type and the total (video + audio) bit rate. 40. This quality is straightforwardly a function of the video and audio codecs used. and their bit rates. See also the document “Video Streaming Quality Measurement with VSQI” which is included on the installation CD in the subdirectory Documents. 414 .1.1. The quality of the encoded (compressed) signal prior to transmission. Video Streaming Quality Index – VSQI The information element VSQI (Video Streaming Quality Index) estimates the viewer-perceived video and audio quality achieved during video streaming sessions.TEMS Investigation 14. without knowledge of the original. The kind of subjective test which VSQI strives to imitate is one where viewers are instructed to assess both video and audio and combine their perception of each into an overall “multimedia quality” score. What VSQI Is Based On The VSQI score is based on the following non-perceptual input: 1. VSQI is a no-reference method which judges the quality of the received signal on its own merits.

however. and so on will still be noticed by the algorithm and affect the VSQI score. Dynamic VSQI.Chapter 40.4.4. What VSQI Does Not Consider VSQI does not directly consider the signal presented to the human viewer.263.2 above).e. we may describe the calculation of static VSQI with the following formula: NT12-7002 ver 1. is contained in the information element Streaming VSQI. Static and Dynamic VSQI Two versions of the VSQI algorithm have been devised: one static and one dynamic version. in the video streaming client). that is. It does not appear as an information element. The amount of initial delay and the subsequent interruptions during playback of the video sequence: that is. Static VSQI The static version of VSQI takes an entire streamed video clip as input and assigns a single quality score to it. or MPEG4) Total bit rate (video + audio) Duration of initial buffering Number of rebuffering periods Duration of rebuffering periods Amount of packet loss With some degree of simplification. 3.264. on the other hand. even slight problems with blockiness.0 415 . 2 in section 40. Video Streaming Quality Index – VSQI 2.1. H. Static VSQI is presented in the event Streaming Quality VSQI. 40. the time required for initial buffering and the incidence of rebuffering. 40.3. Thanks to the monitoring of packet loss (item no. Input parameters to the static version of VSQI are as follows: • • • • • • Video codec used (H. 40. The amount of packet loss at the application level (i. jitter. no analysis of perceptual input is performed to detect specific visible artifacts. The transferred video is not analyzed frame by frame in any way.

For clips considerably longer than 30 s. Each VSQI output value is dependent on the recent history of the streaming session (i. recent packet loss levels and possible recent buffering events). since the current VSQI algorithm does not take into account such memory effects.2. The static VSQI algorithm has been fine-tuned for clips of around 30 s and should therefore in practical use be applied to clips of similar duration. The size of the packet loss penalty is determined as follows. The latter is then translated into a deduction from the VSQI score. which is in turn dependent on the choice of codecs and bit rate. (The dynamic version of VSQI is naturally not affected by this limitation. and moreover if the clip is short enough it will have been buffered in its entirety before the replay starts. simply because the late ones are remembered more vividly. the time spent rebuffering. This score is determined by the quality of the encoding. The video sequences must not be too short because of how the buffering works: each instance of rebuffering takes several seconds to complete.4. Dynamic (Realtime) VSQI The dynamic or realtime version of VSQI estimates the quality of a streaming video clip as perceived by viewers at a moment in time.TEMS Investigation 14. disturbances towards the end will be more harshly penalized by viewers than those occurring early on. A running packet loss average over the last 4 s is computed approximately every second. and the number of rebuffering events. on the other hand. Therefore.1 User’s Manual Here. The design of dynamic VSQI is based on the following: • Previous research suggesting approximate times taken for the perceived quality to drop to MOS-VSQI 1 (during buffering) and to rise to the highest attainable VSQI (during normal replay) Modeling of the impact of packet loss on perceived quality • 416 . and the values thus obtained are weighted and summed to yield an appropriate overall measure of the packet loss. it would probably perform slightly worse for long clips.) 40. The size of the buffering penalty depends on the time taken for initial buffering.e. It is updated regularly – at intervals of the order of 1 s – while the video clip is playing. VSQIclean is the “clean value” obtained for the clip prior to transmission. so that no rebuffering will ever occur.

but the longer the buffering drags on. VSQI captures the latter by making the slope of the curve steeper for each new rebuffering event. VSQI recovers reasonably quickly.e. i. If rebuffering occurs. The best achievable quality. 4. Rebuffering events are much less tolerated by viewers than initial buffering. is dependent on the codec/bit rate combination but is also affected by the amount of packet loss. but not infrequently from a rock bottom level. especially if repeated.0 417 . 3. NT12-7002 ver 1. 2. In this example the packet loss is assumed to be constant so that the influence of buffering can be clearly discerned. the “ceiling” in the graph. the perceived quality picks up again and soon approaches the highest achievable level. Video Streaming Quality Index – VSQI • Tailoring of mathematical functions for expressing viewer annoyance/ satisfaction as a function of time (in each of the states that are possible during replay) Codec and bit rate parameters as in the static version • The graph below shows in rough outline the different ways in which dynamic VSQI can evolve during the replay of a streaming video clip. the more the user loses patience.Chapter 40. Once the replay gets going. After the replay has recommenced. The user tolerates (and might even expect) a certain amount of initial delay. VSQI deteriorates rapidly. 1.

264. MPEG4 Supported video formats: QCIF. The MTQI algorithm can be concisely characterized as follows. Unlike VSQI. Supported video codecs: H. REAL. QVGA • • 418 . MTQI does not include an assessment of audio quality. no skipping means that every frame is replayed.263. • Algorithm components: – – – • Modeling of clean quality Modeling of packet loss Modeling of corruption duration (total duration of corrupted frames) Buffering with and buffering without skipping are distinguished. Buffering with skipping means that frames are skipped in connection with buffering. Mobile TV Quality Index – MTQI MTQI (Mobile TV Quality Index) is a refinement of the video part of the VSQI quality measure (see chapter 40). H.1 User’s Manual 41.TEMS Investigation 14.

To help resolve such ambiguities.1. Since such a scheme fails to allow for power control and DTX on the TCHs. towards the high end of the C/I range. In fact. C/I Measurement (GSM) 42. It should however be noted that the C/I measure is just as useful in the context of packet-switched data services. In this way.2. C/I can be measured in dedicated mode. particularly if EDGE is used. SQI (see chapter 34). one must take into account the possible use of power control and/or discontinuous transmission (DTX). By NT12-7002 ver 1. if frequency hopping is used in the network. The C/I measurement function built into TEMS Investigation enables the identification of frequencies that are exposed to particularly high levels of interference. In the past. while packet-switched transmissions very clearly do benefit from every extra dB. TEMS Investigation offers the possibility of measuring average C/I for each of the frequencies used in a call. rough C/I measurements have sometimes been carried out by comparing the BCCH signal power of the serving cell with that of neighboring cells using the same traffic channels (but different BCCHs). areas with inadequate quality can be identified. speech quality is not further improved. it may produce misleading results. To obtain a correct C/I estimate.0 419 .Chapter 42. 42. C/I Measurement (GSM) This chapter explains in some detail how GSM C/I measurements are made and why they are useful. Why Measure C/I? The carrier-over-interference ratio is the ratio between the signal strength of the current serving cell and the signal strength of undesired (interfering) signal components. Requirements on a Robust C/I Measure Downlink quality in a radio network can be monitored using the TEMS Speech Quality Index. something which comes in useful in the verification and optimization of frequency plans. it is difficult to pin down the frequencies that are affected by the degradation. However. 42. The discussion provided here is centered on the voice service.

35 dB. 420 . TEMS Investigation does consider these network functions and is thus able to indicate the actual C/I experienced by the phone. 480 ms) interval. which is equal to the ordinary measurement interval. The C/I information elements preserve a wider value range –5 .3. which reflects the performance of older technology. C/I values below this limit would normally result in a dropped call. EFR speech coding and cyclic 1. the number of bursts transmitted from the base station to the phone may be lower than the maximum. depending on the speech activity level on the transmitting side. the measurement error is typically smaller than 1 dB. in addition.5. data from a test drive is depicted in the figure below. and four frequencies are used for transmission. Beyond the upper limit. The test drive lasts 40 seconds. 42. Accuracy The number of hopping frequencies determines the number of bursts used for the C/I measurement on each frequency. Hence. the limitation of the measurement range is not a restriction.TEMS Investigation 14.. Details on C/I Measurements In dedicated mode. if four frequencies are used.. With more frequencies. If true C/I is within the range 0 to 15 dB. 25 bursts (on average) per frequency are received in each half-second (to be precise.1 If downlink DTX is used. if the number of hopping frequencies is low.1 User’s Manual contrast. The measurement range extends from 0 dB to 35 dB. the average C/I for each frequency is presented. 42. If frequency hopping is employed.4. For example. and there are no DTX interruptions. 42. A C/I below 0 dB can be regarded as highly unlikely. average C/I is presented approximately twice a second. An Example To illustrate the use of C/I. TEMS Investigation makes measurements only on the bursts actually sent from the base station and disregards bursts not transmitted. there are fewer bursts for each frequency. the performance is not further improved (at least not with today’s modulation schemes). This implies that the accuracy of the measurements is better for small sets of hopping frequencies.

0 RxLev [dB] SQI [dBQ] 421 . Now. This explains the poor speech quality. On the other hand. RxLev increases during the SQI dip. and interestingly. In fact. the quality problem is to do with interference rather than coverage. The upper part of the graph shows SQI and RxLev. indicating poor speech quality. one sees that two of the four frequencies (the thick lines) have a C/I worse than 10 dB during the SQI dip. probably because the power of the interferer increases. while the lower part shows C/I for each of the four frequencies: 20 SQI 60 50 0 0 25 C/I [dB] 20 15 10 5 0 0 RxLev 40 10 15 20 25 time [s] 30 35 40 5 5 10 15 20 25 time [s] 30 35 40 As appears from the upper graph. that is. NT12-7002 ver 1. SQI dips sharply towards the end of the test drive (after 35 s). C/I Measurement (GSM) frequency hopping with four frequencies are employed throughout. identifying precisely which channels are disturbed. Such information can then be utilized in the process of optimizing the frequency plan for the area. RxLev stays about 50 dB above –110 dBm the whole time.Chapter 42. looking at the C/I graph. This means that the dip in quality is not due to low signal power level.

the following terminology will be used: • Test case: One row in the GSM Channel Verification window.e. Since there is no way for TEMS Investigation to control the timeslot allocation. • The GSM Channel Verification Window To perform GSM channel verification. GSM Channel Verification The GSM Channel Verification tool allows you to check the availability of a set of GSM traffic channels. 422 .12) to be able to perform GSM channel verification. each row corresponds to a particular combination of BCCH and TCH. you can use several phones. 43.1. i. TEMS Investigation lets one or several GSM-capable Sony Ericsson phones1 make calls repeatedly on the chosen channels until all timeslots of interest have been tested. open the GSM Channel Verification window from the Control folder on the Navigator’s Menu tab. Throughout the present chapter. To reduce the testing time.TEMS Investigation 14. In this window. 1. typically those used in one cell or a set of cells.1. Sony Ericsson phones with both GSM and WCDMA capability must be locked on GSM (see section 9. one BCCH/TCH combination. traffic channel verification may take a non-trivial amount of time to complete.1 User’s Manual 43.

Note that test case groups are not explicitly separated in the user interface. TCH = 20}. Test: All rows in the window.Chapter 43. Band Timeslot The frequency band where the channels are located. click Add. GSM Channel Verification • Group. NT12-7002 ver 1. Test case group: All test cases with the same BCCH. The ARFCN of the TCH to be tested. Check the timeslots you wish to test. Note that a special test case must be prepared to test TCH timeslots on C0. TCH = 10} and one with {BCCH = 10.11). corresponding to one cell. or in other words the complete contents of the *.tch file (see section 43.2. Example: If C0 has ARFCN 10.0 423 . then you must prepare two test cases: one with {BCCH = 10. with BCCH in timeslot 0 and TCHs in timeslots 2–7. The following dialog appears: MS BCCH ARFCN TCH ARFCN The phone that should execute this test case. Adding a Test Case To add a test case. The ARFCN of the BCCH to be tested. and C1 has ARFCN 20. • 43.

• 424 . while timeslots not concerned by the test are marked by underscores (“_”).11). you decide yourself whether to accept or reject the result of the test. select it and click the Delete button. the call must be set up correctly and maintained for a user-specified period of time. • Automatic verification: For each timeslot.4. 43. and in addition a set of user-specified quality requirements must be satisfied. 43. That is. timeslots to be tested are indicated by full stops (“.3. TEMS Investigation decides whether the timeslot can be accepted or not. To remove a test case. by entering the settings for one test case at a time and clicking Apply after each. Manual verification: For each timeslot. Automatic vs. select it in the GSM Channel Verification window and click the Edit button. In order for a timeslot to pass. you must reset the test case (section 43.TEMS Investigation 14.10) or save the test case in a special file format (section 43.”). Note that to edit a test case which has been partially executed. but you do have the option to create a report on these results (section 43. by clicking either of two buttons. The result in the GSM Channel Verification window will look like this: Here. you cannot keep any of the old test results in the window. Editing and Removing Test Cases To edit a test case. Manual Verification There are two fundamentally different ways of performing channel verification.1 User’s Manual You can add multiple test cases without exiting the dialog.8).

Automatic verification can be done more quickly. You might be content with assessing the downlink quality by calling a service such as the speaking clock. Check this to have the Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO) and the Hopping Sequence Number (HSN) indicated in the test report (section 43. GSM Channel Verification How to take this decision is up to the user.Chapter 43. +. #. NT12-7002 ver 1. In the GSM Channel Verification window. click the Properties button. You choose how to perform the test in the Properties dialog.0 425 . Manual verification is more work-intensive and probably more timeconsuming. but is a less reliable indicator of what a user’s experience of the radio conditions would be like. Verification mode Test phone number Add MAIO and HSN. but also yields an improvement in reliability proportional to the work invested.10) for any test case that fails in automatic verification mode. Valid characters in the phone number are {*. Enter the phone number to call when testing. 0–9}... or you might want to “call a friend” in each instance to have the uplink quality checked as well. Choose Manual or Automatic (see explanation above).

Note: In manual verification mode. Check the conditions you want to use. only one phone can be used. Delay time before evaluation Approve timeslot if these conditions are met: The time to wait before evaluating the quality parameters. The conditions will be evaluated at one point in time.5.e. See section 8. 426 . namely as soon as the delay period has expired.4. 43.TEMS Investigation 14. they are ANDed together.1 User’s Manual • Choose the QoS parameters tab to stipulate conditions for accepting a timeslot in automatic verification mode. and specify thresholds. Activating Phones Before running the test you must naturally activate the phones assigned to do the testing. The checked conditions must all be satisfied in order for the timeslot to be accepted. i.

6. it is marked with a question mark in a gray box. in the order they have been entered. the application will now wait for you to either accept or reject this timeslot. click Accept.1. NT12-7002 ver 1. Chosen manual or automatic verification mode. To accept a timeslot. having locked the phone on the corresponding BCCH. and indicated a phone number to call: see section 43.4. they will be executed one at a time. In the frequency hopping case. If you have listed several test case groups (see section 43.6. • • • Running the Test Getting Started To be able to execute a test you must have done the following: Prepared your test cases according to sections 43. The test cases currently executed are tagged with a blue arrow in the leftmost column. Then. 43.Chapter 43.1). 43. Manual Verification If you have chosen manual verification.2. so that multiple gray boxes appear. although it may of course be practical to do so. If all timeslots in the test case are now accepted. An accepted timeslot will be marked with a green rectangle (with an “h” for hopping channels). as are all other phone control functions in TEMS Investigation. TEMS Investigation will now start attempting calls on the TCHs specified. Note that there is no requirement to keep test case groups apart in the GSM Channel Verification window. When the testing of a timeslot begins. handover is disabled.1–43. GSM Channel Verification 43. the status of the test case will change to Passed.6.0 427 . While the test is running. to start running the test currently displayed in the GSM Channel Verification window: Click Start. Activated the phone or phones to be used in the test. this timeslot is tested for all channels in the hopping sequence at once.3.

the application will itself accept the timeslot (if possible). within certain limits. and a new call is made within a few seconds. though not until all timeslots have been either accepted or rejected.1 User’s Manual To reject a timeslot. Frequency hopping is used in this cell (as shown by the “h” symbols). the application proceeds to make a new call. 43.6. Manual verification has been chosen.4. 43. When a call is made in a previously accepted or rejected timeslot. see section 43.13. When a timeslot is allocated which has already been accepted or rejected. marking it green . The test case will ultimately be put in status Failed. When you have made a decision. but keeps attempting calls indefinitely. A rejected timeslot will be marked with a red rectangle (with an “h” for hopping channels). so any timeslot tested will be verified for all three TCHs at once. Automatic Verification If you have chosen automatic verification. the user has accepted the performance 428 . the Accept and Reject buttons are disabled. At this point.TEMS Investigation 14. Example Here is an example of an ongoing verification session: The cell described by the first three rows (tagged with blue arrows) is under test. otherwise it will try to make a new call the next time this timeslot is allocated. the call is aborted (not affecting the earlier result). Automatic verification never rejects a timeslot. and a new call is begun immediately. click Reject.6.3.

which is indicated by question marks. Summary of Test Case Status Values A test case has one of the following status values: Status Value Not tested Testing Stopped Passed Timeslot(s) rejected Meaning No work done yet on this test case. Stopping the Test In order to stop the test currently running: In the GSM Channel Verification window. The status value of the test case reverts to Not tested.8. This is also indicated in the leftmost column by a blue arrow . GSM Channel Verification of timeslots 3 and 6 (green markers). All test cases that are not finished will be put in status Testing again.9. it must be stopped first. the test case will be processed from scratch again. when execution is resumed. Timeslot 4 is currently being tested. or: The test case has been reset. The test will continue from the point where it was halted. Resetting a Test Case You can erase the results for a test case by resetting it. just click Start again. At least one timeslot in the test case has been rejected.0 429 . To resume the test. 43. Execution of this test case is ongoing. All test cases that are in status Testing will change to Stopped. while rejecting timeslot 7 (red markers). click Stop.7. NT12-7002 ver 1. If the test is executing. Execution of this test case has been begun but the test is currently stopped. 43.Chapter 43. All timeslots in the test case have been accepted. 43.

click the Report button. Creating Test Reports At any stage of execution of a test. and select an output location for the HTML file. See section 43. Meaning 430 .9. see section 43.1 User’s Manual Status Value Call lost BCCH lost Invalid TCH Timeout MS not connected Call setup failure Meaning These status values signify errors. 43.TEMS Investigation 14.13. To generate a test report. Timeslot rejected. Timeslots are marked with one of the following: Timeslot Data OK FAIL TESTING – Timeslot accepted.10. an HTML report can be generated summarizing the results obtained so far. Status values are as in the GSM Channel Verification window.) The report indicates • • • • the verification mode: manual or automatic the test phone number the QoS parameter settings the test result for each timeslot (where available) as well as the status of each test case at the time of creating the report. Test of timeslot not yet completed. In case of call setup failure. (If the test is executing. the used MAIO and HSN is indicated for that test case. it must be stopped first. The error condition is also indicated in the leftmost column by the symbol . Timeslot not included in test.

or you may do both.11. lock on BCCH has broken down). GSM Channel Verification 43. Notes on Performance It is possible to speed up the verification process by letting several phones share the work. If several phones are set to execute identical test cases. Error Conditions In certain situations the application judges it impossible to complete the verification and therefore aborts the test.0 431 . The test will be saved in a file with extension . You may assign different test cases to different phones. click Save. However. This will.12.tch file. Cause NT12-7002 ver 1. or assign identical test cases to several phones. To open a previously saved *. click Open and select your file. (The test must be stopped first. To save the complete current contents of the GSM Channel Verification window. One idle mode report received from wrong cell while in dedicated mode (i.13. Saving and Opening Tests Channel verification tests can be saved to file at any stage of execution. The test cases affected by the error executed are tagged with the symbol in the leftmost column. 43. considerably reduce the time taken to perform the test.e. The status value of the test case indicates what has gone wrong: Status Value Call lost Two possible causes: • • Two idle mode reports received while in dedicated mode (i. 43.Chapter 43. as a rule.tch.) The file will include full information on the results obtained so far and on the status of each test case at the time of saving. and no phone will test it further.e. it is marked green for all other identical test cases. as soon as a timeslot is accepted by one phone. ongoing call has been lost). to begin with they will all work independently.

Phone not activated at start of measurement. Three idle mode reports from wrong cell or two no service reports received while trying to lock on BCCH (i. and no timeslots marked green or red (typically occurs when the chosen TCH is in fact not used where assumed).TEMS Investigation 14. lock on BCCH has failed).e.1 User’s Manual Status Value BCCH lost Two possible causes: • Cause No channel report received from correct BCCH for 20 seconds after previous successful locking on this BCCH (i. Timeout MS not connected 432 . • Invalid TCH Test case attempted 10 times in a row without the right TCH being allocated. Ten consecutive calls made where the call setup procedure could not be concluded successfully.e. lock on BCCH has broken down).

Drive Testing Shortcuts Function Shortcut F2 Ctrl + F2 F5 F6 Activate all Deactivate all Insert filemark Start recording NT12-7002 ver 1.1. Keyboard Shortcuts A. General Shortcuts Function Shortcut F1 Alt + F4 F11 F12 Ctrl + Tab Ctrl + M Ctrl + N Ctrl + O Ctrl + P Ctrl + R Ctrl + S Help Exit application Previous worksheet Next worksheet Focus on next window in worksheet Open TEMS Settings Manager New workspace Open workspace Print workspace Generate logfile report Save workspace A. Keyboard Shortcuts Appendix A.Appendix A.0 433 .2.

TEMS Investigation 14.3. Line Chart. Logfile Load Shortcuts Function Shortcut Shift + F10 Ctrl + F10 Open logfile Stop logfile load A.4. Shortcuts for Active Window Function Shortcut Ctrl + P Print window Status Window.1 User’s Manual Function Stop recording Shortcut Ctrl + F6 A. Bar Chart Function Show properties Show setup wizard (status window only) Message Window Function Show only messages of this type Hide messages of this type Undo (show only/hide) Find next message of this type Shortcut Shift + P Shift + W Shortcut Ctrl + Y Ctrl + H Ctrl + Z Right arrow 434 .

0 435 . Service Control Designer Window Function Select all Copy New script Open script Save script Shortcut Ctrl + A Ctrl + C Ctrl + N Ctrl + O Ctrl + S NT12-7002 ver 1. Some route sample must already be selected.Appendix A. Keyboard Shortcuts Function Find previous message of this type Search for message Search again Map Window Function Open Layer Control dialog Open Theme Settings dialog Activate zoom in Activate zoom out Go to first route marker 1 Shortcut Left arrow Ctrl + F F3 Shortcut Alt + L Alt + T Shift + Z Alt + Shift + Z Home Left arrow Right arrow End Step to previous route marker Step to next route marker Go to last route marker1 1.

1 User’s Manual Function Paste Cut Shortcut Ctrl + V Ctrl + X 436 .TEMS Investigation 14.

map .bch .0 437 .eth .config .trp File Type Setup file for ArcView format logfile export Bar chart export file Cell file Service Control configuration set Setup file for Ethereal format logfile export User-defined event Logfile exported in text format Line chart export file TEMS Investigation logfile (old format) Map window export file Setup file for MapInfo format logfile export Message window export file Setup file for Planet format logfile export Setup file for logfile report Status window export file Audio indication for event TEMS Investigation workspace Setup file for text format logfile export TEMS Investigation logfile (current format) NT12-7002 ver 1.mw .pex . File Types in TEMS Investigation Appendix B.tex .stm .evt .Appendix B.lch .cel .fmt .tdc .log .svt .rpt .aex .mex . File Types in TEMS Investigation These TEMS-specific file types are used by TEMS Investigation: Extension .

1 User’s Manual Extension .tsc Service Control script File Type 438 .TEMS Investigation 14.

NT12-7002 ver 1. Comparison with Pre12. in presentation windows.0 versions of TEMS Investigation. The “equipment channel” concept is not used in the Navigator or in the Service Control windows (where only the designation “EQ” appears). All of its functions were taken over by the newly introduced Equipment tab in the Navigator.1. Comparison with Pre-12. For devices there is no longer any need to deal directly with Windows COM port numbers or to configure dial-up connections in Windows dialogs (Dial-up Networking). Their functions were moved into the Navigator (Equipment tab.2 for a comparison of the old and new tools. The Equipment Configuration window and the Connections toolbar were removed.0 User Interface The user interface in TEMS Investigation 12.1 • • • 1. C. A few pointers regarding these changes may be helpful to users with experience of pre-12. The Command Sequence window was replaced by the windows Service Control Designer and Service Control Monitor.2. However.Appendix C. See section C. With regard to COM ports. see the Getting Started Manual. The instruction sequences used to control devices are now referred to as scripts.0 439 . • • Equipment Handling The Equipment Control toolbar was removed. section 7. which serve similar purposes.0 underwent major changes compared to previous product versions.0 User Interface Appendix C. Status information is also provided by the Status Control Monitor window.1. top pane). there is one exception. the equipment channels “MS” and “DC” still make an appearance.

then manually activated and deactivated. Manual voice dials. command sequences were built up of commands.1 User’s Manual • The procedure of preparing a device for use was simplified. bottom pane). • C. whereas in CSeq. User Interface • SCtrl uses a graphical user interface where scripts are assembled in the form of flowcharts. This allows straightforward and unrestricted application of branching and other control structures. Terminology • In SCtrl. and scanning commands are no longer issued from the Equipment Control toolbar but rather from the Navigator (Equipment tab. Wait. All supported devices are automatically detected1.2. There is therefore no element in SCtrl scripts equivalent to the CSeq practice of inserting a Synchronize command at each juncture where several devices need to finish their respective tasks before proceeding. The same component is also used to initiate data service sessions without running a script (a function which was previously unavailable). Inter-device synchronization is implicit in a SCtrl workflow wherever workflow branches converge. • Logical Structure • Activities in SCtrl scripts are always assigned simply to the device as a whole (i. the sole exception is the devices covered in the Getting Started Manual. An activated device is ready to be used. control commands. There are no longer any “enable” or “disable” operations for devices. you compose scripts consisting of activities. to the “EQ”). the Command Sequence (“CSeq”) tool. There is no distinguishing of “MS” and “DC” channels as in CSeq.e.0 predecessor. Command Sequences This section contrasts the Service Control (“SCtrl”) feature with its pre-12. 1.TEMS Investigation 14. 440 .2. section 7.1. Again. and Synchronize operations. Service Control vs. which in CSeq were limited to the Loop.

however. This property always applies to the activity as a whole. not to individual steps performed as part of the activity. • • • • • C. HTTP. section 3. all setups for data service testing are done from within TEMS Investigation. they are never incorporated into activities for service testing as could optionally be done in CSeq.8. Comparison with Pre-12. Old command sequences composed with CSeq cannot be run by SCtrl. The timeout parameters provided with each CSeq command have their counterpart in the SCtrl general activity property Abort with the termination condition set to On Timeout. See section 20. and along with it the old Data category information elements prefixed with “Session”. as detailed in Information Elements and Events. as was the case in CSeq. An exception is MMS. See section 20.Appendix C. “Data” Category Information Elements The generic “session” concept in pre-12.0 441 .). the details of that operation are specified as part of the MMS activity.3. In SCtrl you indicate the type of data connection (NDIS or RAS) using a parameter in the Network Connect activity. where the device must connect to an MMS Center.0 User Interface • With SCtrl.2. TEMS Automatic) is always collected with SCtrl scripts provided that they are suitably composed. adequate data on which to base KPI computation in other TEMS products (TEMS Discovery.9. Instead. There is no need (as there was with CSeq) to go outside TEMS Investigation to configure phonebook entries and the like in Windows. network connect and disconnect (corresponding to dialup and hangup in CSeq) are always performed as separate activities.17. that is. In SCtrl. The easiest way to accomplish the latter is to base your scripts on the predefined snippets supplied for each service type. separate information elements are now provided for each data service type (FTP.2. SCtrl does not have distinct activities for KPI data collection as did CSeq.0 TEMS Investigation versions has been abolished. etc. This is because the KPI concept is no longer explicit in TEMS Investigation (see chapter 33). SCtrl does not have distinct activities for sessions run over an NDIS connection. NT12-7002 ver 1.

TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual 442 .

e. 403 obtaining AQM data in TEMS Investigation 401 practical considerations regarding collection of AQM data 402 prerequisites for collecting AQM data 402 NT12-7002 ver 1. 58 ACU 405 analysis mode 29 Andrew scanners CDMA scanning with 186 LTE scanning with 167 plugging in 47 Anritsu scanners 144 importing files logged by Anritsu ML8720 (i.0 443 .Index Index A access class control. in Anritsu format) 95 plugging in ML8720 model 47 plugging in ML8780A model 47 WCDMA pilot scanning with 151 Answer activity in scripts for video call 264 for voice call 266 AQM 397 for VoIP obtaining AQM data in TEMS Investigation 268. 411 presentation of AQM data 411 measurement setups in TEMS Investigation 398 with Audio Capturing Unit (ACU) 405 notes on AQM scores obtained with individual phone models 409 obtaining AQM data in TEMS Investigation 405 prerequisites for collecting AQM data 406 presentation of AQM data 408 recording AQM data 406 with Call Generator/MRU 399 manually entering phone number 50 merging uplink AQM data into logfiles 110. manual 66 Activate activity in scripts 236 activating external equipment in TEMS Investigation 46.

TEMS Investigation 14. 298 audio quality measurements (AQM) 397 autodetect function for equipment not covered by license 52 restarting 61 B Band Lock activity in scripts 236 band lock. applying manually 67 limitations for Sony Ericsson phones 67 bar charts 337 adding charts 340 Additional Information pane 340 Chart pane 339 deleting a chart 340 editing general properties of individual chart panes 341 examples of presentations 353 exporting 355 interval on x-axis 351 labeling of x-axis 351 Legend pane 339 Multiple IE Components presentation mode 344 444 . issuing manually 67 Audio Capturing Unit 405 audio indications for events 297 activating 299 adding 297 deactivating 299 deleting 300 editing 299 muting 299 saving and loading 299 Audio Indications window 297.1 User’s Manual presentation of AQM data 403 recording AQM data 402 setup with Call Generator 399 setup with MRU 401 AQM Measurement activity in scripts 267 AQM modules associating with phones in TEMS Investigation 73 plugging in 48 ArcView 98. 105 arguments of information elements 6 AT activity in scripts 236 AT commands.

295 channel verification (GSM) 422 color attribute (of information element) 303 editing 37 Configuration menu 34 contents of User’s Manual 3 Control menu 34 NT12-7002 ver 1.Index organization of window 338 parallel coordinates 347 Parallel Coordinates/Stacked Bar Chart presentation mode 347 presentation mode 342 presenting data from a different device 352 selecting additional information 352 selecting colors 342 selecting data to display 342 setting up contents 341 setting up general properties 340 Single IE presentation mode 343 stacked bar chart 347 X-axis pane 339 Y-axis pane 339 basics of TEMS Investigation 26 BCH scanning. presentation of (WCDMA) 158 BLER target control (WCDMA).0 445 . manual 67 C C/I measurements (GSM) 419 Call Generator 399 CAS Access Class (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 280 CAS Lock on PLMN (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 280 CAS Speech Codec (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 280 CDMA scanning 186 Cell Barred (manual control function) 68 cell data loading from Mentum CellPlanner 42 using in presentations 42 cell files creating in CEL format 42 creating in XML format 41 in CSV format 41 loading 42 Cell Lock (manual control function) 68 cell reselection behavior (Sony Ericsson phones) 282 cell whitelists 228. 291.

TEMS Investigation 14. comparison with pre-12.0 versions 439 equipment properties 277 Ericsson Fixed Wireless Terminals plugging in 47 Ethereal 98. 301 audio indications for 297 446 . 106 Event Counter windows 315 changing contents and properties of 316 copying contents from 315 managing tabs in 315 resetting 316 Event Definition window 290 events 5.1 User’s Manual control structures in scripts 214 CPICH Best UARFCN Data window (WCDMA) 153 CPICH Data window (WCDMA) 153 CPICH Scan bar charts (WCDMA) 153 CPICH Scan line charts (WCDMA) 154 D data service testing 5 conducting manually 78 presentation of 78. 236 video streaming 324 Deactivate activity in scripts 237 deactivating external equipment 59 definitions of TEMS Investigation concepts 5 device properties 277 Dial activity in scripts for voice call 266 drive testing mode 29 DRT scanners 197 detection of 51 LTE scanning with 167 plugging in 47 E editing settings in 230 E-mail Receive activity in scripts 259 E-mail Send activity in scripts 258 enhanced power scanning (LTE) 180 equipment cases 4 plugging in 48 equipment handling. 290.

Index deleting user-defined 293 editing user-defined 293 example of user-defined event 294 predefined and user-defined 290 presentation of 290 user-defined. 158. contents of 4 GPS fix source 327 GPS units in scanners 138 plugging in 48 properties of 289 selecting preferred GPS 60 NT12-7002 ver 1. 56 F FAQ (on TEMS website) 4 File menu 34 File Transfer tool 95 file types in TEMS Investigation 437 Filemark activity in scripts 237 filemarks inserting in logfiles 85 Finger Info window (CDMA) special features of 314 fix source for GPS 327 FTP Download activity in scripts 249 FTP Upload activity in scripts 250 fundamentals of TEMS Investigation 2 G General window 42.0 447 . 184. 192. setting up 290 external equipment 4 activating in TEMS Investigation 46. 387 GeoSet 357 constructing from map files 357 GeoSet Manager 385 layer control 386 map projections 386 Getting Started Manual. 177. 58 connectable devices 3 deactivating in TEMS Investigation 59 overview of user interface components dealing with 44 plugging in 46 user-assisted detection of 53.

1 User’s Manual GPS window 327 properties of 327 GSM Barred Cells (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 282 GSM Cell Selection (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 282 GSM channel verification 422 adding test cases 423 automatic vs.TEMS Investigation 14. manual 424 creating test reports 430 editing test cases 424 error conditions 431 notes on performance 431 opening tests 431 removing test cases 424 resetting test cases 429 running the test 427 saving tests 431 status of test cases 429 stopping the test 429 test 423 test case 422 test case group 423 GSM EDGE Capability (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 283 GSM Handover (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 283 GSM scanning 139 GSM Tx Power (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 284 H handover behavior in GSM (Sony Ericsson phones) 283 Hang Up activity in scripts for video call 264 for voice call 267 Help menu 34 HTC Imagio detection of 51 HTC Touch Pro2 detection of 51 HTTP Get activity in scripts 252 I If--Else activity in scripts 238 IMSI 50 in-building positioning using Map window 86 448 .

Index using Pinpoint Window 120 indoor positioning using Map window 86 using Pinpoint Window 120 information elements 5. 388 accessibility 389 integrity 389 obtaining with TEMS products 389 purpose of 388 retainability 389 L labels 357 Layer 3 Messages (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 284 layers in Map window 357.0 449 . 381 licensing in TEMS Investigation 2 line charts 329 adding charts 332 Additional Information pane 331 changing contents and properties 332 Chart pane 330 deleting a chart 336 editing contents 332 editing general properties 332 exporting 336 Legend pane 331 organization of window 329 presenting data from a different device 336 selecting additional information 336 selecting events 335 selecting information elements 333 time scale 331 Y-axis pane 331 loading a logfile for analysis 89 NT12-7002 ver 1. 301 Data category comparison with pre-12. 433 KPIs (Key Performance Indicators) 213.0 versions 441 installing TEMS Investigation 26 IPv6 233 K Key Performance Indicators 213 keyboard shortcuts 35.

TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual loading logfiles 94 loading logfiles from other sources 94 Logfile menu 34 logfile recording 83 clearing history buffer 86 default folder 86 inserting filemarks 85 other options 85 Recording Properties dialog 85 logfile reports 112 contents 118 event statistics 115 external devices to include 116 saving and loading setups 118 scanned channels 116 thresholding of information elements 113 user details 118 logfiles activities performed in 92 equipment used when recording 91 exporting 98 ArcView settings 105 Ethereal (Wireshark) settings 106 executing export orders 107 from command prompt 107 MapInfo settings 104 MDM settings 106 Planet settings 106 saving and loading setups 106 text file settings 102 general information on 90 loading 94 loading contents of 94 progress indication on status bar 94 loading for analysis 89 loading from other sources 94 metadata on 90 opening 89 recording 83 searching 95 statistics on activities in 93 transferring via FTP 95 450 .

381 adding presentation layers 381 control of 382 map layer 357 presentation layers 357.0 451 . 106 MDM 106 export in MDM format 98 loading MDM files in TEMS Investigation 95 Mentum CellPlanner 42 menu bar 28. 104 maps 356 centering 385 constructing a GeoSet from map files 357 GeoSet 357 labels 357 notes on route plotting and updating 364 panning 385 positioning maps in bitmap or TIF format 359 themes 357. 34 merging uplink AQM data into logfiles 110 NT12-7002 ver 1. 361 Legend tab 381 previous view.Index viewing metadata of 89 viewing statistics on activities in 89 viewing summary of activities in 89 LTE scanning 167 M managing external equipment (general) 44 manual operation of external equipment 64 Manual UE Configuration utility 53 Map window 356 information on theme markers 378 layers 357. returning to 383 right-hand pane 378 scale bar 383 setting projection for 384 statistics 380 toolbar 384 viewing entire layer 384 MapInfo 98. 360 zooming 384 Marconi Planet 98.

1 User’s Manual message windows 317 catch-up function 319 changing contents and properties of 317 filtering contents of 320 freezing 320 highlighting messages in 322 plain-text message decoding 319 presentation of discarded messages 319 searching contents of 321 synchronization of 319 messages 6.TEMS Investigation 14. 301 MMS Receive activity in scripts 260 MMS Send activity in scripts 259 Mobile Receiving Unit 399 mode reports 6 Mode Reports window adjusting updating frequency for Qualcomm reports 323 Motorola UEs reading EFEM logfiles from 95 MRU 399 MTQI 418 MTR files 95 N narrowband interference scanning (CDMA) 194 Navigator 27 Equipment tab basics 48 device context menu 49 refreshing 61 re-pairing phones with AQM modules 61 saving equipment configuration 63 Info Element tab 37 Logfile tab 39 Menu tab 36 Worksheets tab 40 Navigator pane 36 NDIS data connection 59 Network Bandwidth activity in scripts 256 Network Connect activity (in scripts) prerequisites for various devices 245 Network Connect activity in scripts 243 Network Disconnect activity in scripts 247 452 .

technology-specific control functions 76 sector lock control 287 Nonvolatile Item Read/Write (Qualcomm device control function) 72 O online help 34 P package options for TEMS Investigation 2 Parallel activity in scripts 239 parallel coordinates presentation 347 PCTel scanners CDMA scanning with 186 detection of SeeGull EX 51 detection of SeeGull MX 51 GSM scanning with 139 LTE scanning with 167 plugging in 47 WCDMA pilot scanning with 148 WCDMA scanning with 144 PESQ 397 PESQ devices See AQM modules phone number of user terminal 50 phones 6 plugging in 47 properties of 279 pilot scanning (CDMA) 187 pilot scanning (TD-SCDMA) 183 pilot scanning (WCDMA) 146 Ping activity in scripts 254 Pinpoint Window 120 creating planned routes in 120 relation to other TEMS Investigation functions 132 walking planned routes in 126 NT12-7002 ver 1.Index network scanning (WCDMA scanning mode) 164 presentation 166 setting up 165 Network Search window (WCDMA) 166 Nokia phones. properties of channel lock control 287 GSM cell barring control 287 RAT lock vs.0 453 .

TEMS Investigation 14. manual 74 plotting density in Map window 364 POLQA 397 preamble scanning (WiMAX) 198 preferred GPS unit 60 presentation attributes of information elements 37 presentation layers 361 Presentation menu 34 presentation of data 301 presentation windows export/import of 304 synchronization 303 types of 301 updating 303 PS Attach activity in scripts 247 PS Detach activity in scripts 247 Q Qualcomm chipset based devices Nonvolatile Item Read/Write control function (UMTS) 72 properties of 288 Qualcomm devices with LTE capability 56 quick guide to user interface 26 R Radio Access Technology lock (manual) 74 Radio Access Technology Lock activity in scripts 237 RAT lock 237 applying manually 74 recommended skills 26 recording logfiles 83 Release Note 4 Report Generator 112 reports on logfiles 112 454 .1 User’s Manual pinpointing in Map window 86 presentation 377 in Pinpoint Window 120 planned routes creating 120 walking 126 repeating parts of 129 skipping waypoints 130 PLMN control.

144 detection of 51 LTE scanning with 167 plugging in 47 WCDMA pilot scanning with 150 routes 6 RRC WCDMA capability control. properties of 289 scanners 7 plugging in 47 scanning general 134 manual 135 notes on scanner multitasking 137 performing a scan 79 performing manually 135 presenting scan data 136 recording scan data manually 136 scripted 134 setting up manually 135 technical data on scanning devices 136 scanning. CDMA 186 "PN Scan" bar charts 192 general settings 187 methods 186 Narrowband Interference Scan Bar Chart 194 narrowband interference scanning 194 of pilots 187 RSSI Scan Bar Chart 193 RSSI scanning 193 sorting of PNs in presentations 192 NT12-7002 ver 1. manual 77 RSSI scanning CDMA 193 GSM 140 LTE 177 TD-SCDMA 185 WCDMA 161 WiMAX 201 Run Script activity in scripts 240 S Samsung Galaxy S 4G properties of 279 Samsung LTE modems.0 455 .Index Rohde & Schwarz scanners 139.

TD-SCDMA 182 general settings 182 methods 182 of pilots 183 presentation 184.1 User’s Manual spectrum analysis 195 Strongest Scanned PN Bar Chart 192 scanning. WCDMA 144 CPICH Best UARFCN Data window 153 CPICH Data status window 153 CPICH pilot pollution 155 CPICH Scan bar charts 153 CPICH Scan line charts 154 CPICH scanning 146 device capabilities 144 Finger Info status windows 158 methods 144 network scanning 164 number of active set members 155 of P-SCH and S-SCH channels 157 of synchronization channels (SCHs) 146 of timeslots on SCH 159 presenting scrambling codes from multiple UARFCNs together 159 RSSI Scan Bar Chart 162 RSSI scanning 161 456 . 185 RSSI scanning 185 sorting of cells in presentations 184 scanning.TEMS Investigation 14. 167 RSSI scanning 140 spectrum analysis 143 System Information Decoding 142 scanning. LTE 167 enhanced power scanning 180 LTE signal scanning 168 presentation 176. GSM 139 BSIC decoding in RSSI Scanning mode 140. 141 C/I measurements 141 device capabilities 139. 178. 181 RSSI scanning 177 sorting of cells in presentations 177 spectrum scanning 178 scanning. 180. 167 methods 139.

WiMAX 197 general settings 197 methods 197 preamble scanning 198 presentation 201 RSSI scanning 201 spectrum analysis 201 SCH scanning 146 SCH Timeslot Scan Bar Chart (WCDMA) 160 scripts 230 Activate activity 236 activity filter 275 Answer activity (for video call) 264 Answer activity (for voice call) 266 AQM Measurement activity 267 AT activity 236 Band Lock activity 236 basics of creating 206 capabilities of devices 203 comparison with old command sequences 440 context menu in workflow pane 275 Control activities 236 Control Flow activities 238 control structures 214 copy--paste 230 data services. setting up 210 Deactivate activity 237 Dial activity (for voice call) 266 editing workflows 230 E-mail Receive activity 259 E-mail Send activity 258 failure handling properties 270 Filemark activity 237 FTP Download activity 249 FTP Upload activity 250 general activity properties 270 Hang Up activity (for video call) 264 NT12-7002 ver 1.Index SCH Timeslot Scan Bar Chart 160 sorting of scrambling codes in presentations 158 spectrum analysis 163 Spectrum Analysis bar charts 164 Synch Channel Data status window 157 scanning.0 457 .

setting up 209 Network Disconnect activity 247 Parallel activity 239 parallel construct 218 Ping activity 254 PS attach 212 PS Attach activity 247 PS detach 212 PS Detach activity 247 Radio Access Technology Lock activity 237 Run Script activity 229.TEMS Investigation 14. 240 running 232 saving and loading 273 saving workflow as image 274 Scan activities 262 Sequence activity 240 sequences 214 SIP Register activity 248 SIP Unregister activity 248 SMS Receive activity 262 SMS Send activity 261 snippets 213 Start IP Sniffing activity 248 Start Logfile Recording activity 237 Stop IP Sniffing activity 249 Stop Logfile Recording activity 237 Streaming activity 264 supported services by cellular technology 204 suppressing parts of 235 458 .1 User’s Manual Hang Up activity (for voice call) 267 HTTP Get activity 252 If--Else activity 238 if--else constructs 215 importing and exporting 271 introduction to 203 IP activities 243 Messaging activities 258 MMS Receive activity 260 MMS Send activity 259 moving activities in 230 Network Bandwidth activity 256 Network Connect activity 243 network connection.

240 UDP activity 254 UE control 231 validating 232 Video activities 264 Video Dial activity 264 Voice activities 266 voice. 233 SIP Register activity in scripts 248 SIP Unregister activity in scripts 248 size attribute (of information element) editing 39 skills recommended for TEMS Investigation users 26 SMS Receive activity in scripts 262 SMS Send activity in scripts 261 snippets in scripts 213 Sony Ericsson phones GSM scanning with 139 properties of 279 WCDMA pilot scanning with 146 Sony Ericsson phones.0 459 .Index Terminate activity 230. properties of CAS Access Class 280 CAS Lock on PLMN 280 NT12-7002 ver 1. 240 Wait For activity 226 WAP Get activity 253 WAP Streaming activity 265 While activity 239 while loops 216 workflow control structures 214 zooming the workflow pane 275 searching a logfile 95 searching in message windows 321 Sequence activity in scripts 240 Service Control 203 See also scripts Service Control Designer 204 Service Control Monitor 232. creating script for 206 VoIP Answer activity 268 VoIP Dial activity 268 VoIP Hang Up activity 268 VoIP Voice Quality activity 268 Wait activity 225.

48 statistics presentation in Map window 380 status bar 28.TEMS Investigation 14.1 User’s Manual CAS Speech Codec 280 EDGE Capability 283 Extended Reports 279 GSM Adjacent Scan 281 GSM Barred Cells 282 GSM Cell Selection 282 GSM Handover 283 GSM Tx Power 284 Layer 3 Messages 284 messages and mode reports 279 RAT lock vs. manual 77 speech codec information elements populating with Qualcomm chipset based devices 288 speech codecs (of Sony Ericsson phones) 280 Speech Quality Index (SQI) 391 SQI 391 SQI-MOS 391 alignment with PESQ 394 comparison with RxQual (GSM version) 396 input to algorithm 392 output 393 SRUs 144 GSM scanning with 139 plugging in 47 WCDMA pilot scanning with 146 stacked bar chart 347 Start IP Sniffing activity in scripts 248 Start Logfile Recording activity in scripts 237 starting TEMS Investigation 26. technology-specific control functions 76 WCDMA Barred Cells 284 WCDMA BLER Target 285 WCDMA Cell Selection 285 WCDMA RRC Radio Capability 286 sounds for events 297 spectrum scanning CDMA 195 LTE 178 WCDMA 163 WiMAX 201 speech codec control. 33 460 .

360 Cell ARFCN theme 375 Cell Color theme 373 Cell Line theme 370 Cell theme 367 cell themes 361 constructing cell themes 366 event themes 365 IE themes 362 deleting 378 editing 377 event themes 360 information element (IE) themes 360 Pinpoint theme 361. 377 reordering 378 visibility of 377 toolbars 27.Index Status Control Monitor 80 status windows 305 changing font size in 312 changing properties of 309 repeating columns in multiple groups 312 setting up contents of 305 ST-Ericsson chipset based phones. 32 File and View toolbar 33 Record toolbar 32 Replay toolbar 32 Report toolbar 33 NT12-7002 ver 1.0 461 . properties of 279 Stop IP Sniffing activity in scripts 249 Stop Logfile Recording activity in scripts 237 Streaming activity in scripts 264 support contact information 5 symbol attribute (of information element) editing 39 Synch Channel Data window (WCDMA) 157 T TD-SCDMA Physical Channel Monitor design of 313 TD-SCDMA scanning 182 TEMS Bulletins 5 Terminate activity in scripts 240 themes 357.

414 evaluating performance of 326 how to test 324 troubleshooting 326 WAP-based 265 video telephony 412 View menu 34 voice calls. dialing manually 77 VoIP 410 VoIP Answer activity in scripts 268 VoIP Dial activity in scripts 268 VoIP Hang Up activity in scripts 268 VoIP Voice Quality activity in scripts 268 VSQI 326. dialing manually 77 Video Dial activity in scripts 264 Video Monitor 325 properties of 325 video streaming 324.TEMS Investigation 14.0 versions 439 quick guide to 26 user modes 29 user-assisted detection of external devices 53 user-defined events 290 V video calls. 414 VTQI 412 W Wait activity in scripts 240 WAP Get activity in scripts 253 WAP Streaming activity in scripts 265 WAP-based video streaming 265 WCDMA Barred Cells (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 284 WCDMA BLER Target (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 285 WCDMA Cell Selection (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 285 WCDMA RRC Radio Capability (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 286 462 .1 User’s Manual track (walk along planned route) 126 tracks 7 Transcom scanners LTE scanning with 167 U UDP activity in scripts 254 user interface 29 comparison with user interface in pre-12.

1 16 what was new in TEMS Investigation 14. presenting on map 366 WiMAX scanning 197 Window menu 34 Windows 7 233 Windows Vista 233 Wireshark 98.0 11 what’s in this manual 3 what’s new in this TEMS Investigation version 8 While activity in scripts 239 Wi-Fi access points presentation on map 366 WiMAX cells.Index WCDMA scanning 144 what was new in TEMS Investigation 13.0 21 what was new in TEMS Investigation 13.0 463 . 30 opening from Command Prompt 31 predefined 31 NT12-7002 ver 1. 31 workspaces 27. 106 Worksheet menu 34 worksheets 27.

2012 © Ascom 2012. and professional service providers. Ascom acknowledges all registered trademarks appearing herein. We are the industry leader. . ANd opTiMizE MobilE NETworkS. equipment vendors. These  state-of-the-art  offerings  facilitate  the  deployment.  monitoring. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.ascom. Virginia 20190 | USA www. ANAlyzE.  www. optimization. All rights reserved.com/tems 04.  benchmarking. AScoM NETwork TESTiNg lEAdS ThE world iN providiNg bEST-iN-clASS SoluTioNS To MEASurE.ascom. Ascom reserves the right to change specifications without notice. 1943 Isaac Newton Square Reston. Ascom Network Testing Inc. TEMS is a trademark of Ascom . and analyzing network performance. and our products are  supplied to the world’s top mobile operators.com/tems  The  TEMS™  Portfolio  offers  a  complete  set  of  trusted  solutions  for  drive  testing. and maintenance of mobile  networks.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful